- Manuals
- Brands
- Seat Manuals
- Automobile
- ALTEA XL
- Owner’s manual
-
Contents
-
Table of Contents
-
Bookmarks
Quick Links
Related Manuals for Seat ALTEA XL
Summary of Contents for Seat ALTEA XL
-
Page 2
Foreword This Instruction manual and its corresponding supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself with your vehicle. Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling will contribute to preserve its value. For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modifications and parts change. If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner as this should be kept with the vehicle. -
Page 4: Table Of Contents
Radio frequency remote control … . . Seat belts …….
-
Page 5
Contents Technical Data Trailer towing ……….. . Instructions to follow . -
Page 6: Manual Structure
Because this is a general manual for the ALTEA XL, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types For the sake of the environment or variants of the model or model year;…
-
Page 7: Content
(e.g. “Air conditioning”). The entire manual is divided into five large parts which are: 1. Safety First Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat belts, airbags, seats, etc. 2. Controls and equipment Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit- able climate in the passenger compartment, etc.
-
Page 8: Safety First
The warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety following list includes most of the safety equipment in your SEAT: and for your passengers safety.
-
Page 9
– Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals. – Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica- tion, alcohol, drugs). – Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly acoording to your size. – Observe traffic laws and speed limits. -
Page 10: Safe Driving
Safe driving – Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and weather conditions. – When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly — at least every two hours. – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or are in tension. WARNING When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.
-
Page 11: Proper Sitting Position For Occupants
⇒ fig. and steering wheel – Move the driver’s seat forwards or backwards so that you are able to press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with your knees still slightly angled ⇒ – Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering wheel.
-
Page 12
The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk… -
Page 13
• Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the instrument panel, out the window or on the seat. An incor- WARNING rect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a •… -
Page 14
Vehicle occupants are pressed into their seats during a rear end collision. The resulting body pressure on the backrest activates the crash-active head restraint* on the front seat, which moves rapidly forwards and upwards at the same time. This movement reduces the distance between the occupant’s head and the head rest, thus reducing the risk of head injuries such as brain trauma. -
Page 15
(e.g. by “falling” back into the seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat head restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dangerous as the crash-active head restraints will return to the original position immedi- Fig. -
Page 16
• • never kneel on the seats, Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat • never tilt your backrest far to the rear, rear head restraints. •… -
Page 17: Pedal Area
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in • order to stop the vehicle. never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt, • never carry any person in the luggage compartment. Wear suitable shoes Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feeling for the pedals.
-
Page 18: Stowing Luggage
Safe driving WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued) • • Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor Always stow objects in the luggage compartment and secure them on mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk the fastening rings.
-
Page 19
Safe driving Note • Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart- ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered. • Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially available. -
Page 20: Seat Belts
WARNING • Before starting the vehicle: If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases. – Fasten your safety belt securely. • Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents.
-
Page 21: Why Wear Seat Belts
Fig. 7 Vehicle about to hit plied by four. a wall: the occupants are Because the passengers in our example are not restrained by seat belts, the not wearing seat belts entire amount of kinetic energy has to be absorbed at the point of impact ⇒…
-
Page 22
It is also important for the rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could otherwise be thrown forward violently in an accident. Rear passengers who do not use seat belts endanger not only themselves but also the front ⇒… -
Page 23
• If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts ries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. -
Page 24: Seat Belts
• Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges. • Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.
-
Page 25
• Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased. -
Page 26
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident. • The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso ⇒ page 24, fig. -
Page 27
• WARNING For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen. -
Page 28: Belt Tension Devices
The seat belts for the front occupants are equipped with belt tension devices. Sensors will only trigger the belt tension devices during severe head-on, lateral and rear collisions, and only if the seat belt is actually being worn. This Incorrectly fastened seat belts retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the occu- pants.
-
Page 29
The belt tension device and seat belt including its automatic retractor cannot be repaired. • Any work on the belt tension devices and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a qualified workshop only. -
Page 30: Airbag System
The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an • If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially you critical injuries.
-
Page 31
WARNING • If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child The warning lamp monitors all airbags and belt tension devices in the of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases. -
Page 32
Airbag system Repairs, maintenance and disposal of the airbags Monitoring of airbag and belt tension device system Both the airbag and belt tension device systems operation is constantly monitored electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on, the warning The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehicle. … -
Page 33
Airbag system WARNING (continued) • We strongly recommend you to go to a qualified workshop for all work on the airbag system. • Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body. • The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed. -
Page 34: Front Airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle’s overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly.
-
Page 35
• the vehicle turns over. WARNING • The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly ⇒ page 10, “Proper sitting position for occupants”. • If a fault has occured in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. -
Page 36
Airbag system may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica- tion of fire in the vehicle. Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered Fig. 21 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags are triggered The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel and dash panel when the ⇒… -
Page 37: Side Airbags
• If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
-
Page 38
• Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part panels have not been correctly fitted. of the vehicle’s overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the •… -
Page 39
Airbag system Function of side airbags The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel- lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. -
Page 40
Any work on the side airbag system or removal and installation of the If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat) correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if should only be performed by a qualified workshop. -
Page 41: Curtain Airbags
(airbags with gas generator) for the driver, front curtain airbag system”. passenger and passengers on the rear seats, • The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part in the dash panel insert ⇒ page 30. a warning lamp of the vehicle’s overall passive safety system.
-
Page 42
WARNING • In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling. • Fig. 25 Deployed curtain… -
Page 43
Airbag system WARNING (continued) • There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu- pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. -
Page 44: Deactivating Airbags
Airbag system Deactivating airbags* Disabling front passenger airbag If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must be de-activated. Fig. 27 Warning lamp for deactivated passenger airbag in centre console When the passenger airbag is deactivated, this means that only the frontal airbag is deactivated.
-
Page 45
• As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger airbag again. • Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other-… -
Page 46: Child Safety
We recommend that children under 12 years of age are transported on the rear seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a child restraint system or the seat belts provided, depending on their age, height and weight.
-
Page 47
Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an accident, your vehicle. -
Page 48: Child Seats
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard Group 0: For babies from about 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number ⇒ fig.
-
Page 49
We recommend you to include together with the on-board documentation, Children under 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best the manufacturer’s Child Seat instructions manual. protected by group 2 child seats together with properly adjusted seat belts. Group 3 child seats WARNING Children over 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5… -
Page 50: Securing Child Seats
• When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the restraint system suitable for age, weight and size. following ways: •…
-
Page 51
Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear floor. The access to “ISOFIX” rings is between the rear back rest and the seat. -
Page 52
Safety First Operating instructions Practical tips Technical Data… -
Page 53
Fig. 32 Instrument panel… -
Page 54: Operating Instructions
Ignition lock ……… Left seat heating button …….
-
Page 55
Cockpit Handle for releasing the bonnet ……Button for opening and closing the front windows ..Safety switch* for the rear windows . -
Page 56: Instruments
Cockpit Instruments Instrument overview The instruments display the vehicle operating status. Fig. 33 Detailed view of instrument panel: instrument panel Detailed view of instrument panel: instrument panel Fuel gauge ⇒ page 56 Multi-function display Engine coolant temperature gauge ⇒ page 56 Rev counter ⇒…
-
Page 57
Cockpit Fuel gauge and reserve indicator Engine coolant temperature display This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature. Fig. 34 Instrument panel: Fig. 35 Instrument panel: fuel gauge engine coolant tempera- ture gauge Instrument panel: fuel gauge The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres. Needle in cold zone ⇒… -
Page 58
Cockpit display . Stop the car and switch off the engine. Check the coolant level ⇒ page 220 ⇒ For the sake of the environment Changing up into higher gears early will help you to save fuel and minimise Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should obtain engine noise. -
Page 59: Digital Display In The Instrument Panel
Cockpit Digital display in the instrument panel Displayed categories* The display in the instrument panel shows the mileage and Display (without warning or information texts) trip recorder as well as the selector lever position. The display in the instrument panel shows, amongst other things, the mileage and trip recorder as well as the selector lever position.
-
Page 60
Cockpit Recommended gear display* Service interval display A Service pre-warning will appear in the mileage displays if a service is due This display helps to save fuel. soon. A “spanner” symbol appears and the display “km” with the distance that can be driven until the next service appointment is due. The display will change after approximately 10 seconds. -
Page 61
Cockpit Display with multi-function display (MFD)* The multi-function system uses two automatic memories: 1 — Actual memory and 2 — Total memory. The selected memory will be shown The multi-function display (MFD) shows you information on in the upper right-hand corner of the display. the journey and fuel consumption. -
Page 62
Cockpit Displays in the multi-function display (MFD)* Memory displays • Driving speed • Journey duration • Average speed • Distance • Distance to empty (the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel) • Average fuel consumption • Current fuel consumption •… -
Page 63
Cockpit Km — Fuel range The speed may be altered using the rocker switch in steps of 5 km/h within 5 seconds of the initial memory value. The fuel range is calculated using the figures for tank content and current fuel consumption. -
Page 64
Cockpit If several priority 2 warning reports are detected at the same time, the Note symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will be shown In the case of screens without warning or information texts, faults are indi- as a reminder at the side of the display. -
Page 65: Instrument Panel Menus
Cockpit Instrument panel menus* Example of menu use All the menus on the instrument panel may be used according to the following procedure. The instrument panel menus may vary according to the version of the model. Fig. 44 Steering wheel controls: button A to confirm the menu selec- tion and switch B to…
-
Page 66
Cockpit – Press button on the windscreen wiper lever. The Configura- Example menu “Winter tyres” tion menu is opened. On the display Function Winter tyres Name of menu displayed 2. Access the “Configuration” menu with the steering wheel controls X km/h The current set speed is displayed –… -
Page 67
Cockpit Main menu Open main menu – Switch the ignition on. The menu provides access to the different display functions (only with the MFD lever). – Press and hold the eject button for at least 2 seconds. It may be necessary to repeat this operation until the main menu is displayed. -
Page 68
Cockpit Multi-function display menu (MFD) Telephone This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a telephone mounted by the manufacturer: “Fixed tel- The multi-function display (MFD) shows you information on ephone installation” the journey and fuel consumption. Vehicle condition This menu displays current warning or information texts: “Vehicle status menu”… -
Page 69
Cockpit Resetting a memory Personal selection of display – Select the memory where you wish to erase the values. The driver can establish which displays are shown on the instrument panel display as required: – Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on •… -
Page 70
Cockpit Distance travelled in km WARNING The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on. There could be black ice on the road surface even if the “snowflake symbol” The maximum display value in both memories is 9999 miles. The memory will is not shown. -
Page 71
Cockpit The warning and information texts may be viewed in this menu. If there is no Lights and visibility From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehi- warning or information message, the option Vehicle status is not displayed. cle lighting settings. -
Page 72
Cockpit • SEAT dealers are able to programme other functions or change the Displayed on the Function existing functions depending upon the vehicle equipment. screen • The Configuration menu is only accessible when the vehicle is at a Open door One door: Individual unlocking activated. -
Page 73
Cockpit Lights and visibility menu Note From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be displayed. settings. Open Lights and visibility Menu – Select the option Configuration from the main menu: “Main ⇒… -
Page 74: Warning Lamps
Cockpit Warning lamps Overview of the warning lamps The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults. Fig. 48 Instrument panel with warning lamps. Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain models/model years or are optional extras. Safety First Operating instructions Practical tips…
-
Page 75
SAFE Electronic immobiliser ⇒ page 78 Alternator fault ⇒ page 19 Fasten seat belts! WARNING • Failure to observe warning lamps and warning messages can result in ⇒ page 78 Tyre pressure serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle. -
Page 76
Cockpit Coolant Level* / temperature WARNING (continued) • The warning lamp lights up if the coolant temperature is too The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before you open the high or if the coolant level is too low. bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, you must switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or There is a fault if:… -
Page 77
Cockpit Further information on the indicators ⇒ page 116. First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity ⇒ WARNING Engine management* • If your vehicle is immobilised for any technical reasons, move it to a This warning lamp monitors the engine management system safe distance from traffic. -
Page 78
Cockpit Main beam headlights Anti-lock brake system (ABS) This warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on. A warning lamp system monitors the ABS. The warning lamp is switched on once main beams are on or once the The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is headlight flasher is operating. -
Page 79
Cockpit Tyre pressure* WARNING (continued) The tyre pressure control system controls the tyre speed and wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance. the frequency spectrum of each tyre. -
Page 80
Cockpit • Bulb defect The wheel on one axle is changed. Tyre pressure adjustment The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle’s exte- Following the modification to tyre pressure or after changing one or more rior lighting is defective. ⇒… -
Page 81
Cockpit Cruise control system* This warning lamp can light up together with the anti-lock brake system warning lamp. The warning lamp comes on when the cruise control system is switched on. WARNING • The warning lamp lights up when the cruise control system is switched on. Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on Further notes on the cruise control system ⇒… -
Page 82
Cockpit Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)* assistance. The power steering does not work if the battery is flat or if the engine is off (for example, for towing). You should take into account that you This warning lamp monitors the electronic stabilisation will need considerably more power than normal to steer the vehicle if the steering assistance is reduced or has failed completely. -
Page 83
Note ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information, see ⇒ page 183, A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used. “Brakes”. If the TCS button is activated, the TCS function deactivates and the warning lamp remains lit. -
Page 84: General Information
Steering wheel controls* Steering wheel controls* • General information Audio version, to control the available audio functions from the steering wheel. • Audio + Telephone version, to control the available audio functions and The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible the telephone system from the steering wheel.
-
Page 85
Steering wheel controls* Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume down Volume down Volume down Next track Search for next station No specified function Hold down: Fast forward Last track Search for last station No function specified Hold down:Rewind No function specified No function specified… -
Page 86
Steering wheel controls* Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls Fig. 53 Steering wheel controls (depending on Fig. 52 Controls on the steering wheel version of model) Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* TELEPHONE Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down… -
Page 87
Steering wheel controls* Movement on telephone menu No function specified Address book / Last calls / Next preset Next track Calls received / Missed calls Movement on telephone menu No function specified Address book / Last calls / Previous preset Previous track Calls received / Missed calls Change menu on instrument… -
Page 88: Radio Navigation System
Steering wheel controls* Radio navigation system Steering wheel audio version controls Fig. 55 Steering wheel Fig. 54 Controls on the controls (depending on steering wheel version of model) Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* NAVIGATOR Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume down Volume down Volume down…
-
Page 89
Steering wheel controls* No function specified Operates on instrument panel Next preset Next track No function specified Operates on instrument panel Previous preset Previous track Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel No function specified panel Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument panel… -
Page 90
Steering wheel controls* Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* NAVIGATOR TELEPHONE Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume up Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down Volume down Next track Search for next station No function specified No function specified No function specified Hold down: Fast forward Last track… -
Page 91
Steering wheel controls* Change menu on instrument Change menu on instrument Change menu on instru- Change menu on instrument No function specified panel panel ment panel panel Operates on instrument Operates on instru- Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Confirm panel ment panel… -
Page 92: Central Locking
Unlocking and locking Unlocking and locking Central locking Locking the vehicle* ⇒ page 98, fig. 63 – Press button on the remote control to lock all doors and the tailgate or turn the key in the door to lock all doors and the Basic functions tailgate.
-
Page 93
Unlocking and locking Deactivating deadlock when the vehicle is locked Note – Press twice the locking button on the remote control within • While the driver’s door is open, the vehicle can not be locked with the two seconds. The vehicle is locked without activating the dead- remote control. -
Page 94
Unlocking and locking Locking system for involuntary unlocking* Unlocking all doors and the boot The unlock button on the remote must be pressed twice so that all doors It is an anti-theft system and prevents the unintentional and the boot can be opened. unlocking of the vehicle. -
Page 95
Unlocking and locking • Central locking button The driver or front passenger door cannot be locked if any of the vehicle doors (except the tailgate) are open. This avoids the user from forgetting his The central locking button allows you to lock and unlock the key inside the vehicle. -
Page 96
Unlocking and locking Deactivating selective unlocking Locking the driver’s door manually With the driver’s door open, turn the key to lock for approx. 3 s. Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for the left hand side door and anti-clockwise for the right hand side door. -
Page 97
Unlocking and locking Childproof lock This function is independent of the vehicle electronic opening and locking systems. It only affects rear doors. It can only be activated The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being and deactivated manually, as described below: opened from the inside. -
Page 98: Keys
Unlocking and locking • Keys Never leave the key tab in the vehicle. If you sell the vehicle, please give the plastic key tab to the new owner. Set of keys Duplicate keys If you need a replacement key, take your key tab to an Authorised Service The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a Centre.
-
Page 99: Radio Frequency Remote Control
Unlocking and locking Radio frequency remote control Locking and unlocking the vehicle The remote control key is used to lock and unlock the vehicle from a distance. Fig. 64 Range of the remote control: ⇒ fig. 63 Using the button (arrow) on the control, the key shaft is released.
-
Page 100
Unlocking and locking Changing the battery WARNING • If the battery indicator does not flash when the buttons are pushed, the An improper use of the key can cause serious injuries. • battery must be replaced. Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their own. -
Page 101: Anti-Theft Alarm System
Unlocking and locking • Anti-theft alarm system* Unfold the key by pressing the button shown by the (arrow). • Use the lock on the driver door to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm system remains active, but an alarm is not triggered immediately. Description of anti-theft alarm system* •…
-
Page 102
Unlocking and locking Activation – It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the button on the remote control is used. Deactivation – Press the button on the remote control twice. -
Page 103: Tailgate
Unlocking and locking Tailgate Unlocking and locking The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric. It is activated by using the handle on the tailgate Fig. 66 Detail of the inside of the tailgate: hand grip Opening the tailgate ⇒…
-
Page 104
Unlocking and locking Emergency opening WARNING • This allows the vehicle to be opened if the central locking Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury. • does not operate (for example, if the battery is flat) The tailgate must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. -
Page 105: Windows
Unlocking and locking Windows Buttons on the driver’s door Button for window in front left door Button for window in front right door Opening or closing the windows electrically Buttons for rear windows* The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear the controls on the driver’s door.
-
Page 106
Unlocking and locking One-touch closing does not work when the ignition has been switched off, Note even if the key is in the ignition. If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc- The automatic open and close function will not work if the battery has been tion, the window will automatically open again ⇒… -
Page 107: Sliding/Tilting Roof
Unlocking and locking Using the remote control WARNING (continued) – Push the lock button on the remote control for about 3 seconds. • Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only All windows which function electrically will be either opened or intend to be gone for a short time.
-
Page 108
Unlocking and locking Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof WARNING (continued) ⇒ fig. 69 ⇒ – Turn the rotary button to position • Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if they have access to the keys. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that Opening/tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. -
Page 109
Unlocking and locking Note The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary button remains in the last position selected if the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle and will have to be re-positioned the next time you drive. Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting roof* Fig. -
Page 110: Lights And Visibility
Lights and visibility Lights and visibility Lights Switching on the fog lights* – Pull the switch out of position to the first stop. The symbol in the light switch lights up. Switching lights on and off Switching on the rear fog lights (vehicles with front fog lights) …
-
Page 111
Lights and visibility • The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You Deactivation should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor. – Turn the light switch to 0. • If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the car will automatically Automatic lighting… -
Page 112
Lights and visibility • If the daylight driving automatic light function is switched on, the fog Daytime lights (bi-xenon lamps) lights or rear fog light cannot be switched on in addition. The daytime lights increase road safety in vehicles fitted with bi-xenon lamps. •… -
Page 113
Lights and visibility • the light control is in position • Note the photosensor detects “darkness”. Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the following cases: country. • If the time period for the delay in switching off the headlamps has ended •… -
Page 114
Lights and visibility Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control Dynamic headlight range control Vehicles with gas discharge lamps (“xenon lamps”) are equipped with dynamic headlight range control. This means that the headlights will be adjusted to suit the load level of the vehicle and “nodding movements” when pulling off and braking are automatically compensated for. -
Page 115
Lights and visibility A fault in the system is indicated via the flashing of the control lamp on the WARNING instrument panel. At the same time, a text message with information or instructions to perform necessary operations may appear on the instrument If the “automatic dipped light control”… -
Page 116
Lights and visibility 2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights ⇒ WARNING 3. Switch the engine off. • The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle to draw the attention 4. -
Page 117
Lights and visibility Indicator and main beam headlight lever Switching main beam on and off – Turn the light switch to position The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the ⇒ page 116, fig. 77 parking lights and the headlight flasher. –… -
Page 118: Interior Lights
Lights and visibility • Interior lights The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam headlights are already on. The warning lamp then comes on in the combi- instrument. • Front interior light type 1 The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever –…
-
Page 119
Lights and visibility Interior light switched on Note Push the switch to the position If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off Interior light switched off O after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour- ⇒… -
Page 120
Lights and visibility Front reading lights Switching the reading lights off Press the corresponding button to switch the reading light off. Rear interior and reading lights* Fig. 80 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type Fig. 82 Interior roof trim: rear interior lights and reading lights. -
Page 121: Visibility
Lights and visibility light turns off about 20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior lights are The sun visors for the driver and the front passenger can be pulled out of their ⇒ fig. 83 switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on. mountings in the centre of the vehicle and turned towards the doors …
-
Page 122: Windscreen Wipers
Lights and visibility Sun visors on the rear side windows* Intermittent wipe – Pull out the visor and hook it onto the hooks at the top of the door – Move the lever up to position ⇒ fig. frame – Move the control to the left or right to set the length of the intervals.
-
Page 123
Lights and visibility icing in the zone. The function is switched on by pressing the rear heating For the “drip” function to work again, you have to turn the ignition off and window key then on again. • When the “intermittent wipe function” is on, the intervals are directly proportional to the speed. -
Page 124
Lights and visibility Rain sensor* Switching on the rain sensor ⇒ fig. – Move the windscreen wiper lever into position The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain. – Move the control to the left or right to set the sensitivity of the rain sensor. -
Page 125
Lights and visibility Rear window wiper Switching on the windscreen wiper and washer system ⇒ fig. – Press the lever fully forwards to position 88. The wash The windscreen wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper function will start immediately and the wiper will start with a and the wash and wipe system for the rear window. -
Page 126: Mirrors
Lights and visibility Headlight washer system Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror* The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses. The automatic anti-dazzle function can be switched on and off as desired. The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering wheel for at least 1.5 seconds –…
-
Page 127
Lights and visibility 2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a Note good view to the rear of the vehicle. • The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun 3. Turn knob to position R (right exterior mirror). blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects preventing light from reaching the interior mirror. -
Page 128
Lights and visibility • Synchronised mirror adjustment The rear view mirrors can be adjusted separately or simultaneously, as described before. 1. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror). • The wing mirrors folding function does not activate with speeds higher 2. -
Page 129: The Importance Of Correct Seat Adjustment
Always keep your feet on the foot well when the vehicle is moving; Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection never rest them on the dash panel, out of the window or on the seat. This offered by seat belts and airbags.
-
Page 130: Head Restraints
Fig. 92 Side view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and, at minimum, at eye level ⇒…
-
Page 131
Seats and stowage Removing or adjusting head restraints – To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head restraint downwards. The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and – Make sure that the head restraint engages securely in one of its down. -
Page 132: Front Seats
WARNING • Never adjust the driver or front passenger seat while the vehicle is in motion. While adjusting your seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting position. Risk of fatal accidents. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat Fig.
-
Page 133
– When the button is pressed four times, the heating goes off and the LED goes out (level 0). The seat heating only works when the ignition is switched on. The left thumb Fig. 95 Thumb wheel for the front seat heating wheel controls the left seat and the right thumb wheel the right seat. -
Page 134: Rear Seat Bench
– Move the seat cushion forwards or backwards to the desired position. Backrest angle adjustment – Hold the backrest at the top. Pull the loop on the side of the seat ⇒ fig. 98 in the direction of the arrow and hold the loop in this position.
-
Page 135
In this position the back rest is locked. This is the reason why the loop located on the side of the seat must be pulled in the direction of the arrow to open the WARNING backrest. -
Page 136: Stowage Compartments
Seats and stowage Stowage compartments Centre arm rest at front with stowage area There is a stowage area in the armrest. Stowage compartment on the front passenger side Fig. 102 Front armrest with stowage area Fig. 101 Passenger side: stowage compartment –…
-
Page 137
Stowage areas under the front seats* There is a stowage locker with a cover under each front seat. Folding table* Folding tables are fitted to the rear of the front seat backrests. -
Page 138
Seats and stowage – Press the button on the cover to open these compartments WARNING ⇒ fig. 105. The cover will then open. • The folding tables may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in – To close the cover, press it up until it engages. motion and anyone is seated on the second row of seats. -
Page 139
Seats and stowage Stowage in the luggage compartment* – Lift the luggage compartment floor and fold it back all the way ⇒ fig. 106. There is a variable stowage area* in the luggage compart- ⇒ fig. – Fit the separator 107, into the side grooves depending ment floor. -
Page 140
Seats and stowage Luggage compartment retaining net Other stowage areas There is a retaining net in the luggage compartment for Other stowage areas can be found: securing objects. • in the centre console, • in the door trims (front and rear), •… -
Page 141
Seats and stowage Drinks holders at the front Rear drink holder* / Armrest* Fig. 109 Front drink Fig. 110 Opening the holder rear drink holders In the centre console, in front of the gear lever, there are two drink holders ⇒… -
Page 142
Multi-purpose* mobile stowage compartment — Fitting and Fitting mobile stowage compartment removal – Fold down the small section of the rear seat back rest, in order to access the large section of the back rest. This stowage compartment may only be placed in the central area of the rear seat –… -
Page 143
⇒ page 141, fig. 112 – Pull each of the buttons on the clips (red buttons) forwards, until they snap out of place. – Fold the larger seat down and remove the mobile stowage compartment mounting plate. Fig. 114 Mobile stowage compartment Opening Fig. -
Page 144
Seats and stowage Opening WARNING (continued) ⇒ page 142, fig. – Lift the cover , in area 114. • When the vehicle is moving, keep the tables stored inside the mobile stowage compartment with the cover closed, and likewise when they are Closing not in use –… -
Page 145: Ashtrays*, Cigarette Lighter* And Electrical Sockets
Seats and stowage Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical Cigarette lighter* sockets* Ashtray* Fig. 117 The cigarette lighter is located in the electric socket on the front of the centre console ⇒ fig. 117 to activate it ⇒ – Press on the cigarette lighter Fig.
-
Page 146
Seats and stowage Electrical sockets* Electrical accessories may be connected to the 12 volt socket in the front ⇒ fig. 118 centre console of the passenger compartment and that of the ⇒ fig. Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt boot* 119. -
Page 147
Seats and stowage Auxiliary audio connection (AUX-IN)* AUX RSE connection* Fig. 120 Auxiliary audio Fig. 121 AUX RSE connection connection ⇒ fig. – Lift the AUX. cover 120. This connector may be used as an audio input (red and white connectors) or audio and video connector (red, white and yellow connectors). -
Page 148: First-Aid Kit, Warning Triangle, Fire Extinguisher
Seats and stowage MEDIA-IN* connector Note • The warning triangle and the first aid box do not belong to the standard vehicle equipment. • The first aid kit must comply with legal requirements. • Observe the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit. You should purchase a new first-aid kit as soon as possible after the shelf-life date of the first-aid kit has expired.
-
Page 149: Luggage Compartment
Seats and stowage Luggage compartment Caution Hard objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating Stowing luggage element in the rear window and cause damage. All luggage must be securely stowed. Note Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles The ventilation slots in front of the rear side windows must not be covered as well at all times: this would prevent stale air being extracted from the vehicle.
-
Page 150
Seats and stowage Luggage compartment cover Using the luggage compartment cover – Use the handle to pull the cover back until you hear a “click” ⇒ fig. 123. – Press the area marked “PRESS”, and the cover is retrieved auto- matically. -
Page 151
Roof carrier* Please observe the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof: • For safety reasons, only luggage racks and accessories approved by SEAT should be used. • It is essential that you follow the assembly instructions included with the bars exactly, being especially careful to position front and rear luggage compartment cover bars on the special housings on the longitudinal bars. -
Page 152: Heating, Ventilation And Air Conditioning
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning Heating Controls and equipment Fig. 127 On the dash panel there are the heating controls ⇒ fig. 127 – Using the controls and the control Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
-
Page 153
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective- ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the passenger compart- ment rather than the air from outside. Air distribution Control for setting the flow of air in the required direction. … -
Page 154: Climatic
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning Climatic* Control switches Fig. 128 On the dash panel: Climatic controls The climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works Button – Rear window heating. The heating will be switched off auto- matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. It can also be when the engine is running and the turbine is switched on.
-
Page 155
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning Note Please observe the general notes ⇒ page 161. Heating and cooling the interior Fig. 129 On the dash panel: Climatic controls Interior heating Interior cooling ⇒ fig. 129 ⇒ page 153, – Turn the temperature selector clockwise to select –… -
Page 156
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning – Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when the ambient air humidity is high. required direction: (to the windscreen), … -
Page 157
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning ⇒ page 155, fig. 130 Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the outside air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in queuing traffic. With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective- ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the passenger compart- ment rather than the cold air from outside. -
Page 158: 2C-Climatronic
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 2C-Climatronic* Control switches The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioning settings for the left and right. Fig. 131 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls The air conditioning system controls the temperature when the The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right sides of the vehicle interior.
-
Page 159
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning Viewing Climatronic information Button – Manual air recirculation mode. Button – Rear window heating. The heating will be switched off auto- Information about the Climatronic system can be displayed matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. However, it may be turned off by pushing the button. -
Page 160
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning The LEDs on the Climatronic controls indicate that the selected function has actual temperature may be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient been activated. conditions. In addition, the radio or radio and navigation displays mounted at factory Climatronic maintains a constant temperature. -
Page 161
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning Manual mode In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, air flow and distribution as required. Fig. 134 On the instrument panel: 2C Climatronic controls. Switching on manual mode If a temperature above 26°C (80°F) is selected, the display switches to HI In this setting the system runs at maximum heating output and the temperature ⇒… -
Page 162: General Notes
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning When the button is off (LED off), the heating, ventilation and air condi- With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective- tioning system is off. ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the passenger compart- ment rather than the air from outside.
-
Page 163
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning • Air conditioner Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to ensure heating and cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature, windows from misting over. -
Page 164: Address
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely adjusted to suit the driver. Fig. 136 Proper sitting position for driver – Adjust the driver seat to the correct position. ⇒ fig. 135 – Push the lever under the steering column down ⇒…
-
Page 165: Safety
Driving Safety WARNING (continued) • Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at ⇒ page 163, Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)* least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your chest fig. 136. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not ESP helps make driving safer in certain situations.
-
Page 166: Ignition Lock
Driving • Ignition lock when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces, • when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for example. Position of the ignition key Next, the button should be pressed to reactivate the TCS. When does the warning light switch on or flash? …
-
Page 167: Starting And Stopping The Engine
The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily. The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with its correct code. Every time the vehicle is started again, the ignition key must be turned to position .
-
Page 168
10 seconds and try again after half a minute. If the engine still does not start, the fuel pump fuse should be checked ⇒ page 249, “Fuses”. The engine can only be started using a genuine SEAT key with its correct code. -
Page 169
Driving After switching the engine off, the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 WARNING minutes. It is also possible that the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant • temperature increases due to the heat accumulated in the engine compart- Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. -
Page 170: Manual Gearbox
Driving Manual gearbox Engaging the reverse gear – The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. Press the clutch down thoroughly. Driving a car with a manual gearbox – Place the gear lever into neutral and push the lever downwards. –…
-
Page 171: Automatic Gearbox* / Dsg Automatic Gearbox
Driving Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic Driving programmes gearbox* The automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox has three programmes. Selector lever positions Fig. 142 Program selec- Fig. 141 Centre console: tion selector lever for auto- matic gearbox / direct shift gearbox DSG Selecting the economy programme –…
-
Page 172
Driving the full power of the engine. This programme is not recommended for use on – Press and release the brake pedal, at the same time press the the motorway or in the city. button on the selector lever. Selecting the manual programme (tiptronic) The lock is only activated when the vehicle is stopped or at a speed of less This programme allows driving similar to a manual gearbox. -
Page 173
Driving Driving Hill stop – Press and hold the foot brake. – Hold the vehicle, in all cases, using the foot brake to prevent rolling back. – Press the button on the selector lever knob (on the left) ⇒ page 171, fig. 144. -
Page 174
Driving Using the Tiptronic gear system WARNING (continued) • The Tiptronic system allows the driver to manually select If you must stop on a hill, always hold the vehicle using the footbrake gears to avoid rolling back. • The footbrake must not be held for a long period of time, not even lightly;… -
Page 175: Handbrake
Driving General information about driving in Tiptronic mode Note • Changing gear with the gear stick The gearbox controls on the steering wheel can operate with the gear stick in any position and with the vehicle in motion. – Put the lever in position D and press towards the right to enter ⇒…
-
Page 176
Driving Parking Applying the handbrake ⇒ page 174, fig. – Pull the handbrake lever up firmly 147. The handbrake should always be firmly applied when the vehicle is parked. Releasing the handbrake – Pull the lever up slightly and press the release knob in the direc- Always note the following points when parking the vehicle: ⇒… -
Page 177: Acoustic Parking Aid System
These are the basic operation conditions: doors closed, brake pedal pressed down and vehicle in neutral. The system gets activated on engaging gear. The SEAT parking system* gives an acoustic warning if there are any obsta- cles behind your car.
-
Page 178
When the vehicle is less than approx. 0.30 m away from the obstacle, the warning tone will sound continuously. Do not drive on! Seat Parking system plus*: Description The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about 4… -
Page 179
Driving The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about 4 – Switch the ignition off. seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected obstacle (it does not affect the permanent acoustic signal). Segments in the optical display Some colour segments in front and behind and an acoustic signal enable the driver to assess the distance with respect to an obstacle. -
Page 180: Cruise Control System (Ccs)
Please refer the problem to an Authorised SEAT dealer or specialised work- • It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road, shop.
-
Page 181
Driving Switching the cruise control system on and off Setting speed* Fig. 149 Indicator and Fig. 150 Indicator and main beam headlight main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise switch for the cruise control control ⇒… -
Page 182
Driving Adjusting set speed* When you increase speed with the accelerator and then release the pedal, the system will automatically restore the set speed. This will not be the case, The speed can be altered without touching the accelerator or however, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored speed for longer than 5 minutes. -
Page 183
Driving • if the clutch pedal is depressed, Vehicles with a manual gearbox • The system is completely turned off by moving the control all the way to if the vehicle is accelerated to over 180 km/h, • the right hand side (OFF engaged), or when the vehicle is stationary, ignition when the lever is moved to the position “CANCEL”… -
Page 184: Practical Tips
Intelligent technology Practical tips Intelligent technology Brakes Brake assist system (BAS)* The Brake Assist System (BAS) function is only included in Brake servo vehicles with ESP. In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, but not with maximum force. The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works This results in unnecessarily long braking distances.
-
Page 185: Anti-Lock Brake System And Traction Control M-Abs (Abs And Tcs)
Intelligent technology WARNING (continued) WARNING • essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when and wet roads are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is driving.
-
Page 186: Electronic Stabilisation Programme (Esp)
Intelligent technology • With compact temporary spare wheel. inner wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the • outer wheel receives a lower drive torque than it could transmit. This causes When using the snow chains. •…
-
Page 187
Intelligent technology • maintained (for instance, if the car is starting to skid), then the ESP compen- Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running sates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel. gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi- ciency of the ABS, EDL, ESP and TCS. -
Page 188
Intelligent technology The four-wheel drive is specially designed to complement the superior engine WARNING power. This combination gives the car exceptional handling and performance • capabilities – both on normal roads and in more difficult conditions, such as When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow, snow and ice. -
Page 189
Intelligent technology on the road in winter. In this case, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads WARNING (continued) has to wear off before braking. speed suitable for the road conditions. Failure to do so could result in an Corrosion accident. -
Page 190
Intelligent technology when parking) – more effort will be required than usual. The fault should be Caution corrected by a qualified workshop as soon as possible. • Never let the brakes “drag” by leaving your foot on the pedal when you do The power steering does not work if the engine is off. -
Page 191: Driving And The Environment
Driving and the environment Driving and the environment Running-in Braking effect and braking distance The braking effect and braking distance are influenced by Running in a new engine driving situations and road conditions. The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1,500 km. The efficiency of the brakes depends directly on the brake pad wear.
-
Page 192: Exhaust Gasses Purification System
Driving and the environment – Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary WARNING (continued) ⇒ page 262. gear if your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes. If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is •…
-
Page 193: Economical And Ecological Driving
Driving and the environment Diesel engine particulate filter* reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. Next, we provide you with some tips in order to help reduce contamination and, at the same time, save money. The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced Driving ahead of the circumstances by burning diesel.
-
Page 194
Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials does not warm up and fuel consumption does not regularise until having and production of your new Seat. driven some four kilometres. This is the reason why we recommend avoiding Design measures for economical recycling short trips wherever possible. -
Page 195: Driving Abroad
Authorised Service Centres may only carry out limited repairs. SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the technical preparation of your vehicle and also about necessary maintenance…
-
Page 196: Trailer Towing
Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s recommendations. available in any SEAT dealer. Exterior mirrors Trailer weight / draw bar loading Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the Never exceed the authorised towing limit.
-
Page 197: Ball Coupling Of Towing Bracket
Trailer towing • Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your Speed country. The stability of the vehicle and trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For this reason, it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible speed in an unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions.
-
Page 198: Fitting A Towing Bracket
Trailer towing Fitting a towing bracket* It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle. Fig. 154 Attachment points for towing bracket Safety First Operating instructions Practical tips Technical Data…
-
Page 199
Trailer towing If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be WARNING (continued) completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer. • If the towing bracket is incorrectly installed, there is serious danger of The attachment points for the towing bracket are on the lower part of the accident. -
Page 200: Cleaning And Caring For Your Vehicle
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle Cleaning and caring for your vehicle General notes WARNING (continued) your vehicle. The use of certain products may produce noxious vapours; Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your they should be used in well ventilated areas. vehicle.
-
Page 201: Vehicle Exterior Maintenance
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle Vehicle exterior maintenance Washing by hand Vehicle washing Automatic car wash tunnel – First soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse it off. The car can normally be washed without problem in an auto- –…
-
Page 202
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle – Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted WARNING (continued) bumpers. • Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of – Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from accident. -
Page 203
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle Caring for plastic parts A good quality hard wax product is available from your Authorised Service Centre. Solvents damage plastic parts. Regular wax applications help to protect the paintwork from environmental contaminants ⇒ page 199. It is also effective in protecting against minor If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with approved scratches. -
Page 204
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle Rubber seals maintenance If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push it in one direction only without swinging it. If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and sili- quickly. -
Page 205
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle Cleaning alloy wheel rims If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains and coatings from the surface. Every two weeks – Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels. Caution –… -
Page 206
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle Underbody sealant The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned. The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical On commissioning theis work, ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion treatment. -
Page 207: Vehicle Interior Maintenance
Vehicle interior maintenance Cloth seat covers and fabric trim cleaning Cloth seat covers and fabric trim on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned Plastic parts and dash panel cleaning with a special interior cleanser or with dry foam and a soft brush.
-
Page 208
• so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking after the Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can leather. impair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that belts do not come into contact with corrosive fluids. -
Page 209: Accessories, Parts Replacement And Modifications
Despite a continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of compo- the reliability, safety and suitability of those parts SEAT has not approved.
-
Page 210: Roof Aerial
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications WARNING WARNING • Incorrectly performed modifications or other kind of work on your vehicle Always concentrate primarily on driving. If you are distracted while can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents. driving you could have an accident. •…
-
Page 211: Checking And Refilling Levels
Checking and refilling levels Checking and refilling levels Refuelling Closing the tank cap – Screw the tank cap to the right, until the point of feeling a “click”. The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi- – Turn the key in the lock, without unscrewing the cap, clockwise mately 55 litres.
-
Page 212: Petrol
Checking and refilling levels Petrol WARNING (continued) − Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec- Petrol types trostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to ignite. This may be fatally explosive. Always place the canister on the The correct petrol types are listed on a sticker inside the fuel ground to fill it.
-
Page 213: Diesel
Checking and refilling levels Petrol additives Your Authorised Service Centre can also be consulted to know if the vehicle has been prepared for biodiesel use. Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol. Things to note about RME fuel (biodiesel) •…
-
Page 214: Working In The Engine Compartment
Do not mix fuel additives (“thinners”, or similar additives) with diesel fuel. All service fluids and consumables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and batteries, are being constantly developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of information to the Authorised Service Centres concerning modifications. For this reason, we recommend you to have service fluids and consumables replaced by an Authorised Service Centre.
-
Page 215
Checking and refilling levels WARNING (continued) WARNING • If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and of accident or fire. -
Page 216
Checking and refilling levels For the sake of the environment Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a qualified workshop. -
Page 217: Engine Oil
Checking and refilling levels Engine oil WARNING (continued) • Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet, Engine oil specifications then carefully open the bonnet. • When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety The engine oil used must conform with exact specifications.
-
Page 218
Checking and refilling levels Oil properties These oils are only useful in a climate that is constantly very cold or very warm. Engine oil additives No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty. Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the corresponding VW specifications and keeping it in the vehicle. -
Page 219
Checking and refilling levels Checking oil level Caution – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact an Authorised –… -
Page 220
Checking and refilling levels Changing engine oil – To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before The engine oil must be changed at the intervals given in the adding any more oil. -
Page 221: Coolant
Checking and refilling levels • Never pour oil down drains or into the ground. WARNING (continued) • Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It has to be large • The coolant additive G 12+ must be added in sufficient quantities to enough to hold all the engine oil provide anti-freeze protection at the coldest ambient temperatures that can be expected.
-
Page 222
Checking and refilling levels Checking the coolant level and topping up – If the level is underneath the “MIN” mark, top up with coolant. The correct coolant level is important for fault-free func- Topping up coolant tioning of the engine cooling system. –… -
Page 223: Washer Fluid And Windscreen Wiper Blades
Checking and refilling levels Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades WARNING (continued) • When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do Topping up washer fluid not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is a burn injury risk.
-
Page 224
Checking and refilling levels Changing windscreen wiper blades WARNING If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition, you Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be will benefit from an improved visibility. Damaged wiper carried out cautiously. -
Page 225
Checking and refilling levels To change the blades it is necessary to change the rest position of WARNING the wipers to the service position. Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows! Service position (For changing wiper blades) •… -
Page 226
Checking and refilling levels Changing the rear wiper blade Removing the wiper blade ⇒ page 225, fig. – Lift the wiper arm away from the glass 165. A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately. –… -
Page 227: Brake Fluid
⇒ page 273. The brake fluid reservoir has a black and It is important that you use only brake fluid compliant with the US standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recommend the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid. yellow cap.
-
Page 228: Battery
Checking and refilling levels Battery WARNING (continued) • Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings ⇒ page 213. Warnings on handling the battery • Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children.
-
Page 229
Checking and refilling levels • If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect WARNING (continued) the battery from frost. If it “freezes” it will be damaged. charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause injury. -
Page 230
Replacing a vehicle battery The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has special safety features. Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety spec- ifications of your vehicle. WARNING •… -
Page 231: Wheels And Tyres
Wheels and tyres Wheels and tyres Wheels Concealed damage Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual vibrations or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres General notes is damaged.
-
Page 232
Tyre pressure The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure For optimum performance, use genuine SEAT tyres. In addition, check and should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a adjust tyre pressures regularly. -
Page 233
Wheels and tyres Tyre service life For the sake of the environment The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear. style and fitting. Significant tyre pressure loss … -
Page 234
Wheels and tyres Wear indicators WARNING The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators” ⇒ page 232, fig. 168, running across the tread. Depending on the make, There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving! •… -
Page 235
Wheels and tyres • Driving with anti-puncture tyres (emergency gear) smoke is coming from one of the tyres, • there is a smell of rubber, – Leave the ESP/TCS (electronic stabilisation programme) • switched on, or switch on ⇒ page 185. the vehicle vibrates, •… -
Page 236
• We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres which have been This contains the following information: approved by SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle 195 Tyre width in mm handling. Risk of accident. -
Page 237
Wheels and tyres wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your Caution model may invalidate the vehicle’s type approval for use on public roads. • The prescribed torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. -
Page 238
Wheels and tyres stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal require- WARNING ments of each country must be followed. Snow chains should be correctly tightened in accordance with the manu- Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with facturer’s instructions. -
Page 239: If And When
If and when If and when Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel WARNING (continued) • The jack* supplied by the factory is only designed for changing wheels Vehicle Tools on this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other loads.
-
Page 240
If and when Compact temporary spare wheel* Snow chains For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the compact tempo- The compact spare wheel (emergency wheel for vehicles rary spare wheel. without the anti-puncture kit) should only be used when If you should have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow strictly necessary. -
Page 241: Wheel Change
If and when reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the penetration WARNING of a foreign body into the tyre. Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users. Note •…
-
Page 242
If and when After changing a wheel Wheel trims After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete. The wheel trims must be removed to gain access to the wheel bolts. – Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment. –… -
Page 243
If and when Wheel covers* Loosening the wheel bolts The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel The wheel bolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle. bolts Removing – Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook. –… -
Page 244
If and when WARNING Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack, loosening the wheel bolts more than one turn can result in an acci- dent. Note • Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts. -
Page 245
If and when Raising the vehicle – Locate the jacking point under the door sill closest to the wheel ⇒ fig. to be changed 173. In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised with – Place the jack under the jacking point and turn the crank until the a jack. -
Page 246
If and when Jack position points for vehicles with skirting* Removing and fitting the wheel For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must be completed. Fig. 175 Plastic skirting with jack allotment cover Fig. 176 Changing the wheel: Hexagonal socket in screwdriver handle to Vehicles with plastic skirting, with cover* turn the wheel bolts… -
Page 247
If and when The wheel bolts should be clean and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare – Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it ⇒ fig. wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfaces. These will go 177. -
Page 248: Tyre Repair Kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)
If and when Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)* Note Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possible General information and safety notes with the sealing compound. Your vehicle is equipped with a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System. Preparation work In the event of a tyre puncture, a sealing compound and an air compressor are located in the luggage compartment under the floor panel.
-
Page 249
If and when Note Note • Please observe legal requirements when doing so. If the vehicle is equipped with tyre pressure control, enter the new tyre pressures using the SET button on the central console. • The compressor should never be allowed to run for longer than 6 minutes. -
Page 250: Fuses
If and when Fuses Fuse cover underneath the steering wheel – Switch off the ignition and the component concerned. Changing a fuse – Identify the fuse for the failed component ⇒ page 251. Blown fuses must be replaced – Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
-
Page 251
• If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to another location in the electrical system. • Always keep some spare fuses in the vehicle. These are available from SEAT dealers. -
Page 252
If and when Fuses on left side of dash panel Number Consumer Amps Engine management Fuses Vacant Number Consumer Amps Vacant Vacant Park Pilot (Parking assistant) / Gear lever/ ESP Vacant switchboard Vacant Vacant Vacant Volumetric alarm sensor/ Alarm horn Vacant Diagnosis / Rain sensor / Light switch Vacant… -
Page 253
If and when Please note that the above list, while correct at the time of printing, is subject Number Consumer Amps to alterations. If discrepancies should occur, please refer to the sticker on the Trailer control unit (indicators, brakes and left inside of the fuse cover for the correct information for your model. -
Page 254: Bulb Change
Vacant Electric windows (front and back) On this type of headlight, the bulb changes must be made by the SEAT dealer, given Electric windows (front) that complex elements must be removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made Ignition key on the automatic control system incorporated.
-
Page 255
• Due to the difficulty in accessing the lamps, any replacement work should be done by a SEAT dealer. However, the following is a description of how to change the lamps except for the fog lights* and interior lamps. Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it… -
Page 256
If and when Turn signal lamps Dipped beam lights Fig. 181 Turn signal Fig. 182 Dipped head- lamps lights – Raise the bonnet. ⇒ fig. 181 – Rotate the lamp holder to the left and pull. – Remove the bulb by pressing on the lamp holder and rotating at the same time to the left. -
Page 257
If and when ⇒ page 255, fig. 182 – Remove the loops in the direction of the arrow and remove the cover. ⇒ page 255, fig. 183 – Remove the connector from the bulb. ⇒ page 255, fig. 183 – Disengage the retainer spring pressing inwards to the right. -
Page 258
If and when ⇒ fig. 187 Side lights – Extract the lamp holder outwards. – Replace the bulb by pulling this out and inserting the replace- ment. – Installation is done in the reverse order. Rear lights • On the body –… -
Page 259
If and when ⇒ fig. Indicator, side and brake lights on the bodywork – Turn the lampholder to the left 189. – Extract the failed bulb and change it for a new one. – To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care when fitting the lamp holder. -
Page 260
If and when Position light, fog light and reverse light on the tailgate – Pull the cover off. – Take the lampholder out pressing on the securing pins and extract it outwards. – Remove the blown bulb and replace it with another. –… -
Page 261
If and when Side indicators Luggage compartment lights Fig. 193 Luggage Fig. 192 Side indicator compartment light – Press the indicator to the left or to the right to remove the lamp. – Remove the lamp holder from the indicator. –… -
Page 262
If and when – Press the lamp sideways and remove it from the housing ⇒ page 260, fig. 194. Registration light Fig. 196 Registration light ⇒ fig. – To remove the tulip-shaped fitting, unscrew the bolts 195. – Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction of the arrow and ⇒… -
Page 263: Jump-Starting
If and when Sunroof light – Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction of the arrow and ⇒ fig. outwards 198. Jump-starting Jump leads The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section. If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can be connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.
-
Page 264
If and when How to jump start: description 4. Connect the other end of the black jump lead to a solid metal component which is bolted on to the engine block, or onto the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not connect it to a point near the battery ⇒… -
Page 265
If and when WARNING • Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment ⇒ page 213, “Working in the engine compartment”. • The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). -
Page 266: Towing And Tow-Starting
If and when Towing and tow-starting General notes Please observe the following points if you use a tow-rope: Tow-starting Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting. – Drive slowly at first until the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle.
-
Page 267
If and when • Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power. The tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over- vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. -
Page 268
If and when Towing rings – Pull the lower front cover down and leave the cover hanging on the vehicle. – Remove the cover of the screw hole, insert a screwdriver into the lower slot and lever gently. – Screw the towing eye as shown by the arrow anti-clockwise to the ⇒… -
Page 270: Technical Data
General notes on the technical data Technical Data General notes on the technical data Outstanding information Abbreviations used in this paragraph of the Technical Data Abbrevia- Meaning tion Important considerations Kilowatt, engine power measurement. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence Brake horse power, formerly used to denote engine power over this data.
-
Page 271
General notes on the technical data Vehicle identification data Vehicle data The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel recess in the The most important data are given on the type plate and the luggage compartment. vehicle data sticker. -
Page 272: Data On Fuel Consumption
General notes on the technical data Data on fuel consumption Note • Actual consumption may vary from quoted test values, depending on Fuel consumption personal driving style, road and traffic conditions, the weather and the vehicle condition. The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.
-
Page 273: Towing A Trailer
General notes on the technical data Towing a trailer Trailer weights Trailer weights The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain circumstances up to 100 km/h).
-
Page 274: Technical Data
Technical Data Technical Data Checking fluid levels Overview Further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the technical data are contained as of ⇒ page 269. From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.
-
Page 275: Petrol Engine 1.4 63 Kw (85 Bhp)
Technical Data Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 bhp) General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) 63 (85)/ 5000 Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 132/ 3800 No. of cylinders, capacity 4/ 1390 in cm 10,5 ± 0,3 Compression Fuel Premium unleaded 95 RON or regular unleaded 91 RON With a slight power loss…
-
Page 276: Petrol Engine 1.4 92 Kw (125 Bhp)
Technical Data Trailer weights Trailer without brakes With brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200 With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000 Engine oil capacity Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 2.8 litres Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 bhp) General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) 92 (125)/ 5000…
-
Page 277: Petrol Engine 1.6 75 Kw (102 Bhp)
Technical Data Weights Gross vehicle weight in kg 2023 Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1478 Front gross axle weight in kg 1004 Rear gross axle weight in kg 1036 Permitted roof load in kg Trailer weights Trailer without brakes With brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 With brakes, gradients up to 12%…
-
Page 278
Technical Data Performance figures Maximum speed in km/h Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 13,0 Weights Gross vehicle weight in kg 1979 Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1434 Front gross axle weight in kg Rear gross axle weight in kg… -
Page 279: Petrol Engine 1.8 Litre 118 Kw (160 Hp). Manual
Technical Data Petrol engine 1.8 litre 118 kW (160 hp). Manual General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) 118 (160)/4500-6200 Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/ 1500-4500 No. of cylinders, capacity 4/ 1798 in cm Compression 9,6-0,5 Fuel Premium unleaded 95 RON or regular unleaded 91 RON With a slight power loss Performance figures…
-
Page 280: Petrol Engine 1.8 Litre 118 Kw (160 Hp). Automatic
Technical Data Trailer weights Trailer without brakes Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400 Engine oil capacity Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 4.6 litres Petrol engine 1.8 litre 118 kW (160 hp). Automatic General engine data Power output in kW (HP) 118 (160)/ 4500-6200…
-
Page 281: Diesel Engine 1.9 Tdi 77 Kw (105 Bhp)
Technical Data Weights Gross vehicle weight in kg 2070 Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1525 Front gross axle weight in kg 1068 Rear gross axle weight in kg 1043 Permitted roof load in kg Trailer weights Trailer without brakes Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12%…
-
Page 282
Technical Data Performance figures Manual Automatic Maximum speed in km/h Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12,6 12,7 Weights Manual Automatic Gross vehicle weight in kg 2064 2094 Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1519 1549… -
Page 283: Diesel Engine 2.0L 103 Kw (140 Bhp)
Technical Data Diesel engine 2.0l 103 kW (140 bhp). General engine data Power output in kW (HP) 103 (140)/ 4000 Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 — 2500 No. of cylinders, capacity 4/ 1968 in cm 18,5 ± 0,5 Compression Fuel Min.
-
Page 284: Diesel Engine 2.0L 125 Kw (170 Bhp)
Technical Data Trailer weights Trailer without brakes Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400 Engine oil capacity Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp) General engine data Power output in kW (bhp) 125 (170)/ 4200…
-
Page 285
Technical Data Weights Gross vehicle weight in kg 2089 Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1544 Front gross axle weight in kg 1082 Rear gross axle weight in kg 1024 Permitted roof load in kg Trailer weights Trailer without brakes Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500 Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12%… -
Page 286: Dimensions And Capacities
Technical Data Dimensions and capacities Dimensions Length, width 4,467 mm/ 1,768 mm Height at kerb weight 1,575 mm Front and rear projection 913 mm/ 976 mm Wheelbase 2,578 mm Turning circle 10.7 m Front Rear 1,527 mm 1,506 mm Track width 1,535mm 1,514 mm Capacities…
-
Page 288: Index
Belt tension devices ….. . 27 Adjusting the seat belt height ….26 Aquaplaning .
-
Page 289
Unlocking system* ….93 Child seat ……. 47 Sliding/tilting roof . -
Page 290
Drive wheels traction control system ..184 seat ……. 30 Electronic stabilisation program . -
Page 291
Engine oil pressure Folding the seat backrests down … 134 Fuses ……. . . 249 monitor indicator . -
Page 292
Index Heating ……. . 151 Jump leads ……262 MEDIA-IN* connector . -
Page 293
Petrol ……. . . 211 Rear seat bench ……133 Driving abroad . -
Page 294
Sunroof blind Seat belts ……. 19 Sliding/tilting roof ….. . . 106 Sliding/tilting roof . -
Page 295
Vehicle washing ……200 Why to wear seat belts? ….19 Tyre repair kit . -
Page 296
Index Windows ……. 104 Windscreen washer fluid Warning lamp ……78 Windscreen wiper blades Cleaning .
SE AT
A LT
EA X
L O
W N
ER S
M A
N U
A L
In gl
s 5P
80 12
00 3B
H (
11 .0
(
G T9
)
5P 80
12 00
3B H
A LT
EA X
L In
gl s
(1 1.
08 )
Portada ALTEA XL.qxd 23/12/08 09:53 Pgina 3
efully to familiarise yourself with
ll contribute to preserve its value.
s and parts change.
as this should be kept with the
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 1 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Foreword This Instruction manual and its corresponding supplements should be read car
your vehicle.
Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling wi
For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modification
If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner
vehicle.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 2 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Contents 3
shtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical
ockets* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
irst-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher
uggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ting, Ventilation and Air conditioning . .
eating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
limatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
afety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tarting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .
anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
utomatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox*
andbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
coustic parking aid system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ctical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS
ABS and TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lectronic stabilisation programme (ESP)* . . . .
ing and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
unning-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xhaust gasses purification system . . . . . . . . . .
conomical and ecological driving . . . . . . . . . .
riving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
147
148
151
151
153
157
161
163
163
164
165
166
169
170
174
176
179
183
183
183
184
185
190
190
191
192
194
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 3 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Contents
Manual structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital display in the instrument panel . . . . . . .
Instrument panel menus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A
s
F
L
Hea
H
C
2
G
Driv
A
S
Ig
S
M
A
H
A
C
Pra
Inte
B
A
(
E
Driv
R
E
E
D
5
6
7
7
7
10
16
17
19
19
20
23
27
29
29
33
36
40
43
45
45
47
49
53
53
53
55
58
64
73
83
83
83
87
91
91
97
98
100
102
104
106
109
109
117
120
121
125
128
128
129
131
133
135
Contents4
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 4 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instructions to follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ball coupling of towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle exterior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, parts replacement and
modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . .
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . .
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)* . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General notes on the technical data . . . . . . .
Outstanding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 bhp) . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 bhp) . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 bhp) . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.8 litre 118 kW (160 hp). Manual
Petrol engine 1.8 litre 118 kW (160 hp).
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 77 kW (105 bhp). . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0l 103 kW (140 bhp). . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp) . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
195
195
196
196
197
199
199
200
206
208
208
208
209
209
210
210
211
212
213
216
220
222
226
227
230
230
238
238
240
247
249
253
262
265
269
269
269
271
272
273
273
274
275
276
278
279
280
282
283
285
287
Manual structure 5
Manual structure What you should know before reading the on-board manual This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the
vehicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will
not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the ALTEA XL, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model or model year; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general guide, and may vary from the
equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.
The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual
refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when
otherwise indicated.
The equipment marked with an asterisk* is supplied as standard on certain
versions of the model only, it can be supplied as an option on some models,
or else it is only on sale in certain countries.
All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright symbol
does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
The section is continued on the following page.
This shows the end of the section.
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain safety information. They warn you of serious dangers, possibly involving accident or injury.
Caution Texts preceded by this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of
damage to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment Texts preceded by this symbol refer to relevant points concerning environ-
mental protection.
Note Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 5 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Content6
Content This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organised
way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong to
chapters (e.g. Air conditioning). The entire manual is divided into five large
parts which are:
1. Safety First Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat
belts, airbags, seats, etc.
2. Controls and equipment Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your
vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit-
able climate in the passenger compartment, etc.
3. Practical tips Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and
certain problems you can solve yourself.
4. Technical Data Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.
5. Alphabetic index At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help
you to rapidly find the information you require.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 6 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Safe driving 7
Safety Fir Technical Data
s a part of the occupant protection
the risk of injury in the event of acci-
he safety of your passengers in danger. In the
ty equipment may reduce the risk of injury. The
f the safety equipment in your SEAT:
e front and rear side seats,
e front seats,
r the front seats,
eat backrests,
straints*,
ts for child seats in the rear side seats with the
straints,
e position and non-use position,
n.
ned above works together to provide you and
t possible protection in the event of accidents.
not neither help you nor your passengers if you
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 7 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Safety First
Safe driving
Brief introduction
Dear SEAT Driver
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and
warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety
and for your passengers safety.
WARNING
This manual contains important information concerning the driver’s and passengers’ handling of the vehicle. The other booklets in the on board manual also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.
Ensure that the onboard documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment i
system and can reduce
dent.
Never put your safety and t
event of an accident, the safe
following list includes most o
three-point seat belts,
belt tension limiters for th
belt tension devices for th
belt height adjustment fo
front airbags,
side airbags in the front s
curtain airbags,
crash-active front head re
ISOFIX anchorage poin
ISOFIX system,
height-adjustable head re
head restraints with in-us
adjustable steering colum
The safety equipment mentio
your passengers with the bes
But this safety equipment can
Safe driving8
gers in the rear seats always have the
-use position page 14.
adjust the head restraints according to
propriate child seats and properly
age 45.
ing position. Instruct your passengers
r sitting position. page 10.
ecurely. Instruct your passengers also to
roperly page 19.
fety?
determined by your driving style and
of all occupants.
sible for yourself and your passengers.
r driving safety is affected by any circum-
self as well as others on the road ,
be distracted from the traffic around you,
elephone conversations.
riving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-
d speed limits.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 8 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
or they are sitting in an incorrect position or do not properly adjust or use this
equipment.
Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so important,
how it protects you, what you have to consider when using it and how you and
your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the safety
equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you and your
passengers should note in order to reduce the risk of injury.
Safety is everyone’s business!
Before every trip
The driver bears the responsibility for his passengers and the
operational worthiness of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note
the following points before every trip:
Ensure that the vehicle’s lights and turn signals operate flaw-
lessly.
Check tyre pressure.
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the
surroundings.
Securely restrain all parcels page 17.
Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly acoording
to your size.
Ensure that the passen
head restraints in the in
Instruct passengers to
their height.
Protect children with ap
applied seat belts p
Assume the correct sitt
also to assume a prope
Fasten your safety belt s
fasten their seat belts p
What affects driving sa
Driving safety is largely
the personal behaviour
As a driver, you are respon
When your concentration o
stance, you endanger your
for this reason:
Do not allow yourself to
e.g. by passengers or t
Never drive when your d
tion, alcohol, drugs).
Observe traffic laws an
Safe driving 9
Safety Fir Technical Data
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 9 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and
weather conditions.
When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly — at least
every two hours.
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or are in tension.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.
Safe driving10
reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
he following adjustments for the driver:
el so that there is a distance of at least
ering wheel and the centre of your chest
rwards or backwards so that you are able
, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with
angled .
ch the highest point of the steering
nt so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
head fig. 2.
upright position so that your back rests
Fig. 2 Proper head restraint position for driver
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 10 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Proper sitting position for occupants
Proper sitting position for driver
The proper sitting position for the driver is important for a
safe and relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to
accident, we recommend t
Adjust the steering whe
25 cm between the ste
fig. 1.
Move the driver’s seat fo
to press the accelerator
your knees still slightly
Ensure that you can rea
wheel.
Adjust the head restrai
level as the top of your
level as the top of your
Move the backrest to an
completely against it.
Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel
Safe driving 11
Safety Fir Technical Data
for front passenger
st sit at least 25 cm away from the
airbag can provide the greatest
he event that it is triggered.
reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
the following adjustments for the front
ger seat back as far as possible .
n upright position so that your back rests
int so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
r head page 13.
otwell in front of the front passenger seat.
securely page 19.
e passenger airbag in exceptional circum-
ow to adjust the front passenger’s seat, see
tion of the front passenger can lead to severe
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 11 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Fasten your safety belt securely page 19.
Keep both feet in the foot well so that you have the vehicle under
control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver’s seat page 128.
WARNING
An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
Adjust the driver’s seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel page 10, fig. 1. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o’clock and 3 o’clock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu- vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back- rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.
Proper sitting position
The front passenger mu
dash panel so that the
possible protection in t
For your own safety and to
accident, we recommend
passenger:
Move the front passen
Move the backrest to a
completely against it.
Adjust the head restra
level as the top of your
level as the top of you
Keep both feet in the fo
Fasten your safety belt
It is possible to deactivate th
stances page 24.
For detailed information on h
page 131.
WARNING
An incorrect sitting posi injuries.
Safe driving12
the correct position page 14.
ot well in front of the rear seat.
securely page 19.
d restraint system when you take children
5.
rear seat are not sitting properly, they could
properly in order to achieve maximum protec-
e optimal protection when backrests are in an sengers are wearing their seat belts properly. are not sitting in an upright position, the risk itioning of the belt web increases.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 12 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between your breastbone and the dash panel. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the instrument panel, out the window or on the seat. An incor- rect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their
feet in the foot well s and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking
manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must
consider the following:
Adjust the headrest to
Keep both feet in the fo
Fasten your safety belt
Use an appropriate chil
in the vehicle page 4
WARNING
If the passengers on the sustain severe injuries.
Adjust the head restraint tion.
Seat belts can only provid upright position and the pas If passengers on the rear seat of injury due to incorrect pos
WARNING (continued)
Safe driving 13
Safety Fir Technical Data
properly in order to achieve maximum
int so that its upper edge is at the same
head or as close as possible to the same
r head and, at the very least, at eye level
page 128.
restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.
d restraints could result in death in the event of
d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.
t always be adjusted according to the
d into their seats during a rear end collision. The
e backrest activates the crash-active head
hich moves rapidly forwards and upwards at the
duces the distance between the occupant’s
reducing the risk of head injuries such as brain
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 13 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passengers protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Adjust the head restraint
protection.
Adjust the head restra
level as the top of your
level as the top of you
fig. 3 and fig. 4
Adjusting the head restraints
WARNING
Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe
Incorrectly adjusted hea a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte
The head restraints mus passenger’s height.
Headrests in use*
Vehicle occupants are presse
resulting body pressure on th
restraint* on the front seat, w
same time. This movement re
head and the head rest, thus
trauma.
Fig. 3 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front
Fig. 4 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side
Safe driving14
ear seat head restraints
restraints are an important part of the
can reduce the risk of injuries in
s.
Fig. 5 Head restraints in correct position
Fig. 6 Head restraint position warning label
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 14 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the passenger’s height.
Note The crash-active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant
applies a high level of pressure on the backrest (e.g. by falling back into the
seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat head
restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dangerous
as the crash-active head restraints will return to the original position immedi-
ately and are thus once again ready.
Correct adjustment of r
Properly adjusted head
occupant protection and
most accident situation
Safe driving 15
Safety Fir Technical Data
itting positions
ition can lead to severe injuries to
timal protection only when the belt webs
ncorrect sitting positions substantially
tion of seat belts and increase the risk of
t web position. As the driver, you are
occupants, especially children.
o assume an incorrect sitting position in
lling .
amples of sitting positions that could be
The list is not complete, but we would like to
.
icle is in motion:
,
r to the rear,
sh panel,
h,
e of a seat,
w,
a window,
dash panel,
surface of a seat,
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 15 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Rear outer seat head restraints
The rear outer seat head restraints have 3 positions.
Two positions for use page 14, fig. 5. In these positions, the
head restraints are used normally, protecting passengers along
with the rear seat belts.
And one position for non-use.
To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges
with both hands in the direction of the arrow.
Centre rear head restraint
The centre head restraint only has two positions, in-use (head
restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).
WARNING
Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warning label located on the rear side fixed window page 14, fig. 6.
Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat rear head restraints.
Injury risk in case of an accident!
Caution Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints page 129.
Examples of incorrect s
An incorrect sitting pos
occupants.
Seat belts can provide op
are properly positioned. I
reduce the protective func
injury due to incorrect bel
responsible for all vehicle
Never permit anyone t
the vehicle while trave
The following list contains ex
dangerous for all occupants.
make you aware of this issue
Therefore, whenever the veh
Never stand in the vehicle
never stand on the seats,
never kneel on the seats,
never tilt your backrest fa
never lean against the da
never lie on the rear benc
never sit on the front edg
never sit sideways,
never lean out of a windo
never put your feet out of
never put your feet on the
never put your feet on the
Safe driving16
e pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in
port your feet properly and give you a good
on can lead to critical situations while driving.
e driver footwell. An object could move into al operation. In the event of a sudden driving
ill not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ident!
r side
used which can be securely fastened
ot impair operation of the pedals.
ats are securely fastened during the trip
pedals .
ve the pedals clear and which are secured to
ou can obtain suitable floor mats from a quali-
d, an accident may occur. Risk of serious inju-
s are always securely attached.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 16 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
never travel in a foot well ,
never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt,
never carry any person in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Every incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.
Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries if airbags trigger, by striking a passenger who has assumed an incorrect sitting position.
Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main- tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to assume the proper sitting position and to maintain it during the trip page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.
Pedal area
Pedals
The operation of all pedals must never be impaired by objects
or floor mats.
Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and
clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.
Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial posi-
tions.
Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely
fastened on the foot well.
If a brake circuit fails, the brak
order to stop the vehicle.
Wear suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which sup
feeling for the pedals.
WARNING
Restricting pedal operati
Never place objects on th the pedal area and impair ped or braking manoeuvre, you w accelerator pedal. Risk of acc
Floor mats on the drive
Only floor mats may be
in the foot well and do n
Ensure that the floor m
and do not obstruct the
Only use floor mats which lea
prevent them from slipping. Y
fied dealership.
WARNING
If the pedals are obstructe ries.
Ensure that the floor mat
Safe driving 17
Safety Fir Technical Data
he luggage compartment and secure them on
traps to secure heavy objects.
res or accidents, loose objects can be thrown upants or passers-by. This increased risk of ed if a loose object is struck by an inflating cts can be transformed into missiles. Risk of
tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicle’s handling and lead to an acci-
ial to adjust your speed and driving style nts.
d axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the wed total weight is exceeded, the driving char- y change, leading to accidents, injuries and
unattended, especially when the tailgate is nto the luggage compartment closing the door in trapped without help and there is a mortal
lay in or around the vehicle. Close and lock doors when you leave the vehicle. Before you that there are no adults or children in the
ers in the luggage compartment. Every belted in page 19.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 17 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.
Stowing luggage
Loading the boot
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in
the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the
driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.
Lay and stow heavy luggage as far forward as possible in the
luggage compartment.
Stow heavy luggage as low as possible in the luggage compart-
ment.
Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings*.
WARNING
Loose luggage and other objects in the boot could cause serious inju- ries.
Always stow objects in t the fastening rings.
Use suitable specialist s
During sudden manoeuv forward, injuring vehicle occ injury will be further increas airbag. If this happens, obje fatal injury.
Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Therefore, it is essent accordingly, to avoid accide
Never exceed the allowe allowed axle load or the allo acteristics of the vehicle ma damage to the vehicle.
Never leave your vehicle open. Children could climb i behind them; they will rema risk.
Never allow children to p both the tailgate and all the lock the vehicle, make sure vehicle.
Never transport passeng passenger must be properly
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Safe driving18
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 18 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Note Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used
air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-
ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.
Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially
available.
Seat belts 19
Safety Fir Technical Data
ble seats must never be transported in your
ehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat eat. Children must be protected with an appro- .
*
as a reminder to the driver to fasten
e:
securely.
rs to fasten their seat belts properly before
ng a child seat according to the child’s
itched on, the warning lamp on the instru-
driver has not fastened his/her seat belt, and a
e vehicle is driven at more than 30 km/h for 90
ion
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 19 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Seat belts
Brief Introduction
Before driving: remember your seat belt!
Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!
In this chapter you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts,
how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.
Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in
this chapter.
WARNING
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases.
Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and your passen- gers must always wear the seat belts properly while the vehicle is moving.
Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Like all other passengers, these people can also sustain severe inju- ries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five seats, two on the front part and three on the rear part.
Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
WARNING
More people than availa vehicle.
Every passenger in the v belt belonging to his or her s priate child restraint system
Seat belt warning lamp
The warning lamp acts
the seat belt.
Before starting the vehicl
Fasten your safety belt
Instruct your passenge
driving off.
Protect children by usi
height and weight.
After the ignition has been sw
ment panel lights up1) if the
warning signal* is heard if th
seconds.
1) Depending on the model vers
Seat belts20
ws of physics work in the case of a head-on
s moving fig. 7 there is a certain amount of
rgy, both in the vehicle and in the occupants.
depends on the speed of the vehicle and the
assengers. The higher the speed and the
nergy there is to be released in an accident.
wever, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed
m/h, for example, the kinetic energy is multi-
r example are not restrained by seat belts, the
y has to be absorbed at the point of impact
50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-
ne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
elts are not attached to the vehicle. In a
e forward at the same speed their vehicle was
Fig. 8 The vehicle hits the wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 20 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
The warning lamp* is switched off if the driver seat belt is fastened while
the ignition is switched on.
Why wear seat belts?
Physical principles of frontal collisions
In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic
energy must be absorbed.
It is easy to explain how the la
collision: When a vehicle start
energy known as kinetic ene
The amount of kinetic energy
weight of the vehicle and its p
greater the weight, the more e
The most significant factor, ho
doubles from 25 km/h to 50 k
plied by four.
Because the passengers in ou
entire amount of kinetic energ
fig. 8.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h to
sion can easily exceed one ton
even higher.
Passengers not wearing seat b
frontal collision, they will mov
Fig. 7 Vehicle about to hit a wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts
Seat belts 21
Safety Fir Technical Data
s acting on the body in a collision are so great
oneself with one’s hands. In a frontal collision,
wn forward and will make violent contact with
rd, windscreen or whatever else is in the way
bstitute for the seat belts. When triggered,
al protection. All passengers (including the
roperly during the trip. This will reduce the risk
t of an accident regardless of whether an
not.
gered only once. To achieve the best possible
t always be worn properly so that you will be
ch no airbag is deployed.
r passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they
rward violently in an accident. Rear passengers
danger not only themselves but also the front
Fig. 10 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 21 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to frontal acci-
dents, but to all accidents and collisions.
The danger of not using the seat belt
The general belief that the passengers can protect them-
selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.
Even at low speeds the force
that it is not possible to brace
unbelted passengers are thro
the steering wheel, dashboa
fig. 9.
The airbag system is not a su
airbags provide only addition
driver) must wear seat belts p
of severe injuries in the even
airbag is fitted for the seat or
Note that airbags can be trig
protection, the seat belt mus
protected in accidents in whi
It is also important for the rea
could otherwise be thrown fo
who do not use seat belts en
occupants fig. 10.
Fig. 9 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.
Seat belts22
n seat belts before every trip, even when «just
ear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics
ring seat belts is an effective mean of substan-
y and improving the chances of survival in a
, properly worn seat belts improve the protec-
event of an accident. For this reason, wearing
n most countries.
ped with airbags, the seat belts must be
irbags, for example, are only triggered in some
bags will not be triggered during minor frontal
s, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the
in the control unit is not exceeded.
wear your seat belt and ensure that your
ir seat belts properly before you drive off!
sing seat belts
rrectly, they can reduce the risk of
elt as described in this booklet.
ts can be fastened at all times and are not
incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- rotection from seat belts can be achieved only
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 22 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Seat belts protection
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the
event of an accident.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-
tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.
Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to
severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of
being thrown from the car.
Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability
of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle and other
passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to
absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these
features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of
injury.
Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts
substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is
why it is so important to faste
driving around the corner».
Ensure that your passengers w
have shown properly that wea
tially reducing the risk of injur
serious accident. Furthermore
tion provided by airbags in the
a seat belt is required by law i
Although your vehicle is equip
fastened and worn. The front a
frontal accidents. The front air
collisions, minor side collision
airbag trigger threshold value
Therefore, you should always
passengers have fastened the
Safety instructions on u
If seat belts are used co
injury in an accident.
Always wear the seat b
Ensure that the seat bel
damaged.
WARNING
If the seat belts are worn ries increases. The optimal p if you use them properly.
Fig. 11 Driver wearing the seat belt properly: is secured by the belt in sharp braking
Seat belts 23
Safety Fir Technical Data
a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.
lean, otherwise the retractors may not work
nt and rear occupants are locked into
its full protection if the belt web is not
Fig. 12 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 23 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Fasten your seat belt before every trip — even when driving in town. The other passengers must also wear the seat belt, otherwise they may be danger of injury!
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not posi- tioned correctly.
Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.
Keep both feet in the foot-well in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
The belt webbing must never be twisted while it is being worn.
The belt webbing should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.
Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci- dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.
Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.
Do not attempt to repair must not be removed or mod
The belts must be kept c properly page 207.
Seat belts
Seat belt adjustment
The seat belts for the fro
position by a latch.
The seat belt cannot offer
positioned correctly.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Seat belts24
ximum protection only when they are
Fig. 13 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from front
Fig. 14 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from side
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 24 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly
across your chest and lap.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and
push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
page 23, fig. 12.
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder
strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled
slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends
and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with belt tension
devices page 27.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.
If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe injuries.
Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 page 45.
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their ma
properly positioned.
Seat belts 25
Safety Fir Technical Data
also fasten their seat belts properly
the unborn child is for the mother to
erly at all times during the pregnancy.
ximum protection only when the belt web
page 24.
nd head restraint correctly page 10.
, pull the belt evenly across your chest and
r the pelvis fig. 15.
to the buckle for the corresponding seat
it is securely locked with an audible click
that the latch plate is securely engaged in
Fig. 15 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 25 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder
region:
belt height adjustment for the front seats.
front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso page 24, fig. 13.
The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis page 24, fig. 14. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
Read and observe the warnings page 22.
Pregnant women must
The best protection for
wear the seat belt prop
The seat belt provides ma
is properly positioned
Adjust the front seat a
Holding the latch plate
as low as possible ove
Insert the latch plate in
and push it down until
.
Pull the belt to ensure
the buckle.
Seat belts26
and so that it rolls up easily and the trim
hile the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you g severe or fatal injuries.
height
rs can be used to adjust the position
oulder.
he front seats can be used to adjust the
shoulder.
Fig. 17 Location of the belt height adjuster
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 26 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.
Read and observe the warnings page 22.
Seat belt release
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
Press the red button on the belt buckle fig. 16. The latch plate
is released and springs out .
Guide the belt back by h
is not damaged
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt w increase the risk of sustainin
Adjusting the seat belt
Seat belt height adjuste
of the seat belt at the sh
The seat belt adjuster for t
proper belt position at the
Fig. 16 Removing latch plate from buckle
Seat belts 27
Safety Fir Technical Data
es
sion device
n, the seat belts on the front seats are
.
cupants are equipped with belt tension devices.
elt tension devices during severe head-on,
d only if the seat belt is actually being worn. This
t belts, reducing the forward motion of the occu-
e triggered only once.
not be triggered in the event of a light frontal,
hicle overturns, or in situations where no large
r rear of the vehicle.
are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is
tion of fire in the vehicle.
ements must be observed when the vehicle or
scrapped. A qualified workshop is familiar with
pleased to pass on the information to you.
f belt tension devices
components of the seat belts that are installed
you work on the belt tension devices or remove
when performing other repair work, the seat
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 27 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in this
position page 26, fig. 17.
Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted
the seat belt page 24.
After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the
catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
Incorrectly fastened seat belts
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe injuries.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is
properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order
described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs
substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe
or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially
increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has
assumed an incorrect sitting position. As driver, you are responsible
for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:
Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in
the vehicle while travelling .
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.
Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts properly and to wear them during the trip.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of seat belts page 22.
Belt tension devic
Function of the belt ten
During a frontal collisio
retracted automatically
The seat belts for the front oc
Sensors will only trigger the b
lateral and rear collisions, an
retracts and tightens the sea
pants.
The belt tension device can b
The belt tension devices will
side or rear collision, if the ve
forces act on the front, side o
Note If the belt tension devices
normal and it is not an indica
The relevant safety requir
components of the system are
these regulations and will be
Service and disposal o
The belt tension devices are
in the seats of your vehicle. If
and install parts of the system
Seat belts28
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 28 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an acci-
dent, the belt tension devices function incorrectly or not at all.
So that the effectiveness of the belt tension device is not reduced and that
removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-
tions, which are known to the qualified workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the belt tension devices are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases. The belt tension devices may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tension devices or seat belts.
The belt tension device and seat belt including its automatic retractor cannot be repaired.
Any work on the belt tension devices and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a qualified workshop only.
The belt tension devices will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed it they have been activated.
Airbag system 29
Safety Fir Technical Data
t critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This
possible distance between yourself and the
nt airbags can completely deploy when trig-
um protection.
at will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-
nd the speed of the vehicle.
ered depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-
collision and detected by the control unit. If the
g during the collision and measured by the
e specified reference values, the front, side
t be triggered. Take into account that the visible
in an accident, for whatever reason, is not an
gs had been triggered.
correctly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi- tal injuries.
children, who are not properly belted can es if the airbag is triggered. You should always 2 years of age on the rear seat. Never transport y are not restrained or the restraint system is , size or weight.
eat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while rrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury will be further y an inflating airbag.
ry from an inflating airbag, always wear the 9.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 29 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the
seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting
position must be assumed.
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure
the following before driving:
Always wear the seat belt properly page 19.
Adjust the driver’s seat and the steering wheel correctly
page 10.
Adjust the front passenger seat correctly page 11.
Adjust the head restraint correctly page 13.
Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your
vehicle page 45.
The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an
incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause
you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all passengers in the vehicle
assume a correct sitting position while travelling.
A sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat
belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case,
the inflating airbag may inflic
also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest
front airbag. This way, the fro
gered, providing their maxim
The most important factors th
dent, the angle of collision a
Whether the airbags are trigg
ation rate resulting from the
vehicle deceleration occurrin
control unit remains below th
and/or curtain airbag will no
damage in a vehicle involved
indication as to why the airba
WARNING
Wearing the seat belt in tion can lead to critical or fa
All occupants, including sustain critical or fatal injuri transport all children up to 1 children in the vehicle if the not appropriate for their age
If you are not wearing a s travelling or assume an inco increased risk of injury. This increased if you are struck b
To reduce the risk of inju seat belt properly page 1
Airbag system30
er airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat ainst the door, the roof or the backrest.
ances, it is necessary to transport a child in a ront passenger seat, it is absolutely essential g safety measures:
nger airbag page 43, Deactivating
approved by the child seat manufacturer for seat with front or side airbag.
instructions given by the child seat manufac- ety instructions page 45, Child safety.
ing the child seat, push the front passenger ds so that the greatest possible distance to g is ensured.
prevent the front passenger seat from being
nt passenger seat must be in an upright
and belt tension device system
itors the airbag and belt tension
l airbags and belt tension devices in the
s and wiring connections.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 30 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Always properly adjust the front seats.
The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat
Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front
passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.
An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major
danger to a child. The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if
he/she is transported in a rear-facing child seat. You should always transport
all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat.
If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating
airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may
result.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats.
That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front
passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch page 43.
When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the age and size
of each child page 45.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off,
an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
WARNING
If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.
Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju- ries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.
An inflating front passeng and hurl it with great force ag
If, under special circumst rear-facing child seat on the f that you observe the followin
Disable the front passe airbags*.
The child seat must be use on a front passenger
Follow the installation turer and observe the saf
Before properly install seat completely backwar the front passenger airba
Ensure that no objects pushed completely back.
The backrest of the fro position.
Warning lamp for airbag
This warning lamp mon
device system.
The warning lamp monitors al
vehicle, including control unit
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 31
Safety Fir Technical Data
nd disposal of the airbags
are installed in various places in your vehicle.
tem or remove and fit parts of the system when
, parts of the airbag system may be damaged.
t, in the event of an accident, the airbag inflates
at all.
nts must be observed when the vehicle or
scrapped. The specialist workshops and the
familiar with these requirements.
out by a professional, or if the airbags are used e or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may e in the wrong circumstances.
thing on the steering wheel hub or the soft unit on the passenger side of the dashboard, fy them in any way.
ach any objects such as cup holders or tele- faces covering the airbag units.
eel or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a er clean the dash panel and the airbag module
ining solvents. Solvents cause the surface to g triggered, disintegrating plastic parts could
adjust, remove or install parts of the airbag
ystem or removal and installation of the airbag s (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should ified workshop. Qualified workshops have the mation and qualified personnel.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 31 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Monitoring of airbag and belt tension device system
Both the airbag and belt tension device systems operation is constantly
monitored electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on, the warning
lamp lights for several seconds and the display in the instrument panel*
shows AIRBAG / TENSIONER.
The system must be checked when the warning lamp :
does not light up when the ignition is switched on,
after the ignition is switched on, it turns off after 4 seconds,
it turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,
lights up or flashes while the car is moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In
addition, depending on the malfunction, a fault message appears in the
display of the combi-instrument for approx. 10 seconds and a short acoustic
signal is given. In this event, you should have a qualified workshop check the
system immediately.
If any of the airbags are de-activated by the Authorised Service Centre, the
indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off
if there is no fault.
WARNING
If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tension device system cannot properly perform its protective function.
If a malfunction occured, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag system and belt tension devices may not be triggered, or may not be trig- gered correctly.
Repairs, maintenance a
The parts of the airbag system
If you work on the airbag sys
performing other repair work
The consequence may be tha
incorrectly or does not inflate
The relevant safety requireme
components of the airbag are
Vehicle disposal centres are
WARNING
If repairs are not carried incorrectly, the risk of sever fail to inflate, or could inflat
Do not cover or stick any plastic surface of the airbag and do not obstruct or modi
It is important not to att phone mountings to the sur
To clean the steering wh water-moistened cloth. Nev surface with cleansers conta become porous. If the airba cause substantial injuries.
Never attempt to repair, system.
Any work on the airbag s components for other repair be performed only by a qual necessary tools, repair infor
Airbag system32
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 32 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
We strongly recommend you to go to a qualified workshop for all work on the airbag system.
Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 33
Safety Fir Technical Data
r is located in the steering wheel fig. 18 and
nger is located in the instrument panel
ied by the word AIRBAG.
elts, the front airbag system gives the front
ion for the head and chest in the event of a
ge 36, Safety notes on the frontal airbag
nction of restraining the occupants, the seat
front passenger in a position where the airbags
tion in a frontal collision.
bstitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
e safety system. Please bear in mind that the
ffectively when the occupants are wearing their
djusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,
he seat belts at all times, not only because this
untries, but also for your safety page 19,
irbag system are:
monitoring system (control unit),
ag with gas generator) for the driver and front
dash panel insert page 30.
is monitored electronically. The airbag warning
conds every time the ignition is switched on
if the warning lamp
e ignition is switched on page 30,
ed on, it turns off after 4 seconds,
s up again after the ignition is switched on,
the car is moving.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 33 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Front airbags
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The front airbag for the drive
the airbag for the front passe
fig. 19. Airbags are identif
In conjunction with the seat b
occupants additional protect
severe frontal collision pa
system.
In addition to their normal fu
belts also hold the driver and
can provide maximum protec
The airbag system is not a su
of the vehicle’s overall passiv
airbag system can only work e
seat belts correctly and have a
it is most important to wear t
is required by law in most co
Brief Introduction.
The main parts of the front a
an electronic control and
the two front airbags (airb
passenger,
a warning lamp in the
The airbag system operation
lamp will light up for a few se
(self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system
does not light up when th
after the ignition is switch
it turns off and then light
lights up or flashes while
Fig. 18 Driver airbag located in steering wheel
Fig. 19 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel
Airbag system34
ags
the risk of head or chest injury.
so that the airbags for the driver and front
evere frontal collision.
e front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
the airbags fill with a propellant gas and
d front passenger fig. 20. The fully deployed
ovement of the front occupants and help to
head and the upper part of the body.
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag. After the collision, the
the front occupants to see forward.
extra protection in an accident, the airbags
ly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust
Fig. 20 Inflated front airbags
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 34 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
The front airbag system will not be triggered if:
the ignition is switched off,
there is a minor frontal collision,
there is a side collision,
there is a rear-end collision,
the vehicle turns over.
WARNING
The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.
If a fault has occured in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal collision the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Operation of frontal airb
Inflated airbags reduce
The airbag system is designed
passenger are triggered in a s
In certain types of accident th
gered together.
When the system is triggered,
deploy in front of the driver an
airbags cushion the forward m
reduce the risk of injury to the
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant pu
chest are surrounded and pro
airbag deflates sufficiently for
In order to provide the desired
have to deploy extremely rapid
Airbag system 35
Safety Fir Technical Data
g. 21 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags e triggered
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 35 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
tion of fire in the vehicle.
Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel and dash panel when the
driver and front passenger airbags deploy fig. 21. The airbag covers
remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.
Fi ar
Airbag system36
ags
t a substitute for the seat belts.
ted in the driver’s seat and front passenger’s
rear side airbags are located in the rear wheel
re identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper
the rear wheel housing lining.
e side airbag system gives the front seat occu-
r the upper body in the event of a severe side
otes on the operation of the side airbag
bags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on
the body facing the impact. In addition to their
the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also
Fig. 22 Side airbag in driver seat
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 36 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Safety notes on the frontal airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant.
If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates page 45, Child safety.
The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
Side airbags*
Description of side airb
The airbag system is no
The front side airbags are loca
seat backrests fig. 22. The
housing lining. The locations a
region of the backrests and in
Together with the seat belts, th
pants additional protection fo
collision page 39, Safety n
system.
In a side collision, the side air
the front seats to the areas of
normal function of protecting
Airbag system 37
Safety Fir Technical Data
r door panels have been removed or if the tly fitted.
f the loudspeakers in the door panels have oles left by the loudspeakers have been
enings are closed or covered if loudspeakers d in the interior door panels.
he doors should be made in a qualified author-
gs can only provide maximum protection if the tly page 10, Proper sitting position for
he airbag system, have the system checked orkshop. Otherwise, during a side collision,
er, or not trigger correctly.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 37 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
hold the passengers on the front seats and the outer rear seats in a position
where the side airbags can provide maximum protection.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle’s overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times,
not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your
safety page 19, Brief Introduction.
The side airbag system will not be triggered if:
the ignition is switched off,
there is a minor side collision,
there is a frontal collision,
there is a rear-end collision,
the vehicle turns over.
The main parts of the airbag system are:
an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
The front side airbags in the backrests of the front seats and the rear side
airbags in the lining of the rear wheel housing.
a warning lamp in the dash panel insert page 30.
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag warning
lamp will light up for approx. 4 seconds every time the ignition is switched on
(self-diagnosis).
WARNING
In a side-on collision, the side airbags will not work, if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel.
Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.
Never drive if the interio panels have not been correc
Never drive the vehicle i been removed, unless the h correctly closed.
Always check that the op or other equipment are fitte
Any work carried out to t ised workshop.
The seat belts and airba occupants are seated correc occupants.
If a fault has occured in t immediately by a qualified w the system may fail to trigg
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system38
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 38 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Function of side airbags
Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
many side impact collisions.
In some side collisions the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the
vehicle fig. 23.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
tion of fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the
front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the
upper body.
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant pu
chest are surrounded and pro
Fig. 23 Inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle
Airbag system 39
Safety Fir Technical Data
n incorrect sitting position, they expose them- f injury in the event of an accident. This is
hild is travelling on the front passenger seat ggered in an accident; this could have critical ious injury or death page 45, Child safety.
bag system or removal and installation of the r repairs (such as removal of the front seat) y a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may em operation.
y components of the airbag system in any way.
s are managed through sensors located in the ensure the correct functioning of the side and ors nor the door panels should be modified in akers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag tly. All work carried out on the front door must shop.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 39 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system
If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in side impact collisions.
WARNING
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.
In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.
Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered.
Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over the driver seat or front passenger seat unless the covers have been expressly approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag is triggered from the side of the backrest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag’s effectiveness page 208, Accessories, parts replacement and modifications.
Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
When children assume a selves to an increased risk o particularly the case if the c and the airbag system is tri consequences including ser
Any work on the side air airbag components for othe should only be performed b occur during the airbag syst
Do not attempt to modif
The side and head airbag interior of the front doors. To head airbags neither the do any way (e.g. fitting loudspe system may not work correc be made in a qualified work
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system40
ntries, but also for your safety page 19,
airbag system are:
onitoring system (control unit),
s with gas generator) for the driver, front
the rear seats,
ash panel insert page 30.
s monitored electronically.
l not be triggered
f,
. 24 Location of left curtain airbag
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 40 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Curtain airbags
Description of curtain airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors
fig. 24 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-
pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a
severe side collision page 41, Safety notes on the operation of the
curtain airbag system.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle’s overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,
it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this
is required by law in most cou
Brief Introduction.
The main parts of the curtain
an electronic control and m
the curtain airbags (airbag
passenger and passengers on
a warning lamp in the d
The airbag system operation i
The curtain airbag system wil
the ignition is switched of
Fig
Airbag system 41
Safety Fir Technical Data
he curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side
e front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-
, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the
rs the side windows and door pillars.
d extra protection in an accident, the airbags
idly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust
deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
shion the movement of the front occupants and
ry to the upper body.
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag.
eration of the curtain airbag system
ctly, they can considerably reduce the
inds of accident.
ags to provide their maximum protection, the ust always be maintained with seat belts
ead air bag must be disconnected in those ger compartment separation screen. See an make this adjustment.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 41 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
there is a frontal collision,
there is a rear-end collision,
if the vehicle rolls,
during a minor side collision,
WARNING
If a fault has occured in the airbag system, have the system checked imme- diately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Function of curtain airbags
Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
a side collision.
During some side collisions t
of the vehicle fig. 25.
In certain types of accident th
gered together.
When the system is triggered
process, the curtain bag cove
In order to provide the desire
have to deploy extremely rap
may develop when the airbag
tion of fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cu
help to reduce the risk of inju
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant p
chest are surrounded and pro
Safety notes on the op
If you use airbags corre
risk of injury in many k
WARNING
In order for the side airb prescribed sitting position m fastened while travelling.
For safety reasons, the h vehicles fitted with a passen Authorised Service Centre to
Fig. 25 Deployed curtain airbags
Airbag system42
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 42 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu- pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows page 208, Accessories, parts replacement and modifica- tions.
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 43
Safety Fir Technical Data
g is deactivated, this means that only the
ed. All the other airbags in the vehicle
r airbag
h in the key operated switch in the glove
F fig. 26.
lamp OFF on the instrument panel
hen the ignition is switched on .
airbag
h in the key-operated switch in the glove
fig. 26.
Fig. 27 Warning lamp for deactivated passenger airbag in centre console
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 43 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Deactivating airbags*
Disabling front passenger airbag
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,
the front passenger airbag must be de-activated.
When the passenger airba
frontal airbag is deactivat
remain functional.
Disabling front passenge
Switch the ignition on.
Turn the ignition switc
box to the position OF
Check that the warning
fig. 27 remains lit w
Enabling front passenger
Switch the ignition on.
Turn the ignition switc
box to the position ON
Fig. 26 In the glovebox: key for enabling and disa- bling front passenger airbag
Airbag system44
er the front passenger airbag will deploy all your passengers of this.
ey to activate / deactivate the passenger front ont airbag will be activated / deactivated. The on the passenger side will remain active.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 44 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Check that the warning lamp on the instrument panel does
page 43, fig. 27 not light up when the ignition is switched on
.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch.
You should deactivate the front passenger airbag only if you have to use a rear-facing child seat in exceptional cases. page 45, Child safety.
Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary in exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger airbag.
As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.
Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other- wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, this will create a danger that in case of an accident, the airbag does not deploy properly or does not deploy at all.
When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit up when the front passenger airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the airbag system:
Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified work- shop.
Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju- ries.
It is predictable wheth during an accident! Warn
When using the ignition k airbag, only the passenger fr side airbag and head airbag
WARNING (continued)
Child safety 45
Safety Fir Technical Data
e together with the on-board documentation,
t instructions manual.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 45 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Child safety
Brief introduction
Introduction
Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear
seat than on the front passenger seat.
We recommend that children under 12 years of age are transported on the
rear seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a child restraint
system or the seat belts provided, depending on their age, height and
weight. For safety reasons, the child restraint system should be installed in
the centre of the rear seat or behind the front passenger’s seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to
children. page 20, Why wear seat belts?. But unlike adults, children do
not have muscle and bone structures fully developed. This means that chil-
dren are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-
sories Program including systems for all ages made by Peke2).
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with
the ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and observe
page 46, Safety notes on using child seats.
We recommend you to includ
the manufacturer’s Child Sea
2) Not for all countries
Child safety46
bies on your lap, this can result in potentially
ransported in a vehicle without being properly eel on a seat while travelling. In an accident, gh the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries er passengers.
roper sitting position when the car is moving, reater risk of injury in the event of sudden ccident. This is particularly important if the
t passenger seat and the airbag system is trig- could cause serious injury or even death.
protect your child!
sed child alone on a child seat or in the
nditions, it may become extremely hot or cold e fatal.
n 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat system, as this could cause injuries to the ring a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an
bing to become twisted or jammed, or to rub
ts can cause injuries even in a minor collision vres.
ximum protection only when the belt web is 23, Seat belts.
y a child seat page 47, Child seats.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 46 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Safety notes on using child seats
Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of
injury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in
your vehicle.
Protect your children by properly using appropriate child seats
page 47.
Always ensure that the belt webbing is properly positioned
according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
child seat.
When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traffic.
Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least
every two hours.
WARNING
Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This could lead to a risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in exceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled page 43, Deactivating airbags*. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest position.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.
Never hold children or ba fatal injuries to the child!
Never allow a child to be t secured, or to stand up or kn the child could be flung throu to themselves and to the oth
If children assume an imp they expose themselves to g braking manoeuvre or in an a child is travelling on the fron gered in an accident; as this
A suitable child seat can
Never leave an unsupervi vehicle.
Depending on weather co inside the vehicle. This can b
Children who are less tha belt without a child restraint abdominal and neck areas du accident.
Do not allow the belt web on any sharp edges.
Incorrectly worn seat bel or in sudden braking manoeu
The seat belt provides ma properly positioned page
Only one child may occup
WARNING (continued)
Child safety 47
Safety Fir Technical Data
eats
d a correctly adjusted seat belt can
r child.
ut 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most
aring in the illustration fig. 28.
out 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most
aring in the illustration.
tructions and observe any statutory require-
sing child seats.
e together with the on-board documentation,
t instructions manual.
formation and warnings concerning the use of notes on using child seats on page 46.
Fig. 28 A group 0 rear- facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 47 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable
for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R. It means that:
Economic Commission for Europe Regulation
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: Children up to 10 kg
Group 0+: Children up to 13 kg
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg
Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard
bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number
below it).
Group 0 and 0+ child s
A suitable child seat an
help you to protect you
Group 0: For babies from abo
suitable seats are those appe
Group 0+: For babies from ab
suitable seats are those appe
Follow the manufacturer’s ins
ments when installing and u
We recommend you to includ
the manufacturer’s Child Sea
WARNING
Read and always observe in child seats in Safety
Child safety48
ts
a correctly adjusted seat belt can
child.
tructions and observe any statutory require-
ing child seats.
together with the on-board documentation,
instructions manual.
weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best
ts together with properly adjusted seat belts.
ighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5
by seat cushions with head restraints together
fig. 30.
Fig. 30 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 48 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Group 1 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the
rear of the car are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing
between 9 and 18 kg.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to include together with the on-board documentation,
the manufacturer’s Child Seat instructions manual.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.
Group 2 and 3 child sea
A suitable child seat and
help you to protect your
Follow the manufacturer’s ins
ments when installing and us
We recommend you to include
the manufacturer’s Child Seat
Group 2 child seats
Children under 7 years of age
protected by group 2 child sea
Group 3 child seats
Children over 7 years of age we
metres tall are best protected
with properly worn seat belts
Fig. 29 A category 1 forward-facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.
Child safety 49
Safety Fir Technical Data
iversal approved restraining systems for use in this age
ersal retention systems are those fitted using the adult
enger seat as far to rear as possible, as high as possible
activate the airbag.
ention systems using the ISOFIX anchors.
g, children must be secured in the vehicle with a uitable for age, weight and size.
child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front less the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This njuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in excep- nsport a child in the front passenger seat, the front
must always be disabled page 43, Deactivating ve the seat to its highest position, in case it has this
ys observe information and warnings concerning the use in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.
Weight
Seat locations
Front passenger
Rear outer Rear centre
<10 kg U* U/L U
<13 kg U* U/L U
9-18 kg U* U/L U
5-36 kg U* U U
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 49 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack page 23, Seat belts.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 46.
Securing child seats
Ways to secure a child seat
A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on
the front passenger seat.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the
following ways:
Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.
Group 0, 0+ and 1 child seats with the ISOFIX system can be secured to
the ISOFIX retaining rings. In this case, seat belts are not necessary.
U: Suitable for un
category (univ
seat belt).
*: Move the pass
and always de
L: Suitable for ret
WARNING
When travellin restraint system s
Never install a passenger seat un could cause fatal i tional cases, to tra passenger airbag airbags* and mo adjustment.
Read and alwa of child seats
Category
Group 0
Group 0+
Group 1
Group 2 / 3 1
Child safety50
ntings are available in your Authorised Service
signed only for use with ISOFIX child seats.
without the ISOFIX system, retaining belts gs this can result in potentially fatal injuries
t is secured correctly by using the ISOFIX
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 50 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Securing child seat with the ISOFIX system
The child seat with ISOFIX system can be secured quickly,
easily and safely on the rear outer seats using the system
When removing or fitting the child seat, please be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Move the seat as far to rear as it will go.
Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX retaining rings until the
child seat can be heard to engage securely.
Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.
Two ISOFIX retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the
rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear
floor. The access to ISOFIX rings is between the rear back rest and the seat.
Child seats with ISOFIX mou
Centres.
WARNING
The retaining rings are de
Never secure child seats or objects to the fastening rin to the child.
Ensure that the child sea anchors.
Fig. 31 ISOFIX securing rings
51
Safety Fir Technical Data
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 51 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
52
Fig. 3
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 52 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Cockpit 53
Safety Fir Technical Data
entilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
r deactivated front passenger airbag . . . . .
irbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nt lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rtment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ntre console:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ntrol* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
r / Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ht switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ontrol lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
153
157
132
43
29
135
170
140
91
185
231
176
144
126
174
114
165
163
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 53 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Operating instructions
Cockpit
Overview
Overview of the instrument panel
This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the
controls and displays.
Door release lever
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting control for instrument and control lighting . . . . . . . .
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air vent
Turn signal and main beam lever and cruise control system* .
Instrument panel:
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ and driver front
airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever and operation of
the multi-function display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left seat heating button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls for
Heating* and v
Climatic* . . . .
Climatronic* .
Radio/Navigator*
Right seat heating
Indication lamp fo
Front passenger a
Glove compartme
Gear shift lever .
Cup holder compa
Controls on the ce
Central locking
ESP* . . . . . . . .
Tyre pressure co
Park Pilot* . . .
Cigarette lighte
Wing mirror adj
Handbrake . . . . .
Hazard warning lig
Pedals
Ignition lock . . . .
Steering column c
A1
A2 109
A3 113
A4 113
A5
A6 116, 179
A7
55
58
73
A8
29
A9
121, 60
A10 83
A11 132
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
Cockpit54
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 54 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Handle for releasing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Button for opening and closing the front windows . . . . . . . . .
Safety switch* for the rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control* for opening and closing the rear windows . . . . . . . . .
Note Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain
models/model years or are optional extras.
A26 213
A27 104
A28 104
A29 104
Cockpit 55
Safety Fir Technical Data
g. 33 Detailed view of instrument panel: instrument nel
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 55 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Instruments
Instrument overview
The instruments display the vehicle operating status.
Detailed view of instrument panel: instrument panel
Fuel gauge page 56
Multi-function display
Engine coolant temperature gauge page 56
Rev counter page 57
Time adjustment button / trip recorder reset button page 57
Speedometer
Fi pa
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Cockpit56
ture display
ngine coolant temperature.
heavy engine loads fig. 35.
the needle should be in the middle section of
y also rise when the engine is working hard,
peratures. This is no cause for concern as long
light up and no warning* text appears in the
, fig. 48 will light up if the needle is in the
arning appears on the instrument panel
Fig. 35 Instrument panel: engine coolant tempera- ture gauge
A2
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 56 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Fuel gauge and reserve indicator
Instrument panel: fuel gauge
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres.
When the needle reaches the reserve zone fig. 34 (arrow), the warning
lamp will light and an acoustic signal will sound reminding the driver to refuel. At this point there are still about 7 litres of fuel in the tank.
The following text appears on the instrument panel display3) PLEASE REFUEL [XXX]*
Engine coolant tempera
This gauge shows the e
Needle in cold zone
Avoid high engine speeds and
Needle in normal zone
In normal driving conditions,
the scale. The temperature ma
especially at high outside tem
as the warning lamp does not
combi-instrument display.
Needle in warning zone
The warning lamp* page 73
warning zone. The following w
3) Depending on the model version
Fig. 34 Instrument panel: fuel gauge
AA
AB
AC
Cockpit 57
Safety Fir Technical Data
nvironment rs early will help you to save fuel and minimise
d with a digital odometer and a trip counter, in
s display.
the instructions shown on page 190 should
k*
ted in the instrument panel display.
page 55, fig. 33 clockwise until the
our. The hour will flash. To change the
.
lockwise to the second click to set the
ill flash. To change the minutes, press the
A5
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 57 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
display4). Stop the car and switch off the engine. Check the coolant level
page 220 .
Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should obtain
technical assistance.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warn- ings page 213.
Caution Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At
high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
Rev counter
The rev. counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
The start of the red zone page 55, fig. 33 indicates the maximum
engine speed operating at service temperature. However, it is advisable to
change up a into a higher gear, move the selector lever to D or lift your foot
off the accelerator before the needle reaches the red zone.
Caution The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of
engine damage.
For the sake of the e Changing up into higher gea
engine noise.
Speedometer
The speedometer is equippe
addition to a service interval
During the running-in period,
be followed.
Setting the digital cloc
The digital clock is loca
Turn the setting knob first click to set the h
hour, press the button
Turn the setting knob c
minutes. The minutes w
button.
4) Depending on the model version
A4
Cockpit58
ment panel shows the mileage and
he selector lever position.
On the right of the display: Selector lever posi-
atic gearbox*. The actual position of the
which is engaged (for Tiptronic) are high-
tomatic displays in this field.
those on the multi-function display (MFD)
ormation texts and warnings.
nformation and which can be used to make
shown: Instrument panel menus
le service interval display.
Fig. 37 Digital display in the instrument panel
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 58 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Digital display in the instrument panel
Display (without warning or information texts)
The display in the instrument panel shows, amongst other
things, the mileage and trip recorder as well as the selector
lever position.
Digital clock display page 57. On the right of the display: Selector
lever position display for the automatic gearbox*. The current position of
the selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic)* is high-
lighted.
Ambient temperature.
Distance display or flexible service interval display.*
Displayed categories*
The display in the instru
trip recorder as well as t
Clock: Setting the time.
tion display for the autom
selector lever or the gear
lighted.
There are optional and au
Optional indicators: e.g.
Automatic indicators: Inf
Menus providing further i
diverse settings are also
Ambient temperature:
Distance display or flexib
Fig. 36 Detail of the instrument cluster: screen with different indicators
A1
A2
A3
A1
A2
A3
A4
Cockpit 59
Safety Fir Technical Data
pear in the mileage displays if a service is due
pears and the display km with the distance
ext service appointment is due. The display will
0 seconds. A clock symbol appears and the
ice appointment should be carried out. The
in the instrument panel display: SERV. IN… KM age will disappear approximately 20 seconds
on or the engine is running. The normal display
the reset button on the trip counter or by
the MFI page 60, fig. 39 .
, you can call up the current service message by
t knob for 2 seconds.
d by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day
AB
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 59 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Recommended gear display*
This display helps to save fuel.
Use the gear display to save fuel. If you are driving in the correct gear, a dot
will be shown next to the gear display. If you are not in the correct gear, an
arrow will appear next to the gear display indicating whether you should
change up or down.
Mileage display or Service Interval Display
Distance display
The left-hand counter in the display registers the total amount of distance
covered by the vehicle.
The right-hand counter registers the short journeys. The last digit indicates
steps of 100 metres. The trip recorder counter may be reset by holding down
the reset button page 55, fig. 33 for a few seconds.
Service interval display
A Service pre-warning will ap
soon. A spanner symbol ap
that can be driven until the n
change after approximately 1
number of days until the serv
following message is shown
OR… DAYS. The service mess
after the ignition is switched
can be resumed by pressing
pressing the rocker switch of
With the ignition switched on
pressing the trip counter rese
An overdue service is indicate
information.
Fig. 38 Gear display
A6
Cockpit60
uses two automatic memories: 1 — Actual ory. The selected memory will be shown
rner of the display.
, briefly press button fig. 39 on the
to change from one memory to another or
steering wheel controls fig. 39.
you would like to reset.
n the windscreen wiper lever or button
ontrols for at least 2 seconds.
travel and consumption rates from the
ed on until it is switched off. If the journey is
switching off the ignition, the new values will
corder memory. The memory will automatically
errupted for more than two hours.
s the journey data for any number of individual
s switched off for longer than two hours) up to
utes travel time, 9,999 km distance travelled
d. The memory will automatically be deleted if
ached.
AA
AA
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 60 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Display with multi-function display (MFD)*
The multi-function display (MFD) shows you information on
the journey and fuel consumption.
The multi-function system
memory and 2 — Total mem in the upper right-hand co
Selecting a memory
When the ignition is on
windscreen wiper lever
press button on the
Resetting a memory
Select the memory that
Hold down button o
on the steering wheel c
The trip memory 1 collects the
moment the ignition is switch
continued within two hours of
be added to the existing trip re
be deleted if the journey is int
The journey memory 2 collect
journeys (even if the ignition i
a total of 99 hours and 59 min
and 999 litres of fuel consume
one of the named values is re
Fig. 39 Rocker buttons A and B. Steering wheel controls.
Fig. 40 Digital display in the instrument panel
AA
AA
Cockpit 61
Safety Fir Technical Data
stance you can travel with the remaining fuel)
n
play
wn on the display.
t of time which has elapsed since the ignition
n both memories is 99 hours and 59 minutes.
ly be deleted once this value has been reached.
own after running a distance of approximately
ar in the display until that time. The display will
while the vehicle is in motion.
ce travelled since the ignition was switched on.
n both memories is 9999 km. The memory will
e this value has been reached.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 61 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Displays in the multi-function display (MFD)*
You can switch between the following displays in the multi-function display
(MFD) by operating the rocker switch fig. 41 on the windscreen wiper
lever.
Memory displays
Driving speed
Journey duration
Average speed
Distance
Distance to empty (the di
Average fuel consumptio
Current fuel consumption
Ambient temperature dis
Speed warning
Km/h — Driving speed
Driving speed is digitally sho
min — Journey duration
The display shows the amoun
was switched on.
The maximum display value i
The memory will automatical
km/h — Average speed
The average speed will be sh
100 metres. Dashes will appe
be updated every 5 seconds
km — Distance travelled
The display shows the distan
The maximum display value i
automatically be deleted onc
Fig. 41 Rocker buttons A and B. Steering wheel controls.
Fig. 42 Digital instru- ment panel display: average fuel consumption indicator.
AB
Cockpit62
ng the rocker switch in steps of 5 km/h
memory value.
e road surface even if the snowflake symbol this reason, not rely exclusively on this
or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
higher than the actual ambient temperature as
om the engine.
text in the display*
display with warning lamps and
ports.
rtain components and functions when the igni-
he vehicle is moving. Functional faults are indi-
gs and information texts in the display. An
rtain cases.
s (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols
es given on a fault, you will receive information
r will be asked to carry out certain tasks.
AB
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 62 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Km — Fuel range
The fuel range is calculated using the figures for tank content and current fuel
consumption. It shows how far the vehicle can travel using the same condi-
tions as a reference.
litre/100 km — Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption will be shown page 61, fig. 42 after a
distance of approximately 100 metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear
in the display until that time. The display will be updated every 5 seconds
while the vehicle is in motion. The amount of fuel used will not be shown.
ltr/100 km or ltr/hr — Current fuel consumption
The display will show the current fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the
vehicle is in motion or in litre/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position
with the engine running.
Using this display you can see how your driving style affects fuel consump-
tion page 192.
Ambient temperature display
The measurement margin extends from -45C to +58C. At temperatures
lower than +4C, an ice crystal symbol is displayed and a warning sounds
if the vehicle is moving at more than 20 km/h (ice warning). This symbol will
flash for about 10 seconds and remains lit until the exterior temperature rises
above +4C or 6C if it was already lit.
Set speed indicator
When driving at the required speed, enter the speed indicator mode and
press the button (Reset), the display remembers the indicated speed. If
the indicated speed is exceeded, a warning text is displayed on the screen5)
and a warning signal sounds.
This may be deactivated by pressing the button (Reset).
The speed may be altered usi
within 5 seconds of the initial
WARNING
There could be black ice on th is not shown. You should, for display — Risk of accident!
Note When the vehicle is stationary
ture displayed may be slightly
a result of the heat radiated fr
Warning or information
Faults are shown in the
warning/information re
The system runs a check on ce
tion is switched on and while t
cated by symbols with warnin
audible warning is given in ce
Warning symbols
There are red warning symbol
(priority 2)
Information text
In addition to warning messag
in the display on procedures o 5) Depending on the model version, the message on the screen may vary and may be
represented by flashing of the speed indication or by a speed message.
AA
AA
Cockpit 63
Safety Fir Technical Data
eports are detected at the same time, the
ter the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After
xt will disappear and the symbol will be shown
he display.
ll not be shown until all Priority 1 warning
!
g reports (yellow):6)
e information text PLEASE REFUEL.
symbol with the information text REFILL . Refill the windscreen washer tank
he model.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 63 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Note In the case of screens without warning or information texts, faults are indi-
cated exclusively by the warning lamps.
Warning reports, Priority 1 (red)*
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will
be accompanied by three audible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop
the car and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain profes-
sional assistance if necessary.
If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols will be
displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time and will continue
until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warning
report.
Examples of priority 1 warning reports (red)
Brake system symbol with the warning text STOP BRAKE FLUID SERVICE MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL.
Coolant symbol with the warning text STOP SEE COOLANT SERVICE MANUAL.
Engine oil pressure symbol with the warning text STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW! SERVICE MANUAL.
Warning reports, Priority 2 (yellow)*
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied
by one audible warning. The function should be checked as soon as possible.
If several priority 2 warning r
symbols are displayed one af
a set time, the information te
as a reminder at the side of t
Priority 2 warning reports wi
reports have been dealt with
Examples of priority 2 warnin
Fuel warning light with th
Windscreen washer fluid
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID page 222.
6) Depending on the version of t
Cockpit64
ning will be used as an example of how to
ood idea if you are, for example, using
suited for the top speed of the vehicle.
th the MFD lever
or two seconds to return to main menu
y be necessary to repeat this operation
displayed.
uration with the MFD lever
m the menu, press the upper or lower end
e selected option is displayed between
also be a triangle on the right.
tion.
Fig. 44 Steering wheel controls: button A to confirm the menu selec- tion and switch B to change the menu
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 64 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Instrument panel menus*
Example of menu use
All the menus on the instrument panel may be used according
to the following procedure. The instrument panel menus may
vary according to the version of the model.
The setting of a speed war
use the menus. This is a g
winter tyres which are not
1. Open the main menu wi
Switch the ignition on.
Hold down button f
from other menu. It ma
until the main menu is
2. Open the menu Config
To choose an option fro
of the rocker switch. Th
two lines and there will
Select menu Configura
Fig. 43 Windscreen wiper lever: button A to confirm the menu selection and rocker switch B to change the menu
AB
Cockpit 65
Safety Fir Technical Data
uipment one or more of these menus will be
n f menu displayed
rent set speed is displayed
es will be shown if the function is deactivated.
nction is activated or deactivated
value increases by 10 km/h
value decreases by 10 km/h
nu Winter tyres is closed and the last dis-
menu is shown.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 65 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Press button on the windscreen wiper lever. The Configura- tion menu is opened.
2. Access the Configuration menu with the steering wheel controls
To access the Configuration menu, press button
page 64, fig. 44 until the menu is displayed. Now you are in
this menu.
3. Open the main menu Winter tyres
Select option Winter tyres using switch .
Press button . The menu Winter tyres is opened.
4. Program a speed limit warning
Use switch to select the menu entry + 10 km/h or — 10 km/h
and press button to either increase or decrease the set speed.
5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit warning
Use switch to select the menu point On / Off and press the
button to switch the speed warning on or off. If the speed
warning is deactivated, three dashes will be displayed —
6. To close the menu Winter tyres
In the menu select Back.
The function Winter tyres sends an optical and an acoustic signal when the
vehicle reaches the set speed.
Example menu Winter tyres
Note For electronic and vehicle eq
displayed.
AA
AC
AB
AA
AB
AB
AB
On the display Winter tyres
Functio Name o
X km/h The cur
or — or dash
On / Off If the fu
+10 km/h The set
-10 km/h The set
Back The me
played
Cockpit66
t button for at least 2 seconds. It may
this operation until the main menu is
in menu
m the menu, press the upper or lower end
e selected option is displayed between
ct the entry.
64
Function
to the multi-function display (MFD): Multi-
n display (MFD)
rent station will be shown when the radio is
d on.
nu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with
ation system. The navigation system must be
d on. When the route guidance is activated,
ing arrows and proximity bars are displayed.
play is similar to that of the Navigation sys-
ute guidance is not activated, the direction of
ompass) and the name of the street along
ou are driving are shown.
AB
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 66 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Main menu
The menu provides access to the different display functions
(only with the MFD lever).
Open main menu
Switch the ignition on.
Press and hold the ejec
be necessary to repeat
displayed.
Select a menu from the ma
To choose an option fro
of rocker switch . Th
two horizontal lines.
Press button to sele
Example of menu use page Fig. 45 Windscreen wiper lever (MFD): button A to confirm the menu selec- tion and rocker switch B to change the menu
Fig. 46 Digital instru- ment panel display: Main menu
Main menu
Multi-function dis- play
Change
functio
Audio The cur
switche
Navigation This me
a navig
switche
the turn
The dis
tem.
If the ro
travel (c
which y
AB
AA
Cockpit 67
Safety Fir Technical Data
menu (MFD)
lay (MFD) shows you information on
nsumption.
FD) has two automatic memories: 1 — Trip y. The selected memory is shown on the upper
lay fig. 47 at all times.
ay menu
display menu from the main menu page 66
on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunc-
ory to another, briefly press button
ge 64 on the windscreen wiper lever or the
ion lever page 64, fig. 44 page 64 while
n.
Fig. 47 Multifunction display (MFD) instrument panel display.
AA
OK
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 67 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Multi-function display
The multi-function disp
the journey and fuel co
The multifunction display (M
memory and 2 — Total memor right hand section of the disp
Open the multifunction displ
Select the Multifunction and press the button
tion lever*.
Selecting a memory
To change from one mem
page 64, fig. 43 pa
button on the multifunct
the ignition is switched o
Telephone This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with
a telephone mounted by the manufacturer: Fixed tel-
ephone installation
Vehicle condition This menu displays current warning or information
texts: Vehicle status menu
This option flashes when one of these texts is dis-
played.
Configuration This option allows the time, the speed warning when
using winter tyres, units, language, independent
heating, the Light and visibility menu and the Con-
venience menu to be reset.
OK
Cockpit68
displays are shown on the instrument panel
function Display Data from the Configuration
ted or deactivated individually by marking the
he button on the windscreen wiper lever or
eel*.
t of time which has elapsed since the ignition
both memories is 99 hours and 59 minutes.
y be deleted once this value has been reached.
100km or l/h
nt fuel consumption in mpg whilst the vehicle
hen the vehicle is in a stationary position with
how your driving style affects fuel consump-
km
will be shown after a distance of approximately
. Dashes will appear in the display until that
ted every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in
ed will not be shown.
ing the figures for tank content and current fuel
r the vehicle can travel using the same condi-
OK
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 68 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Resetting a memory
Select the memory where you wish to erase the values.
Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on
the multifunction* steering wheel for at least 2 seconds.
The journey memory 1 collects the travel and consumption data from the
moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is
continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will
be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically
be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
The total journey memory 2 collects the journey data for any number of indi-
vidual journeys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours)
up to a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 9999 miles distance
travelled. The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named
values is reached.
Memory indications
The following data can be viewed on the multifunction display using the
rocker switch page 64, fig. 43 page 64 on the windscreen wiper
lever or by pressing button or page 64, fig. 44 on the multifunction
steering wheel*.
Duration
Current fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Distance to empty (the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel)
Distance
Average speed
Digital display of speed7)
Speed warning to — km/h
Personal selection of display
The driver can establish which
display as required:
Select the submenu Multi menu page 70.
The displays can be activa
required option and pressing t
the multifunction steering wh
Duration in h and min
The display shows the amoun
was switched on.
The maximum display value in
The memory will automaticall
Current fuel consumption in l/
The display will show the curre
is in motion or in litres/hour w
the engine running.
Using this display you can see
tion page 192.
Average consumption in l/100
The average fuel consumption
100 metres has been travelled
time. The display will be upda
motion. The amount of fuel us
Fuel range in km
The fuel range is calculated us
consumption. It shows how fa
tions as a reference.
7) It is not possible to see whether the alternative speed display is activated.
AA OK
AB
Cockpit 69
Safety Fir Technical Data
he road surface even if the snowflake symbol r this reason, not rely exclusively on this
ent panels; therefore the multifunction display
nary or travelling at very low speeds, the
e slightly higher than the actual ambient
heat radiated from the engine.
ion steering wheel* do not have buttons on the
ultifunction display can only be controlled from
tion steering wheel*.
ing or information texts
enu
cle status from the main menu: Main
n on the windscreen wiper lever
on the multifunction steering wheel*
til the Vehicle Status menu is displayed.
nd information texts: Information and warning
automatically disappear from the screen after a
Vehicle status menu.
OK AA
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 69 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Distance travelled in km
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 9999 miles. The memory will
automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Average speed in km/h
The average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100
metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear in the display until that time.
The display will be updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in motion.
Digital display of speed
The instrument panel display gives the speed in digital format7).
Speed warning to — km/h
This function may help you to keep within the speed limits. Press the
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunction steering wheel*
to select the current speed. The instrument panel display gives the selected
speed, for example, Speed warning 120 km/h. You have five seconds to reset
the speed between 30 km/hand 250 km/h using rocker switch or buttons
or on the multifunction steering wheel*. Press the button or wait
five seconds until the speed is stored and the warning is activated. If the set
speed is exceeded, an acoustic signal is heard and a warning message is
displayed until the speed is reduced to at least 4 km/h below the stored
speed. The function is switched off by pressing the button again. Speed warning — km/h is now displayed on the instrument panel.
Ambient temperature display
The measurement margin ranges from -40C (-40F) to +50C (+125F). At
outside temperatures below +4C (+39.2F), a snowflake symbol (ice
warning) appears in addition to the outside temperature display. This symbol
flashes for a few seconds and remains lit until the outside temperature rises
above +6C (+42.8F).
WARNING
There could be black ice on t is not shown. You should, fo display — Risk of accident!
Note There are different instrum
may vary.
When the vehicle is statio
temperature displayed may b
temperature as a result of the
Vehicles with a multifunct
windscreen wiper lever. The m
the buttons on the multifunc
Vehicle status menu
This menu shows warn
Open Vehicle Condition m
Select the option Vehi menu and press butto
page 66, fig. 45 or
Press button or
page 64, fig. 44 un
Priority 2 warning messages a
messages on the screen will
time and will be stored in the
OK
AA
AB
OK
OK
Cockpit70
equipment one or more of these menus will be
m this menu it is it possible to alter the vehi-
lighting settings.
hours and minutes of the clock and the navi-
ion system can be changed. Choose between
or 24-hour format and change to summer
e.
menu allows the setting of a speed at which
optical and acoustic warning will be given by
system. You can use this function, for exam-
, if you have fitted winter tyres which are not
ted for the top speed of your vehicle. Please
the section Wheels and tyres.
display texts and the navigation system texts
be seen in different languages.
s option allows you to select the units for dis-
ying temperature, fuel consumption values
distances.
instrument panel also displays the speed in
ther different unit of measurement (mph or
/h) to that given on the speedometer.
sult service messages and reset service inter-
display here.
manufacturer’s predefined values for the
ctions of this menu are restored.
s returns to the main menu
ver is used (MFD).
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 70 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
The warning and information texts may be viewed in this menu. If there is no
warning or information message, the option Vehicle status is not displayed.
If there are several messages, each one is shown for a few seconds.
Example of menu use page 64.
Note If there are no warning messages, this menu is not available.
Configuration menu
This menu is used to make the settings for the vehicle func-
tions.
Open Configuration menu
Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main
menu and press button page 64, fig. 43 on the wind-
screen wiper lever or
Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
page 64, fig. 44 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
Example of menu use page 64
Note For electronic and vehicle
displayed.
Displayed on the screen Function
Multifunction display data
This menu is used to establish the data in the
multifunction display menu to be displayed on
the instrument panel page 67
Convenience The convenience set-up mode is used to make
the settings for the convenience functions in the
vehicle.
OK AA
Lights and visibility Fro
cle
Time The
gat
12
tim
Winter tyres The
an
the
ple
sui
see
Settings: Language The
can
Units Thi
pla
and
Aux. Speed The
ano
km
Inter Service Con
val
Manufacturer’s settings The
fun
Backa) Thi
a) Only of the windscreen wiper le
Cockpit 71
Safety Fir Technical Data
uipment one or more of these menus will be
Function
door: Individual unlocking activated.
o. locking: the doors are automatically locked
n the vehicle is travelling at more than approx
m/h.
o unlock: the doors are unlocked when the key
moved from the ignition.
ning and closing electric windows: this deter-
es whether to open or close all the windows
n the vehicle is unlocked or locked. The open
tion can also be activated for the driver’s door
.
nchronised adjustment is selected, when the
er’s side wing mirror is adjusted, the passen-
wing mirror is also moved.
manufacturer’s predefined values for the func-
s of this menu are restored.
returns to the Configuration menu
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 71 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
SEAT dealers are able to programme other functions or change the
existing functions depending upon the vehicle equipment.
The Configuration menu is only accessible when the vehicle is at a
standstill.
Convenience menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle conven-
ience settings.
Open menu Convenience
Choose the option Configuration from the main menu and press
the button page 64, fig. 43on the windscreen wiper
lever.
Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
page 64, fig. 44 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
Choose the option Convenience from the main menu and press
the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use page 64 Note
For electronic and vehicle eq
displayed.
OK AA
AA
Displayed on the screen
Open door One
Aut
whe
15 k
Aut
is re
Elec. window control Ope
min
whe
func
only
Wing mirror adjust. If sy
driv
ger
Manufacturer’s set- tings
The
tion
Back This
Cockpit72
ipment one or more of these menus will be
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 72 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Lights and visibility menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting
settings.
Open Lights and visibility Menu
Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main
menu and press button page 64 on the windscreen
wiper lever or
Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
page 64, fig. 44 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
Select the option Lights & visibility from the menu and press
button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use page 64
Note For electronic and vehicle equ
displayed.
Displayed on the screen
Function
Coming Home/ Leaving Home
This option permits the adjustment of the time
during which the headlamps remain lit after the
vehicle is locked, and also permits the function to
be connected and disconnected
Indicator conf. The comfort indicator function can be activated or
deactivated here. With the comfort mode acti-
vated, the indicator will blink at least three times
when turned on.
Manufacturer’s set- tings
The manufacturer’s predefined values for the func-
tions of this menu are restored.
Back This returns to the Configuration menu.
OK AA
AA
Cockpit 73
Safety Fir Technical Data
g. 48 Instrument panel with warning lamps. Some of e items of equipment listed here are fitted only on rtain models/model years or are optional extras.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 73 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Warning lamps
Overview of the warning lamps
The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.
Fi th ce
Cockpit74
g lamps and warning messages can result in mage to your vehicle.
creases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a attention of other road users in order to
ctive page 79
ake applied
ke fluid level or
ke system
page 79
pressure page 80
trol system switched on page 80
indicator page 80
chanical steering page 80
e emission control system page 81
: electronic stabilisation pro-
SP) is working
ns lit: ESP malfunction or off
page 81
selector lever lock (auto-
rbox) page 82
immobiliser page 82
Meaning of warning and control lamps
Further information
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 74 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
WARNING
Failure to observe warnin serious personal injury or da
The risk of an accident in warning triangle to draw the prevent danger to thirds.
Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps
Further information
Fuel level / reserve page 75
Coolant level / coolant temperature page 75
Rear fog light switched on page 76
Turn signals in operation page 76
Engine fault (petrol engine) page 76
Glow plug system for diesel engine page 76
Main beam switched on page 77
Pollen accumulation in the diesel
engine particulate filter page 77
ABS system fault page 77
Windscreen washer fluid level page 78
Alternator fault page 78
Fasten seat belts! page 19
Tyre pressure page 78
Airbag or belt tension device system
fault or airbag disabled
page 27
page 30
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
Bulb defe
Parking br
or low bra
fault in bra
Engine oil
Cruise con
Door open
Electrome
Fault in th
If flashing gramme (E
If it remai
Automatic
matic gea
SAFE Electronic
Item Symbol
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
Cockpit 75
Safety Fir Technical Data
rature
s up if the coolant temperature is too
vel is too low.
not go out again after a few seconds.
p or flashes while the vehicle is moving, while
ls are emitted.
olant level is too low or the coolant temperature
s the following message9): CHECK COOLANT age 220.
erature gauge. The coolant temperature is too
warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle, it for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.
he overheating may be caused by a malfunction
radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces-
again after driving on for a short distance, stop gine off. Contact an Authorised Service Centre
s the following message10): STOP CHECK NUAL.
he model.
he model.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 75 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, you must switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or other kind of injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings page 213.
Note The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without
warning or information texts in the display.
In vehicles with warning or information texts on the screen, the appro-
priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information text
will also appear on the screen.
Fuel level / reserve
This symbol lights up to indicate that the fuel tank under the
reserve level.
It lights up when only 7 litres of fuel remain in the tank. Also, an audible warning is given. This serves as a reminder to fill up with fuel at the earliest
opportunity page 210.
The instrument panel displays the following message8): PLEASE REFUEL!.
Coolant Level* / tempe
The warning lamp light
high or if the coolant le
There is a fault if:
The warning symbol does
The warning lamp lights u
three acoustic warning signa
This means that either the co
is too high.
Coolant temperature too high
The instrument panel display
INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL p
First look at the coolant temp
high if the needle is over the
switch the engine off and wa
If the coolant level is correct, t
of the radiator fan. Check the
sary page 249.
If the warning lamp lights up
the vehicle and switch the en or a qualified workshop.
Coolant level too low
The instrument panel display
COOLANT INSTRUCTIONS MA
Depending on the version of the model.
WARNING (continued)
9) Depending on the version of t 10) Depending on the version of t
Cockpit76
icators page 116.
itors the engine management system
nic Power Control) lights up when the ignition
e lamp is working properly. It should go out
nic engine management system while you are
l light up. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
ine fault
up to show that the glow plugs are
there is an engine fault.
while the glow plugs are preheating. When the
gine should be started straight away.
e management system while you are driving,
. Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service
d have the engine checked.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 76 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal
range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity .
WARNING
If your vehicle is immobilised for any technical reasons, move it to a safe distance from traffic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights on and place the warning triangle.
Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant.
The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, switch off the engine and allow it to cool down. Always note the corresponding warnings page 213.
Rear fog light
This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on . Further
information page 109.
Turn signals
The warning lamp flashes when the indicators are in opera-
tion.
Depending on which indicator is operating, either the left or right indi-
cator lamp flashes. Both warning lamps will flash at the same time when the
hazard warning lights are switched on.
If any of both indicators fails, the warning lamp will start flashing twice faster
than normal.
Further information on the ind
Engine management*
This warning lamp mon
for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electro
is switched on to show that th
once the engine is started.
If there is a fault in the electro
driving, this warning lamp wil
assistance.
Glow plug system / Eng
The warning lamp lights
preheating. It flashes if
Warning lamp is lit
The warning lamp lights up
warning lamp goes off, the en
Warning lamp flashes
If a fault develops in the engin
the glow plug lamp will flash Centre as soon as possible an
Cockpit 77
Safety Fir Technical Data
(ABS)
monitors the ABS.
light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
after the system has run through an automatic
s not light up when the ignition is switched on.
ot go out again after a few seconds.
p when the vehicle is moving.
d in the normal way (except that the ABS control
ase take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as
information on the ABS see the page 183.
e ESP* warning lamp will also light up.
ights up together with the brake warning lamp
ult in the ABS function, but also a possible fault
et, read and observe the warnings on e engine compartment.
p should light up together with the ABS ehicle immediately and check the brake fluid e 226, Brake fluid. If the fluid level has ark you must not drive on. Risk of accident. .
correct, the fault in the brake system may have he ABS system. This could cause the rear
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 77 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Main beam headlights
This warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on.
The warning lamp is switched on once main beams are on or once the
headlight flasher is operating.
Further information page 116.
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter
If the indicator lights you may help the filter clear itself by driving in the
appropriate manner.
To do this, drive about 15 minutes in 4th or 5th gear (automatic gearbox: S
gear range) at a speed of 60 km/h, with the engine running at approximately
2000 rpm. In this way, the pollen build up in the filter is burned. When
cleaning is successful, the indicator turns off.
If the indicator is not deactivated, bring the vehicle to a specialised work-
shop to repair the fault.
WARNING
Always drive according to the road weather conditions, the terrain and traffic. Driving recommendations should never lead to illegal manoeuvres in surrounding traffic.
The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under- neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.
Anti-lock brake system
A warning lamp system
The warning lamp should
switched on. It goes out again
test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
The warning lamp doe
The warning lamp does n
The warning lamp lights u
The vehicle can still be brake
function will not function). Ple
soon as possible. For further
If a fault occurs in the ABS, th
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp l
, this indicates not only a fa
in the brake system .
WARNING
Before opening the bonn page 213, Working in th
If the brake warning lam warning lamp , stop the v level in the reservoir pag dropped below the MIN m Obtain technical assistance
If the brake fluid level is been caused by a failure of t
Cockpit78
l system controls the tyre speed and
of each tyre.
wheel revolutions and with this information,
ing the ESP sensors. If the diameter of a wheel
icator lights . The wheel diameter changes
t.
ged.
because of a load.
under more pressure (for example, driving with
.
now chains.
tted.
n
Fig. 49 Centre console: tyre monitor system button
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 78 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.
Washer fluid
This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen
washer level is too low.
This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity
page 222.
The following message is shown on the instrument panel display*11): REFILL WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID.
Alternator
This warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator.
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go
out when the engine has started running.
If the warning lamp lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer
charging the battery. You should immediately drive to the nearest qualified
workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary
because this will drain the battery.
Tyre pressure*
The tyre pressure contro
the frequency spectrum
The tyre monitor 12) compares
the diameter of each wheel us
changes, the tyre monitor ind
when:
Tyre pressure is insufficien
The tyre structure is dama
The vehicle is unbalanced
The wheels of one axle are
a trailer or on extreme slopes)
The vehicle is fitted with s
The emergency wheel is fi
11) Depending on the version of the model.
WARNING (continued)
12) Depending on the model versio
Cockpit 79
Safety Fir Technical Data
s up when a bulb in the vehicle’s exte-
.
p when a bulb in the vehicle’s exterior lighting
defective.
s the following message13): LEFT FULL BEAM
rake
s up if the handbrake is applied, if the
o low or if there is a fault in the brake
up if
with the handbrake on, the following message
t panel display 14): HANDBRAKE ON. Also, an
oo low page 226.
s the following message14): STOP BRAKE FLUID
ake system.
s the following message14): BRAKE SYSTEM AL.
he model.
he model.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 79 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
The wheel on one axle is changed.
Tyre pressure adjustment
Following the modification to tyre pressure or after changing one or more
wheels, the button page 78, fig. 49 must be kept pressed while the igni-
tion is on until an acoustic signal is heard and the warning lamp goes out.
If the wheels are under excessive load (for example, driving with a trailer or
heavy load), the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended value
for a full load (see the sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre monitor
system button is pressed down, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.
The tyre pressure monitor indicator lights up
If the tyre pressure of one or more wheels is much lower than the value set by
the driver, then the tyre control warning lamp lights up .
The tyre pressure monitor indicator flashes
If the tyre pressure indicator flashes, this indicates a fault. Go to the nearest
specialist workshop.
WARNING
When the tyre pressure indicator lights, reduce speed immediately and avoid any sudden manoeuvre or braking. Stop when possible, and check the tyre pressure and status.
The driver is responsible for correct tyre pressure. For this reason, tyre pressure must be regularly checked.
Under certain circumstances (for example, in a sports situation, in winter conditions or on a dirt track) the tyre monitor indicator may light or function incorrectly.
Note If the battery is disconnected, the yellow indicator lights up after turning
the ignition on. This should turn off after a brief journey.
Bulb defect
The warning lamp light
rior lighting is defective
The warning lamp lights u
(e.g. left-hand main beam) is
The instrument panel display
FAULTY.
Brake system* / handb
The warning lamp light
brake fluid level falls to
system.
This warning lamp lights
If the handbrake is on.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h
will appear on the instrumen
audible warning is given.
If the brake fluid level is t
The instrument panel display
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
If there is a fault in the br
The instrument panel display
FAULT INSTRUCTIONS MANU
13) Depending on the version of t 14) Depending on the version of t
Cockpit80
s on when the cruise control system
when the cruise control system is switched on.
ntrol system page 179.
s or tailgate*
e of the doors or the tailgate is open.
o off when all the doors are closed correctly.
he ignition is switched off. It should go off
ehicle is locked.
g, the level of steering assistance depends on
e steering angle.
t up for a few seconds when the ignition is
once the engine is started.
the indicator remains lit, even with the engine
ly goes off after a distance of approx. 50 m.
echanical steering system if the lamp does not
ehicle is in motion. The indicator may appear
icate faults. If it lights yellow, this indicates a
k workshop assistance immediately, if no
riving. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 80 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
This warning lamp can light up together with the anti-lock brake system
warning lamp.
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings on page 213.
If the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid level page 226, Brake fluid in the reservoir is too low. Risk of accident. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain tech- nical assistance.
If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp , the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.
Engine oil pressure
This warning lamp indicates that the engine oil pressure is
too low.
If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is too
low, add more engine oil page 216.
The instrument panel displays the following message15): STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct, do not drive on. The
engine must not even run at idle speed. Obtain technical assistance.
Cruise control system*
The warning lamp come
is switched on.
The warning lamp lights up
Further notes on the cruise co
Indicator for open door
This indicator lights if on
The warning light should g
The system also works when t
approx. 15 seconds after the v
Power steering system*
For vehicles with power steerin
the vehicle’s speed and on th
The warning lamp should ligh
switched on. It should go out
If the battery is disconnected,
running. The warning light on
There is a fault in the electrom
go out or lights up whilst the v
in two different colours to ind
minor fault. If it lights red, see
assistance is available stop d 15) Depending on the version of the model.
Cockpit 81
Safety Fir Technical Data
programme (ESP)*
itors the electronic stabilisation
ABS, EDL and TCS. This also includes the brake
tic cleaning of the brake discs and the trailer
following functions:
conds when the ignition is switched on while a
out.
activated when driving.
ly if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
ult should occur in the ABS because the ESP
the ABS.
hts up and stays on after the engine is started,
ol system has temporarily switched off the ESP.
activated by switching the ignition off and then
goes out, this means the system is fully func-
, the TCS function deactivates and the warning
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 81 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
assistance. The power steering does not work if the battery is flat or if the
engine is off (for example, for towing). You should take into account that you
will need considerably more power than normal to steer the vehicle if the
steering assistance is reduced or has failed completely.
For those vehicles fitted with ESP* the function Recommended steering
manoeuvre is included. See page 185.
Emission control system*
This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.
Warning lamp flashes:
When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce
speed and drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop to have the
engine checked.
The instrument panel displays the following message16): EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP
Warning lamp is lit:
If a fault has developed during driving which has reduced the quality of the
exhaust gas (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to
the nearest qualified workshop to have the engine checked.
The following information text displayed in the instrument panel display :
EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP.
Electronic stabilisation
This warning lamp mon
programme.
This programme includes the
assist system (BAS), automa
stability programme (TSP).
The warning lamp has the
It will light for about 2 se
test of the function is carried
It flashes when the ESP is
It will light up continuous
It will also come on if a fa
operates in conjunction with
If the ESP warning lamp lig
this may mean that the contr
In this case the ESP can be re
on again. If the warning lamp
tional.
If the ESP button is activated
lamp flashes.
16) Depending on the version of the model.
Cockpit82
e
sed when this warning lamp lights up. This is
c gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the
Safe
es if an unauthorised key is used.
at deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
rted into the ignition. The immobiliser will be
as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition
the following message17): SAFE. The vehicle
page 166.
tarted if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine
icle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.
e model.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 82 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Differential lock fault (EDL)*
EDL operates along with the ABS in vehicles equipped with an
Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP)*
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ABS warning lamp . Please
take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible. For further infor-
mation on the EDL page 186, Electronic differential lock (EDL)*.
Traction control system (TCS)*
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and should turn
out after about 2 seconds.
When the TCS is operating while driving, the warning lamp flashes. If the
system is deactivated or if there is any fault in the same, the warning lamp will
remain lit.
It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper-
ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information, see page 183,
Brakes.
If the TCS button is activated, the TCS function deactivates and the warning
lamp remains lit.
By pressing again, TCS function is reactivated and the warning lamp switched
off.
Operating the foot brak
The footbrake must be depres
necessary when the automati
positions P or N.
Electronic immobiliser*
This warning lamp flash
Inside the key there is a chip th
matically when the key is inse
activated again automatically
lock.
The instrument panel displays
cannot be used in that case
The engine can, however, be s
key is used.
Note A perfect operation of the veh
17) Depending on the version of th
Steering wheel controls* 83
Safety Fir Technical Data
the available audio functions from the steering
n, to control the available audio functions and
e steering wheel.
control the Audio system (Radio, CD Audio, CD
dio / navigation System, in which case they also
.
rbox* page 173.
Fig. 51 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 83 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Steering wheel controls*
General information
The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible
to control the audio, telephone and radio navigation functions, and the auto-
matic gearbox*, without needing to distract the driver’s attention.
There are two versions of the multifunction module:
Audio version, to control
wheel.
Audio + Telephone versio
the telephone system from th
Both versions may be used to
mp3, CD Changer) and the ra
control the Navigation system
Version for automatic gea
Audio system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 50 Controls on the steering wheel
Steering wheel controls*84
AUXa)
Volume up
Volume down
No specified function
No function specified
No function specified
Silence
Operates on Instrument panel display
No function specifieda)
Operates on Instrument panel display
No function specifieda)
No function specified
Change menu on instrument panel
No function specified
Change menu on instrument panel
Operates on instrument panel
Change source
Operates on instrument panel
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 84 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod*
a) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.
Volume up Volume up
Volume down Volume down
Search for next station Next track
Hold down: Fast forward
Search for last station Last track
Hold down:Rewind
No function specified No function specified
Silence Pause
b)
b) Depending on the model version
Operates on Instrument panel display Operates on Instrument panel display
Next preset a) Next track a)
b) Operates on Instrument panel display Operates on Instrument panel display
Previous preset a) Previous track a)
b) Next preset Change folder
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
b) Previous preset Change folder
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
b) Change source Change source
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
Steering wheel controls* 85
Safety Fir Technical Data
Fig. 53 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)
TELEPHONE
up Volume up
down Volume down
specified No function specified
specified No function specified
ne menu on
t panel
Make call
Accept incoming call
End call
Hold down: reject incoming
call
ecognition Enable voice recognition
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 85 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls
Fig. 52 Controls on the steering wheel
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX
Volume up Volume up Volume
Volume down Volume down Volume
Search for next station Next track
Hold down: Fast forward No function
Search for last station Last track
Hold down:Rewind No function
Access telephone menu on instrument
panel
Access telephone menu on instrument
panel
Access telepho
instrumen
Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice r
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
Steering wheel controls*86
pecified
Movement on telephone menu
Address book / Last calls /
Calls received / Missed calls
pecified
Movement on telephone menu
Address book / Last calls /
Calls received / Missed calls
instrument
l
Change menu on instrument
panel
instrument
l
Change menu on instrument
panel
ument panel Confirm
ument panel Return to MULTIFUNCTION DIS-
PLAY menu
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 86 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Next preset a) Next track a) No function s
Previous preset a) Previous track a) No function s
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on
pane
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on
pane
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr
a) Only if the instrument panel is in Audio menu.
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
Steering wheel controls* 87
Safety Fir Technical Data
Fig. 55 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)
NAVIGATOR
up Volume up
down Volume down
specified No function specified
specified No function specified
ne menu on
t panel No function specified
ecognition Enable voice recognition
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 87 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Radio navigation system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 54 Controls on the steering wheel
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX
Volume up Volume up Volume
Volume down Volume down Volume
Search for next station Next track
Hold down: Fast forward No function
Search for last station Last track
Hold down:Rewind No function
Access telephone menu on instrument
panel
Access telephone menu on instrument
panel
Access telepho
instrumen
Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice r
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
Steering wheel controls*88
pecified Operates on instrument panel
pecified Operates on instrument panel
instrument
l No function specified
instrument
l No function specified
ument panel Operates on instrument panel
ument panel Operates on instrument panel
Fig. 57 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 88 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls
Next preset a) Next track a) No function s
Previous preset a) Previous track a) No function s
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on
pane
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on
pane
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr
a) Only if the instrument panel is in Audio menu.
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
Fig. 56 Controls on the steering wheel
Steering wheel controls* 89
Safety Fir Technical Data
AVIGATOR TELEPHONE
olume up Volume up
lume down Volume down
ction specified No function specified
ction specified No function specified
ction specified
Make call
Accept incoming call
End call
Hold down: reject incoming
call
voice recogni-
tion Enable voice recognition
ates on instru-
ent panel
Movement on telephone
menu
Address book / Last calls /
Calls received / Missed calls
ates on instru-
ent panel
Movement on telephone
menu
Address book / Last calls /
Calls received / Missed calls
ction specified Change menu on instrument
panel
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 89 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX N
Volume up Volume up Volume up V
Volume down Volume down Volume down Vo
Search for next station Next track
Hold down: Fast forward No function specified No fun
Search for last station Last track
Hold down:Rewind No function specified No fun
Access telephone menu on
instrument panel
Access telephone menu on
instrument panel
Access telephone menu
on instrument panel No fun
Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable
Next preset a) Next track a) No function specified Oper
m
Previous preset a) Previous track a) No function specified Oper
m
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instru-
ment panel No fun
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AI
Steering wheel controls*90
tion specified Change menu on instrument
panel
tes on instru-
ent panel Confirm
tes on instru-
ent panel
Return to MULTIFUNCTION
DISPLAY menu
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 90 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instru-
ment panel No func
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument
panel
Opera
m
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument
panel
Opera
m
a) Only if the instrument panel is in Audio menu.
AJ
AK
AL
Unlocking and locking 91
Safety Fir Technical Data
98, fig. 63 on the remote control to lock all
turn the key in the door to lock all doors and the
isabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- to leave the vehicle and not manage on their
lay in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle ly high and low temperatures, depending on g serious injuries/illness. It could even have d lock both the tailgate and all the other doors
vehicle.
with you when you leave the vehicle. Misuse children, may result in serious damage and
entally be started and be out of control.
hed on, the electric equipment could be acti- for example, in the electric windows.
ed using the remote control key. This could t in an emergency situation.
ith you when you leave the vehicle.
m the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The y engage, and you would not be able to steer
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 91 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Unlocking and locking
Central locking
Basic functions
The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all
doors with just pushing on the keybutton.
Description
Central locking can be activated by using any of the following options:
the key, by inserting it into the driver’s door cylinder and rotating it manu-
ally,
the central locking button in the passenger compartment as an electronic
control page 94,
the radio frequency remote control, using the buttons on the key
page 98.
Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:
Locking system Safe
Selective unlocking system*
Automatic speed-dependent locking and unlocking system*
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking
Emergency unlocking system
Unlocking the vehicle*
Press button page 98, fig. 63 on remote control to unlock all the
doors and tailgate.
Locking the vehicle*
Press button page
doors and the tailgate or
tailgate.
WARNING
Never leave children or d gency, they may not be able own.
Never allow children to p can be subjected to extreme the time of year, thus causin fatal consequences. Close an when you are not using the
Always take you car keys of the keys, for example, by accident.
The engine may accid
If the ignition is switc vated with risk of injury,
The doors can be lock make assistance difficul
Always take the key w
Never remove the key fro steering lock could suddenl the vehicle.
Unlocking and locking92
en the vehicle is locked
button on the remote control within
le is locked without activating the dead-
arning lamp flashes for approx. two
out. After approx. 30 seconds it starts
d opened from the inside if the «safe» deadlock
ill have to pull the door release lever once.
ff, the antitheft alarm* page 100 remains
nitoring system* and the anti-tow system are
vehicle if the anti-tow system deadlock mech- is not possible to open the doors from the ake it more difficult to assist vehicle occu- ent. People could become trapped inside in an
tem*
lock either just the driver’s door or all
s the unlock button on the remote once. The
le is deactivated, only the driver’s door is
and the light indicator are also turned off.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 92 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Note While the driver’s door is open, the vehicle can not be locked with the
remote control. This avoids the user from forgetting his key inside the vehicle.
If the driver’s door is unlocked with the key shaft, only the driver’s door is
unlocked, the rest of the doors remain locked. When the ignition is switched
on, the door «safe» deadlock is deactivated (although the doors remain
locked) and the central locking button is activated. See page 100.
If the central locking or anti-theft alarm are faulty, the driver’s door
warning lamp remains lit for approx. 30 seconds after locking the vehicle.
For anti-theft security, only the driver’s door is fitted with a lock cylinder.
Safety system Safe*
The «safe» deadlock makes it more difficult to break into the
vehicle because the door release lever and the central locking
button are not active (depending upon country).
Activating deadlock
Press once the locking button on the remote control or
Turn the key once in the driver’s door lock to lock. A warning lamp
in the driver door flashes to indicate the «safe» deadlock is
working. The warning lamp flashes for approx. two seconds at
short intervals and then more slowly.
Deactivating deadlock wh
Press twice the locking
two seconds. The vehic
lock. The driver’s door w
seconds and then goes
flashing again.
The doors can be unlocked an
has not been activated. You w
When the «safe» deadlock is o
active. The vehicle interior mo
deactivated*.
WARNING
Nobody should remain in the anism has been activated. It inside. Locked doors could m pants in the event of an accid emergency.
Selective unlocking sys
This system allows to un
the vehicle.
Using the remote control, pres
Safe system for all the vehic
unlocked and both the alarm
Unlocking and locking 93
Safety Fir Technical Data
oluntary unlocking*
and prevents the unintentional
.
any of the doors (including the tailgate) are
gets re-locked automatically. This function
aining unlocked if the unlock button is pressed
ystem
uring an accident, the vehicle gets unlocked,
ible to lock the vehicle from inside with the
the ignition off and back on again.
rom the outside, see Emergency locking of the
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 93 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Unlocking all doors and the boot
The unlock button on the remote must be pressed twice so that all doors
and the boot can be opened.
Press twice within 2 seconds to deactivate the Safe system for all vehicle,
to unlock all doors and to use the boot. The indicator and the alarm (only vehi-
cles fitted with one) are turned off.
Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*
This is a safety system which prevent the access to the vehicle
from the outside when it is running (for example, when
stopped at a traffic light).
Locking
The doors and the boot are automatically locked when vehicle speed exceeds
15 km/h.
If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened, when the vehicle
moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h, the unlocked door(s) will
be locked once more.
Unlocking
The driver’s door automatically unlocks when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Each door can be unlocked and opened independently from the inside (for
example, when a passenger gets out of it). To do it, simply operate the lever
inside the door.
WARNING
The door handles must not be operated when the vehicle is running: the door would open.
Locking system for inv
It is an anti-theft system
unlocking of the vehicle
If the vehicle is unlocked and
opened within 30 seconds, it
prevents the vehicle from rem
by mistake.
Emergency unlocking s
If the airbags are triggered d
except for the boot. It is poss
central locking, after turning
If the doors must be locked f
doors.
Unlocking and locking94
er door cannot be locked if any of the vehicle
open. This avoids the user from forgetting his
central locking will deactivate the central
. Once this time has passed, the button may be
g the key inside the vehicle if the vehicle is
utton when the driver’s door is closed and any
ing any of the rear doors, the vehicle locks and
parately from inside the car. Do this by pulling
ildren and disabled people may be trapped
n is not operative in the following cases:
d from the outside (by the remote or the key).
ctivated after unlocking the door lock cylinder
ton .
on .
Manual personalisation
rn the key to unlock for approx. 3 s.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 94 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Central locking button
The central locking button allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle from the inside.
Locking the vehicle
Press the button .
Unlocking the doors
Press button .
The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.
Except when the «safe» security system is activated.
Please note the following if you lock your vehicle with the central locking
button:
Safety reasons make not be possible to open the doors or the tailgate
from the outside (for instance, when stopped at a traffic light).
The driver or front passeng
doors (except the tailgate) are
key inside the vehicle.
Repeated operation of the
locking button for 30 seconds
used once more.
There is a danger of leavin
locked by the central locking b
of the rear doors open. On clos
the keys remain inside it.
All doors can be locked se
the door release lever once.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked, ch inside it.
The central locking butto
When the vehicle is locke
While the ignition is not a with the key.
Note Vehicle locked, amber but
Vehicle unlocked, red butt
Unlocking and locking —
Activating selective unlocking
With the driver’s door open, tu
Fig. 58 Detail of the centre console: central locking system button
Unlocking and locking 95
Safety Fir Technical Data
nually
cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for
nti-clockwise for the right hand side door.
ed it can no longer be opened from the outside.
of the remaining doors
e cap fig. 59 printed with a lock image.
ment with a groove in the centre. Insert the key
element clockwise for the right hand side doors
hand side doors.
e door. Once the door has been closed it can no
utside.
rgency) locked driver’s door
k cylinder and rotate anti-clockwise for the left
se for the right hand side doors.
the door may be opened using the exterior door
ually (emergency) locked doors
e unlocked to gain entry to the vehicle. Operate
he required door. If the child safety lock is acti-
n the interior door release lever is operated the
t open. The exterior door handle may now be
u wish to lock it manually (emergency locking),
ns.
AA
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 95 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Deactivating selective unlocking
With the driver’s door open, turn the key to lock for approx. 3 s.
The indicator lamps flash to confirm activation or deactivation.
Activation of automatic locking
Press the lock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.
Deactivation of automatic locking
Press the unlock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.
The lock button lamp flashes to confirm activation or deactivation.
Emergency manual locking
This permits mechanical locking of the doors in case of
central locking system failure.
Locking the driver’s door ma
Insert the key in the door lock
the left hand side door and a
Once the door has been clos
Manual (emergency) locking
Open the door and remove th
This will expose a circular ele
into the groove and rotate the
and anticlockwise for the left
Replace the cap and close th
longer be opened from the o
Unlocking the manually (eme
Insert the key in the door loc
hand side doors and clockwi
The door lock is released and
handle.
Unlocking the remaining man
First the driver’s door must b
the internal door handle for t
vated on the rear doors, whe
door is unlocked but does no
used to open the door.
Note Once the vehicle is open, if yo
repeat the previous instructio
Fig. 59 Locking the doors manually
Unlocking and locking96
nt of the vehicle electronic opening and
fects rear doors. It can only be activated
, as described below:
ock
n the door in which you wish to activate
ate the groove in the door using the igni-
he left hand side doors, and anti-clock-
side doors fig. 60 fig. 61.
f lock
the door whose childproof lock you want
ate the groove in the door using the igni-
he right hand side doors, and anti-clock-
ide doors fig. 60 fig. 61.
tivated, the door can only be opened from the
n be activated and deactivated by inserting the
or is open, as described above.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 96 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Childproof lock
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being
opened from the inside. This system prevents minors from
opening a door accidentally while the vehicle is running.
This function is independe
locking systems. It only af
and deactivated manually
Activating the childproof l
Unlock the car and ope
the childproof lock.
With the door open, rot
tion key, clockwise for t
wise for the right hand
Deactivating the childproo
Unlock the car and open
to deactivate.
With the door open, rot
tion key, clockwise for t
wise for the left hand s
Once the childproof lock is ac
outside. The childproof lock ca
key in the groove when the do
Fig. 60 Child safety lock on the left hand side door
Fig. 61 Child safety lock on the right hand side door
Unlocking and locking 97
Safety Fir Technical Data
the vehicle.
give the plastic key tab to the new owner.
y, take your key tab to an Authorised Service
eys can cause serious injuries.
isabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- to leave the vehicle and not manage on their
e key could start the engine or activate any tric windows), causing risk of accident. The e remote control key. This could make the aid
uation.
ide the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your , damage or theft. Always take the key with you
m the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. ld suddenly block and it would be impossible
nts in the remote control key. Avoid wetting and
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 97 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Keys
Set of keys
The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a
remote control and a plastic key tab with the number of the
key.
The set of keys belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:
one remote control key fig. 62 with folding key bit,
a key without remote control ,
one plastic key tab with the key number.
Plastic key tab
Duplicate keys are only issued with the key number on the key tab fig. 62
. Therefore:
Always keep the key tab in a safe place.
Never leave the key tab in
If you sell the vehicle, please
Duplicate keys
If you need a replacement ke
Centre.
WARNING
An incorrect use of the k
Never leave children or d gency, they may not be able own.
An uncontrolled use of th electric equipment(e.g. elec doors can be locked using th difficult in an emergency sit
Never forget the keys ins vehicle could result in injury when you leave the vehicle.
Never remove the key fro Otherwise, the steering cou to steer the vehicle.
Caution There are electronic compone
hitting the keys
Fig. 62 Set of keys
AA
AB
AC
AB
Unlocking and locking98
row) on the control, the key shaft is released.
g. 63 .
63
he button fig. 63 until all indicators
hen the unlocking button is pressed,
e door. Once this time has passed, it will lock
the key fig. 63, will flash.
and the batteries are integrated in the key. The
The maximum scope of the remote control
s. This scope is reduced when the batteries
, is pressed once, the driver’s door is
cked.
twice to unlock all doors.
Fig. 64 Range of the remote control:
A1
A2
A3
A3
A1
A1
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 98 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Radio frequency remote control
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
The remote control key is used to lock and unlock the vehicle
from a distance.
Using the button fig. 63 (ar
Unlocking the vehicle fi
Locking the vehicle fig.
Unlocking the tailgate. Press t
on the vehicle briefly flash. W
you have 2 minutes to open th
once more.
Also, the battery indicator on
The remote control transmitter
receiver is inside the vehicle.
depends on various condition
start to lose power.
Selective unlocking*
When the button fig. 63
unlocked, all others remain lo
Press the button fig. 63
Fig. 63 Assignment of buttons on the remote control key
Unlocking and locking 99
Safety Fir Technical Data
ot flash when the buttons are pushed, the
eries may damage the radio frequency remote
ys replace the dead battery with another of the
nvironment own away in accordance with regulations
he environment.
ote control key
lock or lock the door with the remote
-synchronised.
8, fig. 63 button on the remote control.
using the key bit within one minute.
could no longer be opened and closed with the
is repeatedly pressed outside the radio
ctive scope. The remote control key will have to
e available in your Authorised Service Centres,
to the locking system.
ys can be used.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 99 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
An improper use of the key can cause serious injuries.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their own.
Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. Otherwise, this could result in serious injuries, accidents or even the theft of your vehicle. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equipment(e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The vehicle can be locked when using the remote control key. This could complicate the aid in cas of emergency.
Note The radio-frequency remote control can be programmed by means of
pressing the unlocking button once; as a result, only the driver door will
unlock. When the button is pressed once more, all doors and the tailgate will
be unlocked.
The remote control functions only when you are in range page 98,
fig. 64 (red area).
If the vehicle is unlocked using the button, it will lock again auto-
matically if any of the doors or the tailgate are not opened within 30 seconds
after unlocking it. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked
if the unlock button is pressed by mistake.
If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed using the remote control, the
remote control key will have to be re-synchronised page 99.
Changing the battery
If the battery indicator does n
battery must be replaced.
Caution The use of inappropriate batt
control. For this reason, alwa
same size and power.
For the sake of the e The flat batteries must be thr
governing the protection of t
Synchronising the rem
If it is not possible to un
control, it should be re
Press the page 9
Then close the vehicle
It is possible that the vehicle
remote control if the button
frequency remote control effe
be resynchronised.
Spare remote control keys ar
where they must be matched
Up to eight remote control ke
A1
Unlocking and locking100
the button shown by the (arrow).
door to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm
alarm is not triggered immediately.
in 15 seconds. When the ignition is switched
recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates
you do not switch on the ignition within 15
d.
via the unlocking button of the remote control
the ignition lock.
, access is gained to a second secured zone
er a door has been opened), the warning signal
s active even if the battery is disconnected or
ediately if one of the battery cables is discon-
is active.
nction incorporated in the anti-theft
authorized vehicle entry by means of
ensors, 2 emitters and a receptor.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 100 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description of anti-theft alarm system*
The anti-theft alarm triggers if unauthorised movements are
detected around the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal
it. Audible and visible alarms are triggered if the car is opened using the key,
or if unauthorised access to the vehicle is forced.
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically connected on locking the
vehicle. The system is then primed.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are carried
out when the car is locked:
Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the vehicle key
Opening a door
Opening the bonnet
Opening the tailgate
Switching on the ignition
Movements in the vehicle
Undue manipulation of the alarm
Battery handling
The acoustic signals sound and the indicators flash for approx. 30 seconds.
This may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.
Opening the doors mechanically (emergency opening)
If the remote control function fails, you will have to use the key to unlock the
car. This is done as follows:
Unfold the key by pressing
Use the lock on the driver
system remains active, but an
Switch on the ignition with
on, the electronic immobiliser
the anti-theft alarm system. If
seconds, the alarm is triggere
How to switch the alarm off
When the vehicle is unlocked
or when the key is inserted in
Note If, after the alarm goes off
(e.g. the tailgate is opened aft
is triggered again.
Vehicle monitoring remain
not working for any reason.
The alarm is triggered imm
nected while the alarm system
Volumetric sensor*
Monitoring or control fu
alarm* which detects un
ultrasound.
The system consists of 3 s
Unlocking and locking 101
Safety Fir Technical Data
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 101 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Activation
It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the
vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the button
on the remote control is used.
Deactivation
Press the button on the remote control twice. Only the volu-
metric sensor is deactivated. The alarm system remains acti-
vated.
WARNING
The safe security system remains deactivated if the volumetric sensor is deactivated.
For those vehicles in which a separate sunblind is fitted in the passenger compartment, the alarm will not function correctly due to inter- ference with the sensor.
Note If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indi-
cated by a flashing of the indicator on the driver’s door. This flashing will be
different to that for an activated alarm.
Unlocking and locking102
r and lift the tailgate fig. 65. The tail-
of the two handles on the interior lining
ht movement.
erate depending on the situation of the vehicle.
cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked
erative and the boot may be opened.
tus, press the button or the button on
ument panel if the tailgate is open or not prop-
ng is also given if the tailgate is open when the
h*.
Fig. 66 Detail of the inside of the tailgate: hand grip
A1
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 102 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Tailgate
Unlocking and locking
The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric. It is
activated by using the handle on the tailgate
Opening the tailgate
Pull on the release leve
gate will then open.
Closing the tailgate
Grip the tailgate by one
and close it, using a lig
The system may or may not op
If the tailgate is locked then it
then the opening system is op
To the locking / unlocking sta
the remote control key.
A warning appears in the instr
erly closed.* An audible warni
car is driven faster than 6 km/
Fig. 65 Tailgate: opening from the outside
Unlocking and locking 103
Safety Fir Technical Data
to be opened if the central locking
xample, if the battery is flat)
oot allowing access to the emergency
inside the luggage compartment
groove and unlock the locking system,
ght to left, as shown by the arrow
Fig. 67 Tailgate: emer- gency open
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 103 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.
The tailgate must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the lighting units.
Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unex- pectedly while driving.
If the tailgate is not fully closed, open it with the handle and close it again correctly. Do not try to close it by pressing on the surface of the tail- gate, as this may damage the surface.
Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle.
Closing the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the tailgate.
Never drive with the tailgate open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
If you only open the tailgate, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle will not be opened if the key is left inside.
Emergency opening
This allows the vehicle
does not operate (for e
There is a groove in the b
opening mechanism.
Opening the tailgate from
Insert the key bit in the
turning the key from ri
fig. 67.
Unlocking and locking104
t left door
t right door
ting the electric window buttons in the rear
left door
right door
‘s door can be used to disable the electric
ors.
ttons on rear doors are activated.
s on rear doors are deactivated.
ric windows can result in injury.
ithout observing and ensuring it is clear, to do s injury to you and third parties. Make sure window.
ey with you when you leave the vehicle.
sabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if An uncontrolled use of the key could start the ic equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing n be locked using the remote control key. This n an emergency situation.
work until the key has been removed from the doors has been opened.
ty switch to disable the rear electric windows. en disabled.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 104 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Windows
Opening or closing the windows electrically
The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using
the controls on the driver’s door.
Opening and closing the windows
Press the button to open a window.
Pull button to close a window .
Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended
.
You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off
the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been
opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.
Buttons on the driver’s door
Button for window in fron
Button for window in fron
Buttons for rear windows*
Safety switch for deactiva
doors
Button for window in rear
Button for window in rear
Safety switch *
Safety switch on the driver
window buttons in the rear do
Safety switch not pressed: bu
Safety switch pressed: button
WARNING
Incorrect use of the elect
Never close the tailgate w otherwise could cause seriou that no one is in the path of a
Always take the vehicle k
Never leave children or di they have access to the keys. engine or activate any electr risk of accident. The doors ca could make the aid difficult i
The electric windows will ignition and one of the front
If necessary, use the safe Make sure that they have be
Fig. 68 Detail of driver door: controls for the front and rear windows
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A3
Unlocking and locking 105
Safety Fir Technical Data
ork when the ignition has been switched off,
on.
e function will not work if the battery has been
if the battery is flat. The function then has to be
oll-back function will not work if there is a
ndows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
ll-back function. This reduces the risk
dows are closing.
when closing automatically, the window stops
ediately .
mediately (within 10 seconds) why the window
tempting to close it again. After 10 seconds the
sumes.
ructed, the window will stop at this point.
on why the window cannot be closed, try to
nds.
seconds, the window will open fully when you
ne-touch closing is reactivated.
oll-back function will not work if there is a
ndows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
tric windows can result in injury.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 105 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Note If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc-
tion, the window will automatically open again page 105. If this happens,
check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it
again.
One-touch opening and closing
One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to
hold down the button.
One-touch closing
Pull up the window button briefly up to the second position. The
window closes fully.
One-touch opening
Push down the window button briefly up to the second position.
The window opens fully.
Restoring one-touch opening and closing
Close all windows.
Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in
the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function
is now ready for operation.
The buttons page 104, fig. 68 and have two levels for opening the
window and two for closing it. This makes it easier to open and close windows
to the desired position.
One-touch closing does not w
even if the key is in the igniti
The automatic open and clos
temporarily disconnected, or
reactivated.
The one-touch function and r
malfunction in the electric wi
Roll-back function
The windows have a ro
of injuries when the win
If a window is obstructed
at this point and lowers imm
If this happens, check im
could not be closed before at
normal automatic function re
If the window is still obst
If there is no obvious reas
close it again within five seco
If you wait longer than 5 — 10
operate one of the buttons. O
The one-touch function and r
malfunction in the electric wi
WARNING
Incorrect use of the elec
A1 A2
Unlocking and locking106
the remote control for about 3 seconds.
tion electrically will be either opened or
to interrupt the function.
ompletely closed, the indicators will
f*
e sliding/tilting roof
of is opened and closed using the
ignition is switched on.
Fig. 69 Roof lining description: rotary sun roof control / deflector
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 106 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left alone inside the vehicle.
The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.
Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.
Note The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the
outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing
page 106.
Convenience opening and closing*
Using the door lock
Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the
locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either
opened or closed.
Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
Push the lock button on
All windows which func
closed.
Press the unlock button
Once the windows are c
flash.
Sliding/tilting roo
Opening and closing th
The sliding/tilting sunro
rotary button when the
WARNING (continued)
Unlocking and locking 107
Safety Fir Technical Data
isabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if s. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric of accident! The doors can be locked using the ld make the aid difficult in an emergency situ-
of continues to function until one of the front removed from the ignition.
or lock of the driver’s door in the locking
ng/tilting sunroof is closed.
rrupt this function.
n the remote control for about 3 seconds.
roof is closed.
tton to interrupt the function.
g sunroof has closed completely, the indi-
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 107 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position fig. 69 .
Opening/tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position . The sunroof opens to the
convenience position where wind noise is reduced.
To open the roof further, turn the switch to position and hold
the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired
position.
Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position .
Always close the sliding/tilting roof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it
unattended .
The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about ten minutes after
the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front
passenger door are not opened.
Sunroof blind
The sunroof blind is opened together with the sliding/tilting roof. If required,
it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.
Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.
Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Never leave children or d they have access to the key the engine is started or that sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk remote control key. This cou ation.
The sliding/tilting sunro doors is opened and the key
Convenience closing*
Using the door lock
Hold the key in the do
position until the slidi
Release the key to inte
Using the remote control
Push the lock button o
The sliding/tilting sun
Release the unlock bu
When the sliding/tiltin
cators flash once.
AA
AB
AC
AD
WARNING (continued)
Unlocking and locking108
oll-back function which prevents larger objects
is closed. The roll-back function does not
d against the roof opening. The sliding/tilting
n immediately if it is obstructed when closing.
een opened again by the roll-back function, it
g the rotary button at the front in position
ing roof has closed fully. Please note that the t the roll-back function.
eakdown
nroof can be closed manually.
y inserting a screwdriver in the rear section.
cover fastening, insert it in the opening as far
the spring) and close the sliding roof.
tion.
Fig. 71 Emergency closing handle
AA
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 108 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Note The sliding/tilting sunroof rotary button remains in the last position selected
if the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle and
will have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.
Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting roof*
The sliding/tilting roof has a r
getting trapped when the roof
prevent fingers getting pinche
sunroof stops and opens agai
If the sliding/tilting roof has b
can be closed only by pressin
fig. 70 until the sliding/tilt
sunroof will now close withou
Operation in the event of a br
In case of a breakdown, the su
Remove the plastic cover b
Remove the lever from the
as possible (pushing against
Fit the lever back into posi
Fig. 70 Roof lining description: rotary sun roof control / deflector
Lights and visibility 109
Safety Fir Technical Data
ts*
osition or to the first stop. The
switch lights up.
lights (vehicles with front fog lights)
osition or to the second stop
lights up in the control panel.
lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)
m position to the last stop. A warning
nstrument panel.
e lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights are ate the road ahead and to ensure that other u. Always use your dipped headlights if it is
hts will only work with the ignition on. The side
when the ignition is turned off.
r the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
driver door remains open. This is a reminder to
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 109 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Lights and visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Switching on the side lights
Turn the light switch fig. 72 to position .
Switching on dipped headlights
Turn the light switch to position .
Switching off the lights
Turn the light switch to position 0.
Switching on the fog ligh
Pull the switch out of p
symbol in the light
Switching on the rear fog
Pull the switch out of p
. A warning lamp
Switching on the rear fog
Pull the light switch fro
lamp lights up in the i
WARNING
Never drive with just the sid not bright enough to illumin road users are able to see yo dark or if visibility is poor.
Note The dipped beam headlig
lights come on automatically
If the lights are left on afte
a buzzer will sound while the
switch the lights off.
Fig. 72 Detailed view of instrument panel: lights, fog light and rear fog light control
Lights and visibility110
0.
is switched on, dipped headlights are automat-
ensitive sensor if you drive into a tunnel, for
es on the dipped headlights when the vehicle
a few seconds and it switches the lights off
ess than 65 km/h for a few minutes.
e dipped headlights when the windscreen
ontinuously for a few seconds and it switches
uous or intermittent wipe is switched off for
ght control is connected but the dipped lights
lights up on the light control fig. 73. If the
the dipped lights, the instrument and control
trol is switched on, the headlights will not be ain. Therefore, the dipped beam must be
automatic headlight system, when the key is
acoustic signal will only sound if the light
r if the vehicle is not fitted with the coming
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 110 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You
should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.
If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with
a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the car will automatically
be switched off.
The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
Depending on weather conditions (very cold or wet), the front and rear
lights and the indicators may be temporarily misted. This has no influence on
the life expectancy of the lighting system. The lights will soon demist when
they are switched on.
Automatic lighting*
Activation
Rotate the switch to the position Auto, this indication will light
up.
Deactivation
Turn the light switch to
Automatic lighting
If automatic headlight control
ically switched on by a light-s
example.
The motorway function switch
is driven at over 140 km/h for
when the vehicle is driven at l
The rain sensor switches on th
wipers have been operating c
the lights off when the contin
some minutes page 123.
When the automatic dipped li
are off, the warning lamp automatic control switches on
lighting is also switched on.
WARNING
If automatic headlight con switched on in fog or heavy r switched on manually.
Note For those vehicles with the
removed from the ignition, the
control is in the position o
home function.
Fig. 73 Automatic lighting
Lights and visibility 111
Safety Fir Technical Data
ps)
ad safety in vehicles fitted with bi-xenon lamps.
tely to the headlights and are switched on each
if the light setting is in position 0 or .
ed light in combination with the daytime s)
the daytime lighting are activated at the same
he instrument panel lighting will automatically
entering a tunnel) and the daytime lights will go
ed light control switches off the dipped lights
nel), the daytime lights come back on.
aytime lights*
ts* combined with bi-xenon headlamps, these
activated with the indicator and main beam
lights combined with halogen lamps, this func-
deactivated in a specialist workshop.
bi-xenon lamps)
f, move the indicator and main beam lever
tor and headlamp flash).
econds. The daytime lights are deactivated and
-xenon lamps)
f, move the indicator and main beam lever
tor and headlamp flash).
conds. The daytime lights are activated and can
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 111 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
If the daylight driving automatic light function is switched on, the fog
lights or rear fog light cannot be switched on in addition.
The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system.
To avoid damage to the tail lights, the lights mounted on the tailgate go
off when the tailgate is opened (according to country).
Daytime lights*
The daytime light reduces the risk of accidents by increasing
the visibility of the vehicle. The daytime running lights are
enabled automatically when the ignition is switched on. It is
automatically switched off when the side lights are turned on.
Daytime lights (halogen lamps)18)
The daytime lights increase road safety in vehicles fitted with halogen lamps.
These include the dipped, side and registration plate lights.
The daytime lights are switched on each time the ignition is turned on if the
light setting is in position 0 or . Depending upon the model, a control
lamp on the light control switch or the lighting up of the instrument panel
will indicate that the daytime lighting is on.
It is not possible for the driver to switch the daytime lights on or off. Please
contact a qualified workshop if you wish to deactivate the lights.
Daytime lights (bi-xenon lam
The daytime lights increase ro
The lights are built-in separa
time the ignition is turned on
Automatic control of the dipp lighting (bi-xenon headlamp
If the dipped light control and
time, the dipped lights and t
come on as required (e.g. on
off. When the automatic dipp
(e.g. on coming out of the tun
Activating/deactivating the d
In vehicles with daytime ligh
lights may be activated or de
lever. In vehicles with daytime
tion can only be activated or
Deactivating daytime lights (
With the ignition switched of
upwards and back (left indica
Switch on the ignition for 3 s
can not be switched on.
Activating daytime lights (bi
With the ignition switched of
upwards and back (left indica
Switch on the ignition for 3 se
be switched on.
18) It is only available in some countries or as an optional extra
Lights and visibility112
ion and
darkness.
itches off in the following cases:
elay in switching off the headlamps has ended
in.
to position .
on.
itching off the headlamps in the Coming Home
n be changed or the function can be connected
ights and visibility page 72.
ed while the lights are on, and the lights are
s door opened, no acoustic signal is heard, as
ion is on, the lights are automatically switched
pt when the light switch is in position or
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 112 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Note Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your
country.
Coming home / leaving home function*
The Coming Home function is controlled manually. The
Leaving Home function is controlled with a photo sensor.
If the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is connected, the front side
and dipped lights, the tail lights and the registration plate light will light up
to provide assistance.
Coming home function
The Coming Home function is activated by switching off the ignition and
briefly flashing the lights. When the driver’s door is opened, the Coming
Home lighting comes on. If the driver’s door is already open when the lights
are flashed briefly, the Coming Home lighting comes on immediately.
When the last door of the vehicle or the tailgate is closed, the Coming Home
function starts and the switching off the headlights is delayed.
The Coming Home lighting switches off in the following cases:
On completion of the time period established for the delay in switching off
the lights after all the vehicle doors and the tailgate have been closed.
If, 30 seconds after being connected, any doors or the tailgate remain
open.
If the light switch is turned to position .
If the ignition is switched on.
Leaving home function
The Leaving Home function is activated when the vehicle is unlocked if:
the light control is in posit
the photosensor detects
The Leaving Home lighting sw
If the time period for the d
If the vehicle is locked aga
If the light switch is turned
If the ignition is switched
Note The setting for the delay in sw
and Leaving Home function ca
or disconnected in the menu L
If the ignition key is remov
flashed briefly and the driver’
when the Coming Home funct
off after a period of time (exce
.
Lights and visibility 113
Safety Fir Technical Data
trol
amps (xenon lamps) are equipped with
trol. This means that the headlights will be
l of the vehicle and nodding movements when
tomatically compensated for.
amps do not have headlight range control.
hts*
ends, the headlights will light the
f the road.
y operate if the vehicle is travelling at more than
dlamps are on. When taking a bend, the road is
ional gas discharge lamps than with conven-
Fig. 75 Cornering lighting using self-direc- tional headlights
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 113 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control
Instrument and switch lighting
When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and
switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the
thumb wheel fig. 74 .
Those vehicles fitted with xenon gas discharge headlights are fitted with an
automatic headlight range system.
Headlight range control
By using the electrical headlight range control, you can adjust the head-
light range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. This way, it is
possible to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic more than necessary. At the same
time, by using the correct headlight settings, the driver has the best possible
lighting for the road ahead.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.
To lower the beam, turn the thumb wheel down from the basic setting 0.
Dynamic headlight range con
Vehicles with gas discharge l dynamic headlight range con adjusted to suit the load leve
pulling off and braking are au
Vehicles with gas discharge l
Self directional headlig
When driving around b
most important areas o
Dynamic curve lights (AFS)
The dynamic curve lights onl
10 km/h and the dipped hea
illuminated better with direct
tional fixed headlamps.
Fig. 74 Instrument panel: regulation for instrument and switch illumination and headlight range control
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
Lights and visibility114
t control is switched on, the dipped head- in fog. They should be switched on manually
river is personally responsible for the correct . Automatic headlight control is merely a Where necessary, switch on the lights manu-
ts are used to draw the attention of
r vehicle in emergencies.
n:
afe distance from moving traffic.
Fig. 76 Instrument panel: switch for hazard warning lights
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 114 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
A fault in the system is indicated via the flashing of the control lamp on the
instrument panel. At the same time, a text message with information or
instructions to perform necessary operations may appear on the instrument
panel display. Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have the fault
repaired.
If the control lamp lights up on the instrument panel but all the lamps are
operating correctly page 253, there may still be a fault in the dynamic
curve lighting system (AFS). Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and
have the fault repaired.
WARNING
If the automatic dipped light control is switched on, the dipped head- lights will not be switched on in fog. They should be switched on manually using the light switch. The driver is personally responsible for the correct use of lights in all situations. Automatic headlight control is merely a system to support the driver. Where necessary, switch on the lights manu- ally using the light switch.
Turning light*
When the indicator is switched on to turn or on very tight bends, the right or
left fog lamp automatically comes on to function as a turning light. The
turning light only operates if the dipped lights are on.
WARNING
If the automatic dipped ligh lights will not be switched on using the light switch. The d use of lights in all situations system to support the driver. ally using the light switch.
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning ligh
other road users to you
If your vehicle breaks dow
1. Park your vehicle at a s
Lights and visibility 115
Safety Fir Technical Data
creases if your vehicle breaks down. Always ts and a warning triangle to draw the attention tationary vehicle.
talytic converter could come into contact with r the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt !
if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long
witched off.
ning lights described here is subject to the rele-
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 115 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights .
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear, and for an automatic
move the selector lever to P.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users
to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for
instance when:
reaching the tail end of a traffic jam,
there is an emergency
your vehicle breaks down due to a technical fault,
you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are
switched on. That is that the two turn signal indicator lamps and the
indicator lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The hazard
warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.
Emergency braking function
When the vehicle detects sudden braking, the hazard warning lights auto-
matically come on to warn vehicles behind. The hazard warning lights go off
when the vehicle accelerates or the hazard warning light switch is pressed.
WARNING
The risk of an accident in use the hazard warning ligh of other road users to your s
Never park where the ca inflammable materials unde petrol. This could start a fire
Note The battery will run down
time, even if the ignition is s
The use of the hazard war
vant statutory requirements.
Lights and visibility116
nd off
position .
page 116, fig. 77 to switch on the
rds you to switch the main beam head-
he steering wheel to operate the
ts
nd remove the key from the lock.
wn to turn the right or left-hand parking
her drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other
when the ignition is switched on. The corre-
flashes in the instrument panel. The warning
n signals are operated, provided a trailer is
ted to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defec-
at double speed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs
does not light up. Change the bulb.
A3
A4
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 116 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Indicator and main beam headlight lever
The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the
parking lights and the headlight flasher.
The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following
functions:
Switching on the turn signals
Move the lever all the way up page 116, fig. 77 to indicate
right, and all the way down to indicate left.
Signalling a lane change
Push the lever up or down to the point where you incur
resistance and then release it. The turn signal will flash several
times. The corresponding warning lamp will also flash.
Switching main beam on a
Turn the light switch to
Press the lever forward
main beams.
Pull the lever back towa
lights off again.
Headlight flashers
Pull the lever towards t
flasher.
Switching on parking ligh
Switch the ignition off a
Move the lever up or do
lights on, respectively.
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle ot main beam headlights or the drivers.
Note The turn signals only work
sponding warning lamp or lamp flashes when the tur
correctly attached and connec
tive, the warning lamp flashes
are damaged, warning lamp
Fig. 77 Indicator and main beam headlight lever
A1
A2
A1 A2
Lights and visibility 117
Safety Fir Technical Data
1
ed to select the following positions:
(not activated). The interior lights are automat-
ehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the
rox. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The inte-
en the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
n .
fig. 78.
Fig. 78 Interior roof trim: front interior lights
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 117 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam
headlights are already on. The warning lamp then comes on in the combi-
instrument.
The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever even if
no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp then comes on in the
combi-instrument.
When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the rear light
on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will only
work if the key is removed from the ignition. If the lights are switched on, a
buzzer gives an audible warning while the driver door is open.
If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the
ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This
is a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless of course you wish to leave
the parking light on.
Interior lights
Front interior light type
The switch fig. 78 is us
Courtesy light position
Rocker switch in flat position
ically switched on when the v
ignition lock And turn off app
rior lights are switched off wh
switched on.
Interior light switched on
Push the switch to the positio
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to position O
AA
Lights and visibility118
n .
page 118, fig. 79.
closed, the interior lights will be switched off
iding the key has been removed and the cour-
his prevents the battery from discharging.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 118 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Front interior light type 2
The switch fig. 79 is used to select the following positions:
Courtesy light position
Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lights are automat-
ically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the
ignition lock And turn off approx. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The inte-
rior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
switched on.
Interior light switched on
Push the switch to the positio
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to position O
Note If not all the vehicle doors are
after approx. 10 minutes, prov
tesy light position selected. T
Fig. 79 Interior roof trim: front interior lights
AA
Lights and visibility 119
Safety Fir Technical Data
off
on to switch the reading light off.
ng lights*
ed to select the following positions:
, the interior and reading lights are switched
t
(left reading light) or to position (right
. The interior lights are automatically switched
ed or the key removed from the ignition lock The
Fig. 82 Interior roof trim: rear interior lights and reading lights.
1
A4
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 119 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Front reading lights
Switching on the reading light
Press the corresponding button fig. 80 and fig. 81 to switch on
the reading light.
Switching the reading lights
Press the corresponding butt
Rear interior and readi
The switch fig. 82 is us
Interior light switched off 0
In switch position fig. 82
off.
Switching on the reading ligh
Turn the switch to position
reading light).
Courtesy light position
Turn the control to position
on when the vehicle is unlock
Fig. 80 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 1
Fig. 81 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 2
AB AB
AC
A
A2
A3
Lights and visibility120
d the front passenger can be pulled out of their
vehicle and turned towards the doors fig. 83
n visors have covers. When you open the cover
p.
ll go out when the vanity mirror cover is pushed
d back up.
ut 10 minutes following the removal of the igni-
ttery from discharging.
r doors are fitted with a sun visor
Fig. 84 Rear door sun visor
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 120 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
light turns off about 20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior lights are
switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.
Interior lights or both reading lights switched on
Turn the control to position .
Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors for the driver an
mountings in the centre of the
The make-up mirrors in the su
, a lamp in the roof lights u
The lamp* in the roof lining wi
back or the sun visor is pushe
Note The roof lamp will turn off abo
tion key. This prevents the ba
Sun visor*
The windows on the rea
A5
Fig. 83 Sun visor on the driver side
A1
A2
Lights and visibility 121
Safety Fir Technical Data
osition .
the left or right to set the length of the
e left: long intervals; control to the right:
per interval stages can be set using switch
osition .
osition .
position to give the windscreen a brief
art to move faster if you keep the lever
er than 2 seconds.
system
he steering wheel — Position . The wash
ediately and the wipers will start with a
and wiper systems will function at the
f over 120 km/h.
ipers will keep running for approximately
in the wiper blade* area
ome versions, there is the possibility of heating
the windscreen wiper blades in order to aid de-
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 121 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Sun visors on the rear side windows*
Pull out the visor and hook it onto the hooks at the top of the door
frame fig. 84.
Windscreen wipers
Front windscreen wipers
The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers
and the automatic wash and wipe.
The windscreen wiper lever fig. 85 has the following positions:
Switching off the wipers
Move the lever to position .
Intermittent wipe
Move the lever up to p
Move the control to
intervals. Control to th
short intervals. Four wi
.
Slow wipe
Move the lever up to p
Continuous wipe
Move the lever up to p
Brief wipe
Move the lever down to
wipe. The wiper will st
pressed down for long
Wash and wipe automatic
Pull the lever towards t
function will start imm
slight delay. The wash
same time at speeds o
Release the lever. The w
four seconds.
Optional heated windscreen
In some countries and with s
the windscreen in the area of
Fig. 85 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever
A0
AA
AA
Lights and visibility122
again, you have to turn the ignition off and
pe function is on, the intervals are directly
s way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter
way any obstacles that are on the windscreen.
he obstacle blocks its path. Remove the
back on again.
ts that may be trapped in the side areas of the
wiper arms to the service position (horizontal).
ted jets is controlled automatically when the
ding upon the outside temperature.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 122 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
icing in the zone. The function is switched on by pressing the rear heating
window key .
WARNING
Worn and dirty wiper blades obstruct visibility and reduce safety levels.
In cold conditions, you should not use the wash / wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the road.
Always note the corresponding warnings on page 223, Changing windscreen wiper blades.
Caution In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wipers
when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could damage both
the wiper blades and the wiper motor.
Note The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on.
In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will only
work when the ignition is on and the bonnet closed.
When in use, the wipers do not go as far as the rest position. When the
lever is moved to position 0, they are totally hidden.
The next speed down will automatically be selected if speed page 121,
fig. 85 or is selected when the vehicle stops. The set speed will be
resumed when the vehicle starts again
The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds once
the automatic wipe/wash system has been operated, provided the vehicle
is in transit (drip function). If you activate the wipers less than three secionds
after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without the last wipe.
For the drip function to work
then on again.
When the intermittent wi
proportional to the speed. Thi
the intervals.
The wiper will try to wipe a
The wiper will stop moving if t
obstacle and switch the wiper
Before removing any objec
windscreen, always move the
The heat output of the hea
ignition is switched on, depen
A2 A3
Lights and visibility 123
Safety Fir Technical Data
sor
iper lever into position fig. 87.
the left or right to set the sensitivity of the
the right: highly sensitive. Control to the
interval wipe function. You will have to switch
switch off the ignition. This is done by switching
n off and back on.
windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
ults.
A1
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 123 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen
wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain.
Switching on the rain sen
Move the windscreen w
Move the control to
rain sensor. Control to
left: less sensitive.
The rain sensor is part of the
the rain sensor back on if you
the wiper intermittent functio
Note Do not put stickers on the
cause sensor disruption or fa
Fig. 86 Rain sensor*
Fig. 87 Windscreen wiper lever
AA
Lights and visibility124
en wiper and washer system
ards to position fig. 88. The wash
diately and the wiper will start with a
reen wash system will function as long as
is position.
iper then wipes for approximately 4
tervals again.
asher system stops and the wipers func-
e will obstruct visibility and reduce safety.
nding warnings on page 223, Changing
k that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass
first time. If you switch on the wiper when the
ass, this could damage both the wiper blade
only function when the ignition is switched on
indscreen wipers switched on, the rear wind-
pe.
A7
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 124 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Rear window wiper
The windscreen wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper
and the wash and wipe system for the rear window.
Switching on the interval wipe
Press the lever forwards to position fig. 88. The wiper will
wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.
Switching off the interval wipe function
Pull the lever back from position towards the steering wheel.
The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you switch
off whilst the wipers are in motion.
Switching on the windscre
Press the lever fully forw
function will start imme
slight delay. The windsc
you hold the lever in th
Release the lever. The w
seconds, and then in in
Release the lever. The w
tion.
WARNING
A worn or dirty wiper blad
Always note the correspo windscreen wiper blades.
Caution In icy conditions, always chec
before using the wiper for the
wiper blade is frozen to the gl
and the wiper motor.
Note The windscreen wiper will
and the tailgate is closed.
In reverse gear, with the w
screen wiper will make one wi
Fig. 88 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever: rear window wiper
A6
A6
Lights and visibility 125
Safety Fir Technical Data
interior mirror*
zle function can be switched on and off
function
. 89. Warning lamp goes out:
function
. 89. Warning lamp is lit.
tivated every time the ignition is switched on.
ts up in the mirror housing.
is activated the interior mirror will darken auto- ount of light it receives (for example from the
d). The anti-dazzle function is cancelled if
Fig. 89 Automatic anti- dazzle interior mirror.
AB
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 125 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Headlight washer system
The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.
The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen
washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering
wheel for at least 1.5 seconds provided the dipped headlights or main
beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the head-
lights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.
Note
To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the
nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer
spray.
To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to
time, the headlight wipers will be activated every three cycles.
Mirrors
Interior mirror
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the
rear window.
Manual anti-dazzle function for interior mirror
In the basic mirror position, the lever at the bottom edge of the mirror should
be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function.
Automatic anti-dazzle
The automatic anti-daz
as desired.
Switching off anti-dazzle
Press button fig
Switching on anti-dazzle
Press button fig
Anti-dazzle function
The anti-dazzle function is ac
The green indicator lamp ligh
When the anti-dazzle function
matically according to the am
headlights of a vehicle behin
reverse gear is engaged.
AA
AA
Lights and visibility126
position the mirror so that you have a
f the vehicle.
(right exterior mirror).
to position the mirror so that you have a
f the car .
rs*
to the central position fig. 90 so
w mirrors warm up and the heated wind-
de rest area is activated page 121.
is not activated in temperatures above
*
90 to position to fold in the exterior
ays fold in the exterior mirrors if you are
matic car wash. This will help prevent
ith convenience control*
ror will fold back automatically with
ith the remote or the key)
the door and use the contact.
ck out to the extended position*
r position to fold the exterior mirrors back
A1
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 126 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Note The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun
blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects
preventing light from reaching the interior mirror.
If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in
front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from
working well or even from working at all.
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in
the centre console.
Basic setting of exterior mirrors
1. Turn knob fig. 90 to position L (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to
good view to the rear o
3. Turn knob to position R
4. Swivel the rotary knob
good view to the rear o
Heating the exterior mirro
Turn the knob forwards
that the heated rear vie
screen* in the wiper bla
The wing mirror heating
approximately 20C.
Folding in exterior mirrors
Turn the control fig.
mirrors. You should alw
driving through an auto
damage.
Folding rear view mirrors w
The outer rear view mir
convenience closing (w
To unfold it again, open
Folding exterior mirrors ba
Turn the knob to anothe
out .
Fig. 90 Controls of exte- rior mirrors
Lights and visibility 127
Safety Fir Technical Data
be adjusted separately or simultaneously, as
unction does not activate with speeds higher
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 127 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Synchronised mirror adjustment
1. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior mirror will
be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).
WARNING
The rear view convex or aspheric mirror increase the field of vision however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
If possible, use the interior mirror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you.
Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!
For the sake of the environment The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer
needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.
Note If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be
adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
In vehicles with electric wing mirrors, the following points should be
observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. a knock while manoeuvring), the
adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be
completely folded electrically. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as
this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.
The rear view mirrors can
described before.
The wing mirrors folding f
than 40km/h.
Seats and stowage128
the foot well when the vehicle is moving; panel, out of the window or on the seat. This . An incorrect sitting position exposes you to
case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect
er and front passenger to keep a distance of ing wheel or instrument panel. Failure to e means that the airbag will not protect you. ce between the driver and the steering wheel er and the dash panel should always be as
passenger seat only when the vehicle is to the forwards/backwards adjustment of the at could move unexpectedly while the vehicle
e the risk of an accident and therefore, injury. our seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting
nts.
to installing a child seat on the front ling a child seat, observe the warning note in .
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 128 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Seats and stowage
The importance of correct seat adjustment
Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection
offered by seat belts and airbags.
Your vehicle has five passenger places, two individual front seats and three
places on the rear seat. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
The driver seat and the front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways to
suit the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat
position is very important for:
a fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,
a relaxed posture which does not cause drowsiness,
safe driving page 7,
and to ensure that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum
protection page 19.
WARNING
If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they may sustain critical injuries.
More people than available seats must never be transported in your vehicle.
Every passenger in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro- priate child restraint system page 45, Child safety.
The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and your passengers with optimum protection.
Always keep your feet on never rest them on the dash is also applied to passengers an increased risk of injury in airbag is triggered, you could sitting position.
It is important for the driv at least 25 cm from the steer respect the minimum distanc Risk of fatal injury. The distan or between the front passeng great as possible.
Adjust the driver or front stationary. This also applies rear seats. Otherwise, your se is moving. This could increas In addition, while adjusting y position. Risk of fatal accide
Special guidelines apply passenger seat. When instal the page 45, Child safety
WARNING (continued)
Seats and stowage 129
Safety Fir Technical Data
int so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
r head and, at minimum, at eye level
2.
page 130
restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.
d restraints could lead to death in the event of
d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.
t always be adjusted according to the
Fig. 92 Side view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 129 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Head restraints
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passengers protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Adjust the head restra
level as the top of your
level as the top of you
fig. 91 and fig. 9
Adjusting the head restraints
WARNING
Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe
Improperly adjusted hea a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte
The head restraints mus passenger’s height.
Fig. 91 Front view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted
Seats and stowage130
aint, press the button and push head
d restraint engages securely in one of its
ats)
t forward or back to the required position.
int
up as far as it will go.
93 (arrow).
of fitting without releasing the button.
t into the guides on the rear backrest.
wn.
nt to suit body size page 14 and
straints have been removed. Risk of injury.
straints are in an unsuitable position, there is
straint, you must always adjust it properly for tection.
warnings page 129, Correct adjustment
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 130 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Removing or adjusting head restraints
The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and
down.
Adjusting height (front seats)
Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head
restraint downwards.
Make sure that it engages securely into position.
Adjusting height (rear seats)
Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
To lower the head restr
restraint downwards.
Make sure that the hea
positions page 14.
Angle adjustment (front se
Press the head restrain
Removing the head restra
Push the head restraint
Press the button fig.
Pull head restraint out
Fitting the head restraint
Insert the head restrain
Push head restraint do
Adjust the head restrai
page 13.
WARNING
Never drive if the head re
Never drive if the head re a risk of serious injury.
After refitting the head re height to achieve optimal pro
Please observe the safety of head restraints.
Fig. 93 Adjusting and removing the head restraints
Seats and stowage 131
Safety Fir Technical Data
t angle
e backrest and turn the hand wheel.
support*
e backrest and turn the hand wheel to
port.
cushioned area is determined by the settings
his supports the natural curvature of the spine
r front passenger seat while the vehicle is in r seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting nts. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat tionary.
ry to the driver and front passenger in case of dent, never drive with the backrest tilted um protection of the seat belt can be achieved in an upright position and the driver and front justed their seat belts. The further the back- he greater the risk of injury due to improper
ecuring the seat height into forwards/back- be caused if the backrest is tilted without due
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 131 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Front seats
Adjustment of the front seats
The control elements in fig. 94 are mirrored for the front right-
hand seat.
Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards
Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards.
Then release the grip and move the seat further until the
catch engages.
Adjusting the seat height*
Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from
its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages.
Adjusting the backres
Take your weight off th
Adjusting the lumbar
Take your weight off th
adjust the lumbar sup
The backrest curvature of the
made in the lumbar region. T
very effectively.
WARNING
Never adjust the driver o motion. While adjusting you position. Risk of fatal accide only when the vehicle is sta
To reduce the risk of inju a sudden braking or an acci towards the rear. The maxim only when the backrests are passenger have properly ad rests are tilted to the rear, t positioning of the belt web!
Exercise caution when s wards position. Injuries can care and attention.
Fig. 94 Front left seat controls
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
Seats and stowage132
icles without Climatronic
mb wheel fig. 95 to switch on the seat
ng is switched off in the 0 position.
icles with Climatronic
ch on the seat heating.
eating at maximum level (level 3).
heating at medium level (level 2).
t seat heating at minimum level (level 1).
ssed four times, the heating goes off and
0).
hen the ignition is switched on. The left thumb
d the right thumb wheel the right seat.
g elements, please do not kneel on the seat or
le point to the seat cushion and backrest.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 132 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Heated seats*
The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electri-
cally.
Front seat heating for veh
Turn the appropriate thu
heating. The seat heati
Front seat heating for veh
Press button to swit
Press once to set seat h
Press twice to set seat
Press three times to se
When the button is pre
the LED goes out (level
The seat heating only works w
wheel controls the left seat an
Caution To avoid damaging the heatin
apply sharp pressure at a sing
Fig. 95 Thumb wheel for the front seat heating
Fig. 96 Front seat heating with Climatronic
AA
Seats and stowage 133
Safety Fir Technical Data
orwards or backwards independently. The
/3 of the seat. There are various possible
unlock the lever in the direction of the
forwards or backwards to the desired
t
e top. Pull the loop on the side of the seat
rection of the arrow and hold the loop in
backrest to the required position and
n the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, your ly while the vehicle is moving. This could
ent and therefore, injury.
s down until the seat is moved, this is to avoid le.
ce moved, is fixed in position.
aximum luggage compartment space, put the
, without moving.
aximum space without putting the seatbacks
d to the desired position.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 133 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Rear seat bench
Seat adjustment
The seats may be moved f
movement can be 1/3 or 2
positions.
Adjusting reach
In the seated position,
arrow fig. 97.
Move the seat cushion
position.
Backrest angle adjustmen
Hold the backrest at th
fig. 98 in the di
this position. Push the
release the loop.
WARNING
Adjust the seat only whe seat could move unexpected increase the risk of an accid
Do not push the seatback damage to the centre conso
Ensure that the seat, on
Note In order to maintain the m
seatbacks in position normal
In order to maintain the m
down, move the seats forwar
Fig. 97 For unlocking the rear seat
Fig. 98 Rear seat back- rest angle adjustment
A1
Seats and stowage134
ckrests down
e of the seat fig. 100 in the direc-
t the seat backrest into position.
backrest has engaged properly in position
on the seats may not, for reasons of safety, be
krest into position ensure that the seat belts
Fig. 100 Folding or opening the front seat backrests
A1
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 134 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Folding the seat backrests down
Pull the loop on the side of the seat fig. 99
In this position the back rest is locked. This is the reason why the loop located
on the side of the seat must be pulled in the direction of the arrow to open the
backrest.
WARNING
You should check that the backrest has engaged properly in position after the loop is released.
The locking system loops on the seats may not, for reasons of safety, be used to secure any items.
Folding the rear seat ba
Pull the loop on the sid
tion of the arrow and lif
WARNING
You should check that the after the loop is released.
The locking system loops used to secure any items.
After locking the seat bac protrude from the seat.
Fig. 99 Folding or opening the rear seat backrests
A1
Seats and stowage 135
Safety Fir Technical Data
t with stowage area
in the armrest.
rea, lift the armrest up in the direction of
nd then lift the cover.
r* or the lower stowage area, pull on the
pressing on the button.
rea, push the armrest down.
ea closed while the vehicle is in motion to the armrest during a sudden braking
f an accident.
Fig. 102 Front armrest with stowage area
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 135 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Stowage compartments
Stowage compartment on the front passenger side
The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever fig. 101.
WARNING
Always keep the stowage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in motion in order to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sudden braking or by an accident.
Centre arm rest at fron
There is a stowage area
To open the stowage a
the arrow fig. 102 a
To access the CD loade
armrest cover without
To close the stowage a
WARNING
Always keep the stowage ar reduce the risk of injury from manoeuvre or in the event o
Fig. 101 Passenger side: stowage compartment
Seats and stowage136
aximum weight of 1.5 kg.
er cover open. There is an injury risk for eased in case of sudden braking or an
to the rear of the front seat backrests.
it up in the direction of the arrow
Fig. 104 Folding table of front left seat
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 136 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Note The CD changer is located in this compartment.
Stowage areas under the front seats*
There is a stowage locker with a cover under each front seat.
The drawer* fig. 103 is opened by pushing the button and putting the
cover back.
There are two open positions of 15 and 60 degrees depending on the pres-
sure applied to the cover. In the 60 degree position, the cover will collapse if
too much pressure is applied.
To close the drawer, press the cover until it locks into position.
WARNING
The drawers will hold a m
Do not drive with the draw passengers if the cargo is rel accident.
Folding table*
Folding tables are fitted
To open the table, open
fig. 104.
Fig. 103 Stowage area under the front seats
AA
Seats and stowage 137
Safety Fir Technical Data
e cover to open these compartments
will then open.
ss it up until it engages.
ea cover closed while the vehicle is in motion uring a sudden braking manoeuvre or in the
prevent any items from being thrown through
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 137 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
The folding tables may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone is seated on the second row of seats. There is a risk on injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre! The table must therefore be closed and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in motion.
Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.
Caution When driving, do not leave open cans in the cup holders. The drink might be
spilt on braking, for example, and could damage the vehicle.
Roof stowage compartment*
There are four stowage compartments in the roof
Press the button on th
fig. 105. The cover
To close the cover, pre
WARNING
Always keep the stowage ar to reduce the risk of injury d event of an accident and to the vehicle interior.
Fig. 105 Roof stowage compartments
Seats and stowage138
rtment floor and fold it back all the way
fig. 107, into the side grooves depending
ts to be transported. The onboard tool kit
e located underneath the luggage
ggage compartment with suitable straps
ed for a maximum load of 50 kg. For heavier
move.
m authorised weight for the vehicle
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 138 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Stowage in the luggage compartment*
There is a variable stowage area* in the luggage compart-
ment floor.
Lift the luggage compa
fig. 106.
Fit the separator on the size of the objec
and the spare wheel ar
compartment.
Secure luggage in the lu
on the fastening rings.
Note The folding table is design
loads fold up the table and re
Do not exceed the maximu
page 273. Fig. 106 Variable floor boot stowage compart- ment
Fig. 107 Variable floor boot stowage compart- ment
AA
Seats and stowage 139
Safety Fir Technical Data
ound:
d rear),
ggage compartment,
in the luggage compartment (only on vehicles
e kit*.
d on the rear roof handles.
ts on the dashboard. These objects could be compartment when the vehicle is moving (e.g. or cornering) and distract the driver. Risk of
n fall from the centre console or other stowage ll while the vehicle is moving. In the event of a you will not be able to use the brake, clutch or .
at hooks must not restrict the driver’s view. ooks are intended only for use with light arti- e any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging udden braking manoeuvres or accidents, espe- deployment, these objects could injure the
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 139 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Luggage compartment retaining net
There is a retaining net in the luggage compartment for
securing objects.
Use the fastening rings located on the side of the luggage
compartment to attach the retaining net fig. 108.
Note The folding table is designed for a maximum load of 50 kg. For heavier
loads fold up the table and remove.
Do not exceed the maximum authorised weight for the vehicle
page 273.
Other stowage areas
Other stowage areas can be f
in the centre console,
in the door trims (front an
in the side trims of the lu
in the spare wheel recess
with an optional anti-punctur
The clothes hooks are locate
WARNING
Do not store loose objec flung through the passenger while accelerating, braking accident.
Ensure that no objects ca areas into the driver foot we sudden braking manoeuvre, accelerator. Risk of accident
Clothing hung on the co Risk of accident. The coat h cles of clothing. Do not leav articles of clothing. During s cially those involving airbag vehicle occupants.
Fig. 108 Retaining net
Seats and stowage140
rest*
Fig. 110 Opening the rear drink holders
Fig. 111 Rear armrest/drink holder
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 140 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Drinks holders at the front
In the centre console, in front of the gear lever, there are two drink holders
fig. 109.
WARNING
Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.
Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), these could cause injury in the case of an accident.
Rear drink holder* / Arm
Fig. 109 Front drink holder
Seats and stowage 141
Safety Fir Technical Data
mpartment
ction of the rear seat back rest, in order to
n of the back rest.
compartment mounting plate
side of the vehicle, through the rear
hould be fitted between the back rest and
seat area.
clips the cushion frame. The rings of the
rtment mounting plate appear at the front
the plate clip, tilt the rear back rest of the
slightly and then lean the back rest back-
ng of the mobile stowage compartment
te easier.
Fig. 113 Mobile stowage compartment mounting plate
AH
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 141 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Opening and closing the armrest* / drink holder*
To open, pull the loop in the direction of the arrow page 140,
fig. 110 .
To close, lift the Drink holder* / armrest* in the direction of the
arrow page 140, fig. 111 .
WARNING
Ensure that the load in the luggage compartment is correctly secured with the retainer net when travelling with the armrest down page 139.
Multi-purpose* mobile stowage compartment — Fitting and removal
This stowage compartment may only be placed in the central
area of the rear seat
Fitting mobile stowage co
Fold down the small se
access the large sectio
Fit the mobile stowage
fig. 113 from the in
section of the seat. It s
the seat, in the central
Push the plate until it
mobile stowage compa
of the seat.
If it is difficult to make
large section forwards
wards to make the fitti
onto the mounting pla
A1
A2
Fig. 112 Mobile stowage compartment Installation
Seats and stowage142
stowage compartment — General
ent may only be placed in the central
Fig. 114 Mobile stowage compartment Opening
Fig. 115 Mobile stowage compartment Duties
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 142 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Place the mobile stowage compartment onto the foam of the
central seat.
Set both mounting pieces together page 141, fig. 112,
with both mounting rings page 141, fig. 113 and press
hard until both the clips completely connect with the rings.
Removing mobile stowage compartment
Pull each of the buttons page 141, fig. 112 on the clips
(red buttons) forwards, until they snap out of place.
Fold the larger seat down and remove the mobile stowage
compartment mounting plate.
Multi-purpose* mobile information
This stowage compartm
area of the rear seat
AE
AG
AF
Seats and stowage 143
Safety Fir Technical Data
ing, keep the tables stored inside the mobile the cover closed, and likewise when they are
the drink holders. The drink may spill and le is moving.
drinkholder when the vehicle is in motion, n may be flung around the vehicle and cause
ting plate is correctly clipped onto the cushion
use, store inside the stowage compartment.
e compartment is not in use, it should always net in the luggage compartment.
wage compartment is correctly fitted, pulling it
ox and checking that both safety clips are
gs.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 143 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Opening
Lift the cover , in area page 142, fig. 114.
Closing
Push the cover down, until it clips into place.
Uses of the mobile stowage compartment
The front open glove box may be used to store small objects that will not
damage passengers in the event that the objects are flung around the interior
of the vehicle.
The drink holders are used for holding drink cans or cups.
The elastic belt on the side may be used for keeping papers and maga-
zines.
The tables may be used as a support for writing.
To use the table page 142, fig. 115, it must be removed from its
compartment on the side of the mobile stowage compartment and fitted into
compartment page 142, fig. 115 on the front section of the mobile
stowage compartment.
The table in the right-hand compartment is fitted in the left-hand compart-
ment of the front of the mobile stowage compartment and the table in the left-
hand compartment is fitted in the right-hand compartment.
The tables have two positions for use and cannot be interchanged.
WARNING
The mobile stowage compartment supports a maximum load of 5 kg. Do not overload.
Do not drive when the cover of the mobile stowage compartment is open.
Do not drive when the tables are set up for use.
When the vehicle is mov stowage compartment with not in use
Never place hot drinks in cause burns when the vehic
Do not leave cans in the there is a danger that the ca injury.
Make sure that the moun frame.
When the plate is not in
When the mobile stowag be fastened by the retaining
Note Check that the mobile sto
forwards by the front glove b
correctly clipped onto the rin
AB AA
AC
AD
WARNING (continued)
Seats and stowage144
ighter fig. 117 to activate it .
op out slightly.
hter and light the cigarette on the
tte lighter can lead to serious injuries or start
y. Carelessness or negligence when using the urns, risk of injury.
en the ignition is turned on or the engine is fire, never leave children alone inside the
Fig. 117 The cigarette lighter is located in the electric socket on the front of the centre console
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 144 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical sockets*
Ashtray*
Opening and closing the ashtray
To open the ashtray, lift the cover fig. 116.
To close, push the cover down.
Emptying the ashtray
Extract the ashtray and empty it.
WARNING
Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the ashtray and cause a fire.
Cigarette lighter*
Press on the cigarette l
Wait for the lighter to p
Pull out the cigarette lig
glowing coil.
WARNING
Improper use of the cigare a fire.
Using the lighter carefull cigarette lighter can cause b
The lighter only works wh running. To avoid the risk of vehicle.
Fig. 116 Ashtray located in the front drink holder
Seats and stowage 145
Safety Fir Technical Data
connected to the 12 volt socket in the front
the passenger compartment and that of the
nces connected to each power point must not
Watt.
d the connected accessories will only operate hen the engine is running. Improper use of the ries can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. ever leave children alone inside the vehicle.
iances with the engine switched off will cause a
l accessories, see the instructions on
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 145 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Electrical sockets*
Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt
sockets.
Electrical accessories may be
centre console fig. 118 of
boot* fig. 119. The applia
exceed a power rating of 120
WARNING
The current power points an when the ignition is on or w sockets or electrical accesso To avoid the risk of injury, n
Note The use of electrical appl
battery discharge.
Before using any electrica
page 208. Fig. 118 Socket, centre console, front
Fig. 119 Socket, luggage compartment
Seats and stowage146
s an audio input (red and white connectors) or
d, white and yellow connectors). For more
udio and video source, see the RSE manual.
Fig. 121 AUX RSE connection
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 146 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Auxiliary audio connection (AUX-IN)*
Lift the AUX. cover fig. 120.
Insert the pin as far as possible (see Radio manual).
AUX RSE connection*
This connector may be used a
audio and video connector (re
details about the use of this a
Fig. 120 Auxiliary audio connection
Seats and stowage 147
Safety Fir Technical Data
the first aid box do not belong to the standard
ply with legal requirements.
f the contents of the first aid kit. You should
soon as possible after the shelf-life date of the
ries and emergency equipment see the instruc-
hed to the luggage compartment carpet by
not belong to the standard vehicle equipment.
t comply with legal requirements.
uisher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher
d regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher
te for checking.
ries and emergency equipment see the instruc-
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 147 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
MEDIA-IN* connector
For information concerning the use of this equipment, please see the Radio
handbook.
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*
The warning triangle and the first aid kit may be located in the stowage
compartment on the floor of the boot, under the carpet.
The first aid kit may be located in the stowage compartment drawer on the
boot floor under the carpet or in the stowage compartment in the boot side
lining, depending on the version.
Note The warning triangle and
vehicle equipment.
The first aid kit must com
Observe the expiry date o
purchase a new first-aid kit as
first-aid kit has expired.
Before acquiring accesso
tions on page 208.
Fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher* is attac
velcro.
Note The fire extinguisher does
The fire extinguisher mus
Ensure that the fire exting
should, therefore, be checke
will inform you of the next da
Before acquiring accesso
tions on page 208.
Fig. 122 Connection in central armrest compart- ment
Seats and stowage148
ld chafe against the wires of the heating
d cause damage.
f the rear side windows must not be covered as
ing extracted from the vehicle.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 148 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Luggage compartment
Stowing luggage
All luggage must be securely stowed.
Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles
well at all times:
Distribute the load as evenly as possible.
Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment
as possible.
Secure luggage in the luggage compartment with suitable straps
on the fastening rings*.
WARNING
Loose luggage and other loose items in the vehicle can cause serious injuries.
Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly move and change the way the vehicle handles.
During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects in the passenger compartment can be flung forward, injuring vehicle occupants.
Always store objects in the luggage compartment and secure with suit- able straps. This is especially important for heavy objects.
When you transport heavy objects, always take in account that a change in the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling.
Please observe information on safe driving page 7, Safe driving.
Caution Hard objects on the shelf cou
element in the rear window an
Note The ventilation slots in front o
this would prevent stale air be
Seats and stowage 149
Safety Fir Technical Data
rtment cover
ull the cover back until you hear a click
PRESS, and the cover is retrieved auto-
mpartment cover
e direction of the arrow, lift the cover and
in reverse to fit it.
bjects on the open stowage compartment, the vehicle occupants in case of sudden
e, ensure that the stowage compartment tray is
mean that the rear stowage tray is not correctly
damaged.
remove the tray.
items of clothing on the luggage compartment
uced.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 149 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Luggage compartment cover Using the luggage compa
Use the handle to p
fig. 123.
Press the area marked
matically.
To remove the luggage co
Press the side pin in th
remove it fig. 124.
Follow the instructions
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard o because they will endanger braking.
Caution Before closing the tailgat
correctly fitted.
An overloaded boot could
seated and it may be bent or
If the boot is overloaded,
Note Ensure that, when placing
cover, rear visibility is not red
Fig. 123 Using the luggage compartment cover
Fig. 124 Removing the luggage compartment cover
AA
Seats and stowage150
neath between the seatback and the
the allotments on the roof, first to the
fig. 125.
front anchor rings to tense the net
oints if you intend to carry loads on the roof:
gage racks and accessories approved by SEAT
w the assembly instructions included with the
careful to position front and rear luggage
e special housings on the longitudinal bars.
sition according to the direction of travel indi-
l. Not following these instructions may lead to
s.
A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted for
ort bar, the load must be distributed evenly
ver, the maximum load permitted for the entire
tem) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor should
be exceeded. See the chapter on Technical
r large objects on the roof, any change in the
to a change in the centre of gravity or an
st be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-
ust be used.
ith a sunroof*, ensure that it does not interfere
er system when opened.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 150 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Partition net*
The partition grille prevents loose objects in the luggage
compartment from being thrown forward into the passenger
compartment (e.g. under sudden braking).
Pull the net from under
folding tray and fit it to
right then to the left
Hook the belts into the
fig. 126.
Roof carrier*
Please observe the following p
For safety reasons, only lug
should be used.
It is essential that you follo
bars exactly, being especially
compartment cover bars on th
You must also respect their po
cated in the assembly manua
marks on the longitudinal bar
Distribute the load evenly.
each roof carrier system supp
along the entire length. Howe
roof (including the support sys
the total weight of the vehicle
Data.
When transporting heavy o
normal vehicle behaviour due
increased wind resistance mu
able speed and driving style m
For those vehicles fitted w
with the load on the roof carri
Fig. 125 Separation net
Fig. 126 Anchor rings for the separation net
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 151
Safety Fir Technical Data
is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
ne has reached its operating temperature.
hed off automatically approximately 20 minutes
n also be switched off beforehand by pushing
vents strong odours in the outside air from
or example when passing through a tunnel or in
g. 127 On the dash panel there are the heating ntrols
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 151 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning
Heating
Controls and equipment
Using the controls fig. 127 and and the control you
can set the temperature, air distribution and the fan speed.
To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button or
. When the function is activated, the display window in the
lower left of the button is lit.
Temperature
With the regulator the heating level is determined. The required tempera-
ture inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature.
Maximum heat output, which
only available when the engi
Rear window heater
This function will be switc
after being switched on. It ca
the button
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode pre
entering the vehicle interior, f
queuing traffic .
Fi co
A1 A4 A5
A2
A3
A1
A2
A3
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning152
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 152 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the passenger compart-
ment rather than the air from outside.
Air distribution
Control for setting the flow of air in the required direction.
Air distribution towards the windscreen. If the windscreen air output is
on and the air recirculation mode is pressed, this remains active. When the
recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution towards the windscreen mode
is selected, the recirculation mode is deactivated. For safety reasons, the air
recirculation mode should not be connected.
Air distribution to the upper body.
Air distribution to footwell
Air distribution to the windscreen and the foot well.
Blower
The air flow can be set at four speeds with the control . The air flow should
always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensa- tion. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. The windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).
Note Please observe the general notes page 161.
A4
A5
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 153
Safety Fir Technical Data
w heating. The heating will be switched off auto-
20 minutes after switching on. It can also be
by pushing the button.
tion mode page 155
page 154
four speed settings for the air flow. The air flow
the lowest speed when driving slowly.
must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. ood visibility. Please familiarise yourself with heating and ventilation system, including the r the windscreens.
g. 128 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 153 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Climatic*
Control switches
The climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works
when the engine is running and the turbine is switched on.
Using the controls fig. 128 and and the control you
can set the temperature, air distribution and the turbine speed.
To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button ,
or . When the function is activated, the display window in
the lower corner of the button is lit.
Temperature selector page 154
Button Heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system on/off
page 154
Button Rear windo
matically approximately
switched off beforehand
Button Air recircula
Air distribution control Blower switch. There are
should always be set at
WARNING
For road safety all windows This is essential to ensure g the correct operation of the anti-fog/defrost functions fo
Fi
A1 A5 A6
A2
A3 A4
A1
A2 AC
A3
A4
A5
A6
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning154
tioning using the button page 153,
lector anti-clockwise until the desired
ed.
to one of the settings 1-4.
. 129 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 154 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Note Please observe the general notes page 161.
Heating and cooling the interior
Interior heating
Turn the temperature selector fig. 129 clockwise to select
the required temperature.
Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration
desired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest),
(towards the footwell) and (towards the windscreen and
footwell areas).
Interior cooling
Switch on the air condi
fig. 128 .
Turn the temperature se
cooling output is reach
Turn the blower switch
Fig
A1
AC
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 155
Safety Fir Technical Data
ants and prevents misting of the windows when
igh.
cannot be switched on this may be caused by
nning.
f.
is below +3C.
m compressor has been temporarily switched
nt temperature is too high.
is faulty.
le. Have the air conditioning checked by a qual-
e.
g. 130 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 155 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the
required direction: (to the windscreen), (to the upper
body), (to the foot well) and (to the windscreen and to the
foot well).
Heating
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,
but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
comfort for the vehicle occup
the ambient air humidity is h
If the air conditioning system
the following reasons:
The engine may not be ru
The blower is switched of
The outside temperature
The air conditioning syste
off because the engine coola
The air conditioning fuse
Another fault in the vehic
ified workshop.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from coming from the outsid
Fi
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning156
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 156 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Air recirculation mode page 155, fig. 130 prevents strong odours in
the outside air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing
through a tunnel or in queuing traffic.
With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the passenger compart-
ment rather than the cold air from outside.
With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger
compartment rather than the ambient air.
If the windscreen air output is on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,
this remains active. When the recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution
towards the windscreen mode is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-
vated. For safety reasons, the air recirculation mode should not be
connected.
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 157
Safety Fir Technical Data
ted separately for the left and right sides of the
ction for the windscreen. The air drawn in from
ected at the windscreen. The air recirculation
l be switched off as soon as the defrost function
ratures over 3C, the air conditioning system will
ically and the blower speed will be increased by
he air. The button is lit in yellow and the symbol
avigator display.
distribution
istribution
air distribution
g. 131 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 157 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
2C-Climatronic*
Control switches
The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioning settings for the left and right.
The air conditioning system controls the temperature when the
engine is running and the blower is switched on.
Turn the temperature control knobs fig. 131 or in order
to adjust the temperature on the left hand side or the right hand
side respectively.
The functions will be switched on when its buttons are pressed.
When these functions are activated, they are indicated on the
radio display. In addition, all these functions are lit with LEDs.
Press the button again to switch off the function.
The temperature can be adjus
vehicle interior.
Button defrost fun
outside the vehicle is dir
mode, if switched on, wil
is switched on. At tempe
be switched on automat
one level in order to dry t
appears on the radio or n
Button Upward air
Button Central air d
Button Downward
Fi
A9 A14 A1
A2
A3
A4
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning158
ormation
limatronic system can be displayed
d navigation screen mounted at
Fig. 132 Navigation display with information about the Climatronic
Fig. 133 Radio display with information about Climatronic
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 158 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Button Manual air recirculation mode.
Button Rear window heating. The heating will be switched off auto-
matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. However, it may
be turned off by pushing the button. The button lights up yellow and the
symbol appears in the display.
Button Automatic temperature, ventilation and air distribution
control page 159
button — Dual zone synchroniser
Button Switches the 2C-Climatronic on and off page 160
Blower control page 160
button Switches heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system
on
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
Note Please observe the general notes page 161.
Viewing Climatronic inf
Information about the C
on the radio or radio an
factory.
A5
A6
A7 AUTO
A8 DUAL
A9 OFF
A10
A11 AC
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 159
Safety Fir Technical Data
ightly higher or lower depending on the ambient
tant temperature. The temperature of the air
lower speed and the air distribution are regu-
em also considers the sunlight radiation, so
adjustment. Therefore, automatic mode almost
fort for the vehicle occupants throughout the
off whenever an adjustment is made using the
n, air flow or or the air recirculation button
tinue to be regulated within the parameters
r.
es:
calculates the air flow for two people.
calculates the air flow for more than two
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 159 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
The LEDs on the Climatronic controls indicate that the selected function has
been activated.
In addition, the radio or radio and navigation displays mounted at factory
briefly display the current settings of the Climatronic if any are modified.
The symbols used on the radio or radio and navigation displays are the same
as the symbols used for the Climatronic controls.
Automatic mode
In automatic mode air temperature, air flow and distribution
are automatically regulated so that a specified temperature is
attained as quickly as possible and then maintained.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right
sides of the vehicle interior.
Switching on automatic mode
Press the page 157, fig. 131 button. AUTO High is
shown on the radio display (high fan speed).
Press the button again page 157, fig. 131. AUTO Low
is shown on the radio display (low fan speed).
Depending upon the version and finish, the vehicle may include:
When a temperature of 22C (72F) is set in automatic mode a comfortable
interior climate is quickly reached. Therefore, we recommend you not to
change this adjustment, except as necessary to suit individual preferences or
particular circumstances. The compartment temperature can be set between
+18C (64F) and +26C (80F). These are approximate temperatures and the
actual temperature may be sl
conditions.
Climatronic maintains a cons
supplied to the interior, the b
lated automatically. The syst
there is no need for manual re
always provides the best com
year.
Automatic mode is switched
buttons for the air distributio
. The temperature will con
manually selected by the use
Note There are two automatic mod
Automatic mode LO: This
Automatic mode HI: This
people.
AUTO
AUTO
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning160
80F) is selected, the display switches to HI In
maximum heating output and the temperature
reely using the control . Always have the
g to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into the
to the minimum -1, turns the Climatronic off.
using the buttons , and . It is also
me of the air vents separately.
system on and off
D lit), the heating, ventilation and air condi-
. 134 On the instrument panel: 2C Climatronic trols.
A10
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 160 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Manual mode
In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, air flow and distribution as required.
Switching on manual mode
To enter manual mode, press one of the buttons fig. 134 to
or press the air flow control . The selected function is
shown on the radio or navigator display.
Temperature
There are separate temperature selectors for the left and right sides of the
vehicle interior. The selected temperature is displayed above the selector.
The compartment temperature can be set between +18C (64F) and +26C
(80F). These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may
be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions.
If a temperature below 18C (64F) is selected, the display switches to LO In
this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the temperature
is not regulated.
If a temperature above 26C (
this setting the system runs at
is not regulated.
Blower
The air flow may be adjusted f
blower running at a low settin
vehicle. Pushing the button
Air distribution
The air distribution is adjusted
possible to open and close so
Switching the air conditioning
When the button is on (LE
tioning system is on.
Fig con
A1
A5 A10
AC
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 161
Safety Fir Technical Data
e, the air recirculation increases the effective-
y heating the air inside the passenger compart-
outside.
res, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ystem by cooling the air inside the passenger
ambient air.
s on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,
recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution
e is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-
air recirculation mode should not be
cold air from the outside enters the vehicle ng system is switched off, the windows can , never leave the air recirculation mode (risk of accident).
d particle filter and active carbon filter) serves
s in the ambient air, including dust and pollen.
m to work with maximum efficiency, the pollen
intervals specified in the Service Schedule.
maturely due to use in areas reaching very high
lter must be changed more frequently than
le.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 161 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
When the button is off (LED off), the heating, ventilation and air condi-
tioning system is off.
When the button is off, the heating, ventilation and air conditioning
system is switched off to save fuel. The temperature continues to self-regu-
late. The set temperature can then only be reached if it is higher than the
ambient temperature.
Driver and passenger temperature control
The button controls the synchronisation of the 2 Climatronic climate
zones.
When the button is on (LED lit), the climate zone of the Climatronic is
personalised, for example: Driver side temperature 22C and passenger side
temperature 23C.
When the button is off (LED off), the climate zone of the Climatronic is
synchronised, for example: Driver side temperature 22C and passenger side
temperature 22C.
If the button is off and the passenger side temperature is changed, the
function is automatically activated.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells
from coming from the outside.
Press the button page 160, fig. 134 to switch air recir-
culation mode on or off. It is switched on if the following symbol
appears in the display .
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from
entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in
a traffic jam.
With low temperatures outsid
ness of the heating system b
ment rather than the air from
With high ambient temperatu
ness of the air conditioning s
compartment rather than the
If the windscreen air output i
this remains active. When the
towards the windscreen mod
vated. For safety reasons, the
connected.
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no interior. If the air conditioni quickly mist over. Therefore switched on for a long time
General notes
The impurity filter
The impurity filter (a combine
as a barrier against impuritie
For the air conditioning syste
filter must be replaced at the
If the filter loses efficiency pre
pollution levels, the pollen fi
stated in the Service Schedu
AC
AC
DUAL
DUAL
DUAL
DUAL
A2
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning162
front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and
cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the
s through the passenger compartment and is
r this purpose. Therefore, do not cover these
other objects.
m operates most effectively with the windows
osed. However, if the vehicle has been over-
an be cooled quicklier by opening the windows
irculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the
s a residue on the evaporator, producing a
he air conditioning at least once a month, to
nd prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling
rised Service Centre should be consulted to
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 162 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,
but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when
the ambient air humidity is high.
If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by
the following reasons:
The engine is not running.
The button is disconnected.
The outside temperature is below +3C.
The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched
off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
The air conditioning fuse is faulty.
Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioning checked by a qual-
ified workshop.
Caution If you suspect that the air conditioning is damaged, switch it off with the
button to prevent further damage and have it checked by a qualified
workshop.
Repairs to the air conditioning system require specialist knowledge and
special tools. Therefore, we recommend you to take the vehicle to a qualified
workshop.
Note If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa- tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and so forming a puddle
underneath the vehicle. This is completely normal and there is no need to
suspect a leak.
Keep the air intake slots in
leaves to ensure heating and
windows from misting over.
The air from the vents flow
extracted by slots designed fo
slots with items of clothing or
The air conditioning syste
and the sliding/tilting roof* cl
heated by sun, the air inside c
for a short time.
Do not smoke while air rec
air conditioning system leave
permanent unpleasant odour.
It is advisable to connect t
lubricate the system gaskets a
capacity is detected, an Autho
check the system.
AC
AC
Driving 163
Safety Fir Technical Data
to the correct position.
e steering column fig. 135 down
eel in this way until the correct position is
again firmly .
ring column adjustment function and an incor- ult in serious injury.
teering column should be adjusted only when
Fig. 136 Proper sitting position for driver
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 163 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Driving
Address
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely
adjusted to suit the driver.
Adjust the driver seat
Push the lever under th
.
Adjust the steering wh
set fig. 136.
Then push the lever up
WARNING
Incorrect use of the stee rect seating position can res
To avoid accidents, the s the vehicle is stationary.
Fig. 135 Adjusting the steering wheel position
Driving164
programme (ESP)*
safer in certain situations.
ogram (ESP) contains the electronic differential
trol system (TCS). The ESP function works
arning lamps will light up if the ESP or ABS
lly when the engine is started.
annot be switched off. With the ESP switch it is
f.
hen in cases where wheel sliding is desirable.
ains,
Fig. 137 Detail of the centre console: ESP button
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 164 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your chest page 163, fig. 136. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal injury.
If your physical constitution does not allow you to mantain the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The Authorised Service Centre will help you to decide if special specific modifi- cations are necessary.
If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o’clock and 3 o’clock positions. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases, you could receive severe injuries to the arms, hands and head.
Safety
Electronic stabilisation
ESP helps make driving
The Electronic Stabilisation Pr
lock (EDL) and the traction con
together with the ABS. Both w
systems are faulty.
The ESP is started automatica
The ESP is always active, and c
only possible to switch TCS of
The TCS can be deactivated w
For example:
When driving with snow ch
WARNING (continued)
Driving 165
Safety Fir Technical Data
key
g lock
e ignition and the engine are OFF and the
te without the ignition key, turn the steering
dible sound. You should always lock the
ve your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle
glow plug system on
sition and release it. If the key cannot be turned
osition to position , move the steering
loosens up.
Fig. 138 Ignition key positions
A0
A1
A0 A12
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 165 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,
when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for
example.
Next, the button should be pressed to reactivate the TCS.
When does the warning light switch on or flash?
On switching the ignition on, it lights up for about two seconds to carry
out a function control.
The warning lamp will start flashing when the vehicle is moving if the ESP
or the TCS is activated. The warning lamp will light up slowly if the TCS is
switched off.
It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
WARNING
The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP in page 183, Intelligent technology.
Ignition lock
Position of the ignition
Ignition switched off, steerin
In this position fig. 138 th
steering may be locked.
For the Steering lock to opera
wheel until it locks with an au
steering wheel when you lea
theft .
Switching the ignition or the
Turn the ignition key to this po
or it is difficult to turn from p
wheel back and forth until it
Driving166
ted again automatically as soon as you pull the
using a genuine SEAT key with its correct code.
icle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.
ping the engine
tarted using a genuine SEAT key with
the neutral position and depress the
and hold it in this position for the starter
the starting page 165 position.
y as soon as the engine starts; the starter
with the engine.
e, you may need to slightly press down the
ine, it may be a little noisy for the first few
built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
ause for concern.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 166 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Starting
The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components
with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.
Every time the vehicle is started again, the ignition key must be turned to
position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents
possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.
WARNING
The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle comes to a standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be immediately blocked- Risk of accident!
Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even for a short period. This is especially important if children or disabled people are left alone in the vehicle. They could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment such as the electric windows, conse- quently resulting in an accident.
Unsupervised use of the keys could start the engine or any electrical system, such as the electric window. This could result in serious injury.
Caution The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key
position ).
Electronic immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons from driving
the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
matically when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The immobiliser will be activa
key out of the ignition lock.
The engine can only be started
Note A perfect operation of the veh
Starting and stop
Starting petrol engines
The engine can only be s
its correct code.
Move the gear lever to
clutch pedal thoroughly
to turn the engine on.
Turn the ignition key to
Let go of the ignition ke
motor must not run on
After starting a very hot engin
accelerator.
When starting a very cold eng
seconds until oil pressure has
This is quite normal, and no c
A2
A0
A2
Driving 167
Safety Fir Technical Data
started using a genuine SEAT key with
the neutral position and depress the
ly and hold it in this position for the starter
the starting position.
position page 165, fig. 138 . The
ll light for engine pre-heating.
p turns off, turn the key to position to
t press the accelerator.
ey as soon as the engine starts, the starter
wed to run on with the engine.
ine, it may be a little noisy for the first few
s built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
cause for concern.
the engine, see page 262.
sel engine
rging of the battery, do not use any other major
e glow plugs are pre-heating.
e glow plug warning lamp page 76 goes out.
fuel tank has been completely run dry
pletely run dry, it may take longer than normal
e engine after refuelling with diesel fuel. This is
minate air first.
A1
A2
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 167 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
If the engine does not start immediately, switch the starter off after
10 seconds and try again after half a minute. If the engine still does not start,
the fuel pump fuse should be checked page 249, Fuses.
WARNING
Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start
the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you
should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow
the instructions page 262, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine
reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Starting diesel engines
The engine can only be
its correct code.
Move the gear lever to
clutch pedal thorough
to turn the engine on.
Turn the ignition key to
Turn the ignition key to
indication lamp wi
When the warning lam
start the engine. Do no
Let go of the ignition k
motor must not be allo
When starting a very cold eng
seconds until oil pressure ha
This is quite normal, and no
If there are problems starting
Glow plug system for the die
To avoid unnecessary discha
electrical equipment while th
Start the engine as soon as th
Starting the engine after the
If the fuel tank has been com
(up to one minute) to start th
because the system must eli
Driving168
, the radiator fan may run on for up to 10
t the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant
the heat accumulated in the engine compart-
xposure to solar radiation.
ff until the vehicle is completely stationary.
ly when the engine is running. With the rength is needed to brake. As normal brake ed, risk of accidents and serious injury may
mmediately blocked once the key is removed hicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.
hard for a long period, the engine could over-
isk of engine damage. For this reason, you
rox. 2 minutes before you switch it off.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 168 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
WARNING
Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start
the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you
should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow
the instructions page 262, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine
reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Switching the engine off
Stop the engine.
Turn the ignition key to position page 165, fig. 138 .
After switching the engine off
minutes. It is also possible tha
temperature increases due to
ment or due to its prolonged e
WARNING
Never switch the engine o
The brake servo works on engine switched off, more st operation cannot be perform exist.
The steering lock can be i from the ignition lock. The ve
Caution If the engine has been driven
heat when it is switched off. R
should idle the engine for app
A0
Driving 169
Safety Fir Technical Data
r
tationary with the engine idling. Press the
ly.
to neutral and push the lever downwards.
the left, and then into the reverse position
k.
engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When
fore engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds
thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.
en the reverse gear is selected and the ignition
ing, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a tch released.
gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-
the gear rest when driving. The pressure of your
wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.
should always depress the clutch down fully to
damage.
e clutch uphills. This causes premature wear
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 169 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Manual gearbox
Driving a car with a manual gearbox
Engaging the reverse gea
The vehicle should be s
clutch down thorough
Place the gear lever in
Slide the gear lever to
shown on the gear stic
The reverse gear can only be
the engine is running and be
with the clutch pressed down
The reverse lights light up wh
is on.
WARNING
When the engine is runn gear is engaged and the clu
Never select the reverse dent.
Note Do not rest your hand on
hand could cause premature
When changing gear, you
avoid unnecessary wear and
Do not hold the car on th
and damage to the clutch.
Fig. 139 Detail of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 5-speed manual gearbox
Fig. 140 Detail of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual gearbox
Driving170
/ direct shift gearbox has three
gramme
s a higher gear earlier rather than remain
to position D to drive forwards
to position R to reverse. This position is
es for reversing.
mme
ion S.
me, S, the program is designed for a sports
ich changes up at higher engine speeds to use
Fig. 142 Program selec- tion
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 170 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox*
Selector lever positions
Selector lever positions indicated on the cover
P Parking position (lever locked).
R Reverse position.
N Neutral position (lever locked). This position is similar to the neutral
position for manual gearboxes).
D Drive position (economic driving programme).
S Sports driving position.
+/- Tiptronic driving position (this programme is similar to the operation of
a manual gearbox).
Driving programmes
The automatic gearbox
programmes.
Selecting the economy pro
This programme select
in a lower gear.
Put the selector lever in
Put the selector lever in
shared by all programm
Selecting the sport progra
Move the lever to posit
If you select the sport program
mode, that is, a programme wh
Fig. 141 Centre console: selector lever for auto- matic gearbox / direct shift gearbox DSG
Driving 171
Safety Fir Technical Data
brake pedal, at the same time press the
lever.
en the vehicle is stopped or at a speed of less
s, the lock is automatically released in position
(e.g. from R to D) the lever will not lock. If the
N more than one second then it is locked. With
is prevented passing from P and N to any other
e brake pedal.
t in the position P in order to remove the key.
tic gearbox* / DSG automatic
ears are automatically engaged.
Fig. 144 Driving
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 171 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
the full power of the engine. This programme is not recommended for use on
the motorway or in the city.
Selecting the manual programme (tiptronic)
This programme allows driving similar to a manual gearbox.
This programme may be accessed using the selector lever or from the
steering wheel controls when this option is fitted page 173.
Selector lever locking
The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged
inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle to move.
Releasing the selector lever lock
Start the vehicle.
Press and release the
button on the selector
The lock is only activated wh
than 5 km/h. At higher speed
N.
For rapid changes of position
lever remains in the position
the automatic lock, the lever
gear without first pressing th
The selector lever must be pu
Driving with an automa gearbox*
The drive and reverse g
Fig. 143 Deactivating the lock
Driving172
cases, using the foot brake to prevent
hicle using another forward gear (engine
, release the brake and accelerate.
ower the gear must be for effective engine
ar is used on a very steep gradient, the engine
icle accelerates. So that the engine speed does
rbox changes to the next highest gear. Depress
selector lever to the Tiptronic gate to return to
ave the vehicle while the engine is running or ny reason you must leave the vehicle with the ndbrake and move the selector lever to posi-
ng and the positions D, S or R are selected, it le with the foot brake because the vehicle will
anging the position of the selector lever (risk
ever be moved into the positions R or P while
gradient, reduce speed and use the Tiptronic gear.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 172 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Driving
Press and hold the foot brake.
Press the button on the selector lever knob (on the left)
page 171, fig. 144.
Select a gear for driving (R, D or S).
Release the button and wait a few seconds for the gear to
engage, a light jerk will be felt.
Release the brake and accelerate.
Short stop
Hold the vehicle stationary with the brake pressed down (for
example at traffic lights). The selector lever does not need to be
put into the positions P or N for this.
Do not press the accelerator.
Parking the vehicle
Press the foot brake and hold to bring the vehicle to a stop.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Press in the button on the selector lever knob, move the lever to
the position P and release the button.
Driving slowly
Move the selector lever to the position D and press to the right to
put the lever into Tiptronic mode.
Press the gear lever towards (-) to select a lower gear.
Hill stop
Hold the vehicle, in all
rolling back.
Do not try to slow the ve
braking).
Descending gradients
With the gear engaged
The steeper the gradient the l
braking. For example, if 3rd ge
braking is insufficient and veh
not become excessive, the gea
the brake pedal and move the
3rd gear.
WARNING
The driver should never le with any gear selected. If for a engine running, apply the ha tion P.
When the engine is runni is necessary to hold the vehic creep at a low speed.
Never accelerate while ch of an accident).
The selector lever must n moving (risk of an accident).
Before descending a steep programme to select a lower
Driving 173
Safety Fir Technical Data
r system
lows the driver to manually select
Fig. 145 Changing gear with Tiptronic
Fig. 146 Steering wheel with levers for automatic gearbox
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 173 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
If you must stop on a hill, always hold the vehicle using the footbrake to avoid rolling back.
The footbrake must not be held for a long period of time, not even lightly; continuous braking will cause overheating of the brakes and a reduction or even a loss of braking power and a significant increase in braking distances.
Never allow the vehicle to coast down a gradient with the selector lever in positions N or D, even when the engine is not running. For descents, the use of the Tiptronic programme is recommended to keep the speed reduced.
Caution Never use the automatic gearbox to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill,
even for short periods, as this may overheat the gearbox and cause damage.
Apply the handbrake or depress the foot brake to hold the vehicle in position.
If the vehicle is allowed to roll with the engine stopped but the selector in
position N then the gearbox may be damaged because it will not be
lubricated.
Using the Tiptronic gea
The Tiptronic system al
gears
WARNING (continued)
Driving174
e steering wheel can operate with the gear stick
ehicle in motion.
e applied firmly to prevent the
y rolling away.
e when you leave your vehicle and when
Fig. 147 Handbrake between the front seats
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 174 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
General information about driving in Tiptronic mode
Changing gear with the gear stick
Put the lever in position D and press towards the right to enter
the Tiptronic gate page 173, fig. 145.
Press the gear lever forwards (+) to select a higher gear.
Press the gear lever back (-) to select a lower gear.
Changing gear with the steering wheel levers
Press the right paddle towards the steering wheel to change
up page 173, fig. 146.
Press the left paddle towards the steering wheel to change
down page 173, fig. 146.
Using the levers on the steering wheel, you can access manual driving mode
regardless of the driving mode pre-selected.
General information about driving in Tiptronic mode
When accelerating, the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox goes into a
higher gear a little before it reaches the maximum permitted revolutions.
If a lower gear is selected, the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox does
not change down until the point is reached where the engine could no longer
overrev.
If the Tiptronic is selected whilst the vehicle is in motion and the automatic
gearbox / direct shift gearbox is in 3rd gear in selector lever position D, the
Tiptronic will then also be in 3rd gear.
Note The gearbox controls on th
in any position and with the v
Handbrake
Using the handbrake
The handbrake should b
vehicle from accidentall
Always apply the handbrak
you park.
A+
A
Driving 175
Safety Fir Technical Data
always be firmly applied when the
points when parking the vehicle:
top the vehicle.
lso be selected.
nd remove the key from the ignition lock.
l slightly to engage the steering lock.
ys with you when you leave the vehicle
the vehicle on gradients:
at the vehicle rolls against the kerb if it started
ing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they
cing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they
mal by applying the handbrake firmly and
the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 175 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Applying the handbrake
Pull the handbrake lever up firmly page 174, fig. 147.
Releasing the handbrake
Pull the lever up slightly and press the release knob in the direc-
tion of the arrow page 174, fig. 147 and guide the handbrake
lever down fully .
Always apply the handbrake firmly. This prevents you driving with the hand-
brake applied .
The handbrake warning lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied
and the ignition switched on. The warning turns off when the handbrake is
released.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h with the handbrake on, the following
message* will appear on the instrument panel display: HANDBRAKE ON. Also,
an audible warning is given.
WARNING
Never use the handbrake to stop the vehicle when it is in motion. The braking distance is considerably longer, because braking is only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of accident!
If it is only partially released, this will cause rear brakes overheating, which can impair the function of the brake system and could lead to an acci- dent. This also causes premature wear on the rear brake pads.
Caution Always apply the handbrake before you leave the vehicle. The first gear
should also be selected.
Parking
The handbrake should
vehicle is parked.
Always note the following
Use the foot brake to s
Apply the handbrake.
The first gear should a
Switch the engine off a
Turn the steering whee
Always take you car ke
.
Additional notes on parking
Turn the steering wheel so th
to roll.
If the vehicle is parked fac
point towards the kerb.
If the vehicle is parked fa
point away from the kerb.
Secure the vehicle as nor
engaging first gear.
WARNING
Take measures to reduce unattended.
Driving176
ss the brake pedal or use the hand brake
raffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehicle when starting off, hold the brake pedal down ting off.
alist workshop can tell you if your vehicle is
id system*
to help you when parking or manoeuvring in
e equipment fitted on your vehicle.
es an acoustic warning if there are any obsta-
T parking system* plus warns you acoustically
les in front of and behind the vehicle.
aid works properly, the sensors must be kept
.
em.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 176 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Never park where the hot exhaust system could ignite inflammable materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in the vehicle when it is locked. They would be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an emergency, locked doors will delay assistance to occupants.
Never leave children alone in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in motion, for example, by releasing the handbrake or the gear lever / selector lever.
Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.
Starting on an uphill*
This function is only included in vehicles fitted with ESP.
This device helps when starting uphill.
These are the basic operation conditions: doors closed, brake pedal pressed
down and vehicle in neutral. The system gets activated on engaging gear.
After removing your foot from the brake pedal, the braking force is maintained
for a few seconds to prevent the vehicle from moving backward when putting
into gear. This short space of time is enough to start the vehicle with ease.
This system also works when reversing uphill.
WARNING
If you do not start the vehicle immediately after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the vehicle may start to roll back under certain conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately.
If the engine stalls, depre immediately.
When following a line of t from rolling back accidentally for a few seconds before star
Note The Official Service or a speci
equipped with this system.
Acoustic parking a
General notes
Various systems are available
tight spaces, depending on th
The SEAT parking system* giv
cles behind your car.
When you are parking, the SEA
and optically19) about obstac
Note To ensure the acoustic parking
clean and free of snow and ice
WARNING (continued)
19) Vehicles with a navigation syst
WARNING (continued)
Driving 177
Safety Fir Technical Data
s detected by the system may no longer be
he car moves closer, so the system will not give
inds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,
raw bars, etc) may not always be detected by the
amage the vehicle in such cases.
owing page 179.
lus*: Description
s is an acoustic and optical parking
nt and rear bumpers. When the sensors detect
y acoustic and optical signals. The measuring
t about:
ith increasing frequency as you approach the
less than approx. 0.30 m away from the
ill sound continuously. Stop moving immedi-
e 0,90
ntre 1,20
e 0,60
ntre 1,60
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 177 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Seat Parking System: Description
The parking system is an acoustic parking aid.
Sensors are located in the rear bumper. When the sensors detect an obstacle,
you are alerted by acoustic signals (beeps). The measuring range of the
sensors starts at about:
The acoustic signals sound with increasing frequency as you approach the
obstacle. When the vehicle is less than approx. 0.30 m away from the
obstacle, the warning tone will sound continuously. Do not drive on!
The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about 4
seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected
obstacle (it does not affect the permanent acoustic signal).
The parking aid is switched on automatically when reverse gear is engaged.
You will hear a brief acknowledgement tone.
WARNING
The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver is personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.
The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered. Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci- dents.
Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full use of the rear-view mirrors.
Caution Please note that low obstacle
registered by the sensors as t
any further warning. Certain k
thin painted posts or trailer d
system, so take care not to d
Note Please refer to the notes on t
Seat Parking system p
The parking system plu
aid.
Sensors are located in the fro
an obstacle, you are alerted b
range of the sensors starts a
The acoustic signals sound w
obstacle. When the vehicle is
obstacle, the warning tone w
ately!
Rear Side 0,60
Centre 1,60
Front Sid
Ce
Rear Sid
Ce
Driving178
ay
t and behind and an acoustic signal enable the
ith respect to an obstacle. The ambar colour
scontinuous beep indicate the presence of an
loser to the obstacle, the colour of the segment
tic signal beeps continuously. When the penul-
this means that the vehicle has reached the
mediately!
placement for driver awareness. The driver is fe parking and other manoeuvres.
pots in which obstacles are not registered. dren and animals because the system will not pay attention when reversing to avoid acci-
n the area around the vehicle and make full
s detected by the system may no longer be
e car moves closer, so the system will not give
inds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,
w bars, etc) may not always be detected by the
mage the vehicle in such cases.
n towing page 179.
e picture display.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 178 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about 4
seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected
obstacle (it does not affect the permanent acoustic signal).
Enabling/Disabling
Enabling
Connects the radionavigator.
Press the switch on the central console fig. 148 or on the
gear selector gate. You will hear a brief acknowledgement tone
and the LED on the switch will light up.
Disabling
Drive forwards faster than 10 km/h or
Press the switch or
Switch the ignition off.
Segments in the optical displ
Some colour segments in fron
driver to assess the distance w
segments combined with a di
obstacle. As the vehicle gets c
changes to red and the acous
timate segment is displayed,
collision zone. Stop moving im
WARNING
The parking aid is not a re personally responsible for sa
The sensors have blind s Always look out for small chil always detect them. Always dents.
Always keep a close eye o use of the rear-view mirrors.
Caution Please note that low obstacle
registered by the sensors as th
any further warning. Certain k
thin painted posts or trailer dra
system, so take care not to da
Note Please refer to the notes o
There is a slight delay in th
Fig. 148 Centre console: Switch for parking aid
Driving 179
Safety Fir Technical Data
tem (CCS)*
m is able to maintain the set speed in
30 km/h to 180 km/h.
een saved, you may take your foot off the accel-
the cruise control system if it is not possible
uise control system should not be used in th bends or where roads are in bad conditions ippings, slippery surfaces, snow). Risk of acci-
ff when finish to use it in order to avoid an
et speed which is too high for the current road, . Risk of accident.
ntain a constant speed when descending down-
te due to its own weight. Use the foot brake to
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 179 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Towing bracket
In towing mode, the rear parking sensors are not enabled when you select
reverse gear or press the switch . This function may not be guaranteed on
towing brackets that are not factory fitted. This results in the following restric-
tions:
SEAT parking system*
No warning is given.
SEAT parking system plus*
There is no rear distance warning. The system will still give a warning when
obstacles are detected while driving forwards. The optical display changes to
towing mode.
Fault messages
If you hear a long beep for a few seconds and the LED on the switch * starts
flashing when you switch on the parking aid, a system fault has occurred.
Please refer the problem to an Authorised SEAT dealer or specialised work-
shop.
Note If the fault is not corrected before you switch off the ignition, it will only be
indicated by the flashing LED on the switch the next time you switch on
the parking aid.
Cruise control sys
Description
The cruise control syste
the range from approx.
Once the speed setting has b
erator.
WARNING
It could be dangerous to use to drive at constant speed.
For safety reasons the cr dense traffic, in sections wi (e.g. aquaplanning, loose ch dent.
Always switch the CCS o involuntary use.
It is dangerous to use a s traffic or weather conditions
Note The cruise control cannot mai
hills. The vehicle will accelera
slow the vehicle.
Driving180
T/- of the rocker switch fig. 150
ave reached the speed you wish to set.
witch, the current speed is set and held
Fig. 150 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AA
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 180 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Switching the cruise control system on and off
Switching on the system
Push the switch fig. 149 to the left to ON.
Switching off system
Either push the switch to the right to OFF or turn the ignition
off when the vehicle is stationary.
When the cruise control is on and a speed is programmed, the indicator on
the instrument panel is lit.20)
If the cruise control system is switched off, the symbol is switched off. The
system will also be fully switched off when the 1st gear is selected.*
Setting speed*
Press the lower part SE once briefly when you h
When you release the rocker s
constant.
20) Depending on the model version
Fig. 149 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AB
AB
Driving 181
Safety Fir Technical Data
h the accelerator and then release the pedal, the
tore the set speed. This will not be the case,
is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored
tes. The speed will have to be stored again.
itched off if you reduce speed by depressing the
te the control by pressing once on the upper part
fig. 151 .
speed which is too high for the current road, . Risk of accident.
mporarily*
l be switched off in the following situations:
essed,
AA
Fig. 152 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 181 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Adjusting set speed*
The speed can be altered without touching the accelerator or
the brake.
Setting a higher speed
Press the upper part RES/+ of the rocker switch fig. 151 to
increase the speed. The vehicle will continue to accelerate as
long as you keep the rocker switch pressed. When you release
the switch, the new speed is stored.
Setting a lower speed
Press the lower part SET/ of the rocker switch to reduce the
speed. The vehicle will automatically reduce its speed for as long
as you keep the switch pressed. When you release the switch, the
new speed is stored.
When you increase speed wit
system will automatically res
however, if the vehicle speed
speed for longer than 5 minu
Control of the set speed is sw
brake pedal. You can reactiva
of the rocker switch RES/+
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set traffic or weather conditions
Switching off system te
The cruise control system wil
if the brake pedal is depr
Fig. 151 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AA
AA
Driving182
ox
ed off by moving the control all the way to
ed), or when the vehicle is stationary, ignition
ox / DSG* automatic gearbox
ystem, the selector lever must be placed in one
, R or 1 or with the vehicle stopped and the
AB
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 182 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
if the clutch pedal is depressed,
if the vehicle is accelerated to over 180 km/h,
when the lever is moved to the position CANCEL without reaching
the OFF position. Once the CANCEL operation is completed, the lever is
released and returns to its initial position.
To resume the cruise control, release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the
vehicle speed to less than 180 km/h and press once on the upper part of the
rocker switch RES/+ page 181, fig. 152 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Turning off the cruise control system*
Vehicles with a manual gearb
The system is completely turn the right hand side (OFF engag
off.
Vehicles with automatic gearb
To completely disengage the s
of the following positions: P, N ignition turned off.
AB
AA
Fig. 153 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
Intelligent technology 183
Safety Fir Technical Data
AS)*
(BAS) function is only included in
s brake in time, but not with maximum force.
long braking distances.
venes when you press the brake pedal very
sist system registers an emergency situation. It
e full brake pressure so that the ABS can be acti-
ently, thus reducing the braking distance.
n the brake pedal. The brake assist system
soon as you release the brake.
den braking, the hazard warning lights auto-
hicles behind. The hazard warning lights go off
or the hazard warning light switch is pressed.
gher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep in front, and when the road surface is slippery nt risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist
cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and n with the brake assist system! Therefore, it is
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 183 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Practical tips
Intelligent technology
Brakes
Brake servo
The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works
only when the engine is running.
If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle has
to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to
make up for the lack of servo assistance.
WARNING
The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.
Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.
If the brake servo is not working, for example when the vehicle is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal.
Brake assist system (B
The Brake Assist System
vehicles with ESP.
In an emergency, most driver
This results in unnecessarily
The brake assist system inter
quickly because the brake as
then very quickly builds up th
vated more quickly and effici
Do not reduce the pressure o
switches off automatically as
Emergency braking function
When the vehicle detects sud
matically come on to warn ve
when the vehicle accelerates
WARNING
The risk of accident is hi your distance to the vehicle or wet. The increased accide system.
The brake assist system wet roads are dangerous eve
Intelligent technology184
m cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is
d wheels under braking), you should reduce e road and traffic conditions. Do not let the ou into taking any risks when driving.
is also determined by the tyres fitted
es are modified, the effectiveness of the ABS
(TCS)*
em prevents the drive wheels from
s accelerating.
he traction control system during acceleration
help prevent the drive wheels of front-wheel
during acceleration. The system works in the
tion with ABS. If a malfunction should occur in
ut of action.
oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
tically when the engine is started. If necessary,
hing the button on the centre console.
ng lamp is lit. The TCS should normally be left
in exceptional circumstances, when slipping of
it be disconnected for example
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 184 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS (ABS and TCS)
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking
during braking.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle’s active
safety system.
How the ABS works
If one of the wheels is turns too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is
close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel.
The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or
more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has inter-
vened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed
so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not pump.
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is
retained as the wheels do not lock.
However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all
conditions. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel
or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface.
WARNING
The anti-lock brake syste and wet roads are dangerous working (to counteract locke speed immediately to suit th extra safety features tempt y
The effectiveness of ABS page 230.
If the running gear or brak could be severely limited.
Traction control system
The traction control syst
spinning when the car i
Description and operation of t (TCS)
TCS reduces engine power to
drive vehicles losing traction
entire speed range in conjunc
the ABS, the TCS will also be o
TCS helps the vehicle to start m
pery conditions where this ma
The TCS is switched on automa
it may be turned on or off pus
When the TCS is off, the warni
switched on at all times. Only
the wheels is required, should
WARNING (continued)
Intelligent technology 185
Safety Fir Technical Data
ing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the
drive torque than it could transmit. This causes
on the front shaft, resulting in understeering or
g the ESP sensors and signals, to detect and
the inner wheel thus counteracting the excess
is means that the path requested by the driver
ombination with the ESP and is always active,
ol, TCS, is disconnected.
ation programme (ESP)*
tion programme increases the
e road.
rogramme helps to reduce the danger of skid-
rogramme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL, TCS and endations.
m (ESP)*
idding by braking the wheels individually.
wheel angle and road speed to calculate the
by the driver, and constantly compares them
the vehicle. If the desired course is not being
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 185 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
With compact temporary spare wheel.
When using the snow chains.
When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces
When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by rocking.
The TCS should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.
WARNING
It must be remembered that TCS cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by TCS tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution In order to ensure that TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the ABS and TCS.
XDS*
Driveshaft differential
When taking a bend, the driveshaft differential mechanism allows the outer
wheel to turn at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel
which is turning faster (outer wheel) receives less drive torque than the inner
wheel. This may mean that in certain situations the torque provided to the
inner wheel is too high, caus
outer wheel receives a lower
an overall loss of lateral grip
lengthening of the path.
The XDS system is able, usin
correct this effect.
The XDS, via the ESP, brakes
drive torque in this wheel. Th
is more precise,
The XDS system operates in c
even when the traction contr
Electronic stabilis
General notes
The electronic stabilisa
vehicle’s stability on th
The electronic stabilisation p
ding.
The electronic stabilisation p
Steering manoeuvre recomm
Electronic Stabilising Progra
ESP reduces the danger of sk
The system uses the steering
changes of direction desired
with the actual behaviour of
Intelligent technology186
e (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
ting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
d TCS.
(ABS)
vents the wheels locking during braking
ck (EDL)*
al lock helps prevent the loss of trac-
driven wheels starts spinning.
oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
olutions of the drive wheels using the ABS
lt the warning lamp for ABS lights up)
tely 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ-
n wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by
side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the
and distributing more driving force to the other
al.
e braking wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts
to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to
. For this reason, the driver is not informed that
f.
utomatically when the brake has cooled down.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 186 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
maintained (for instance, if the car is starting to skid), then the ESP compen-
sates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel.
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable
condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer, the system will act on the front
wheel on the outside of the turn.
Steering manoeuvre recommendations
This is a complementary safety function included in the ESP This function aids
the driver to better stabilize the vehicle in a critical situation. For example, in
case of sudden braking surface with varied adherence, the vehicle will tend
to destabilize its trajectory to the right to or to the left. In this case the ESP
recognizes the situation and helps the driver with a counter steering
manoeuvre from the power steering.
This function simply provides the driver with a recommended manoeuvre in
critical situations.
The vehicle does not steer itself with this function, the driver has full control
of the vehicle at all times.
WARNING
It must be remembered that ESP cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution In order to ensure that ESP functions correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
Modifications to the vehicl
gear or any components affec
ciency of the ABS, EDL, ESP an
Anti-lock brake system
The anti-lock brake system pre
page 184.
Electronic differential lo
The electronic differenti
tion caused if one of the
EDL helps the vehicle to start m
pery conditions where this ma
The system will control the rev
sensors (in case of an EDL fau
page 77.
At speeds of up to approxima
ences in the speed of the drive
a slippery road surface on one
wheel which has lost traction
driven wheel via the differenti
To prevent the disc brake of th
out automatically if subjected
function normally without EDL
the EDL has been switched of
The EDL will switch on again a
Intelligent technology 187
Safety Fir Technical Data
lly designed to complement the superior engine
s the car exceptional handling and performance
l roads and in more difficult conditions, such as
, your car will have plenty of traction in winter
ndard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend
tyres should be fitted on all four wheels when
pected, mainly because this will give a better
are mandatory, this also applies to cars with
rive, all four tyres must have the same rolling
e, you should always adjust your speed to suit e extra safety features tempt you into taking re to do so could result in an accident.
f your vehicle is limited by the tyres’ grip. rent from a vehicle without four-wheel drive. e too fast on icy or slippery roads just because ration in these conditions. Failure to do so
d that the front wheels may start to aqua- the road if the car is driven too fast. If this
e no sudden increase in engine speed when rn the driver, as with a front-wheel drive car.
mentioned above, always choose a driving
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 187 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow, press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to spin. This could impair the vehicle’s stability.
Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the EDL page 208.
The traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the
car is accelerating page 184.
Four-wheel drive*
On four-wheel drive models, the engine power is distributed
to all four wheels
General notes
The four-wheel-drive system operates completely automatically. The propul-
sion force is distributed among the four wheels and adapted to the driving
style and the road conditions.
The four-wheel drive is specia
power. This combination give
capabilities both on norma
snow and ice.
Winter tyres
Thanks to its four-wheel drive
conditions, even with the sta
that winter tyres or all-season
winter road conditions are ex
braking response.
Snow chains
On roads where snow chains
four-wheel drive.
Changing tyres
On vehicles with four-wheel d
circumference page 235.
WARNING
Even with four-wheel driv the conditions. Do not let th any risks when driving. Failu
The braking capability o Vehicle behaviour is no diffe So do not be tempted to driv the car still has good accele could result in an accident.
On wet roads bear in min plane and lose contact with should happen, there will b aquaplaning begins to wa For this reason and for that
Intelligent technology188
se, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads
.
irt to build up on the brake pads and corrosion
is used infrequently, or if you only drive low
akes very much.
uently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is
and disks by braking firmly a few times from a
.
d ever increase suddenly, this may mean that
as failed. Drive immediately to the nearest qual-
ault rectified. On the way to the dealer, be
e on the brake pedal, and allow for longer stop-
brake system if the brake fluid level is too low.
red electronically.
pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The
the engine is running.
s to clean off deposits on the pads and discs, re not to inconvenience or endanger other
ot move while in neutral, when the motor is ld result in an accident.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 188 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
speed suitable for the road conditions. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Brakes
What factors can have a negative effect on the brakes?
New brake pads
New brake pads do not provide optimal performance during the first 400 km
they must be run in. However, the reduced braking capacity may be
compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid over-
loading the brakes during run-in.
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and
the conditions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for
instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts
and stops.
Wet roads; road salt
When the velocity is over 80 km/h windscreen wipers are on, the brake
system moves the pads towards the brake discs for a few seconds. This
occurs — without warning to the driver — at regular intervals and requires a
more rapid response from the brakes when driving on wet roads.
In certain conditions, such as in heavy rain, or after washing the car or driving
through water, the full braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or in winter
by ice) on the discs and brake pads. The brakes should be dried by pressing
the pedal to restore full braking effect.
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the car is
driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot of salt
on the road in winter. In this ca
has to wear off before braking
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for d
to form on the discs if the car
mileages without using the br
If the brakes are not used freq
advisable to clean off the pads
moderately high speed
Faults in the brake system
If the brake pedal travel shoul
one of the two brake circuits h
ified workshop and have the f
prepared to use more pressur
ping distances.
Low brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the
The brake fluid level is monito
Brake servo
The brake servo amplifies the
brake servo works only when
WARNING
When applying the brake select a clear, dry road. Be su road users. Risk of accident.
Ensure the vehicle does n stopped. Failure to do so cou
WARNING (continued)
Intelligent technology 189
Safety Fir Technical Data
will be required than usual. The fault should be
shop as soon as possible.
work if the engine is off. In this case the steering
rning limit when the car is stationary, this will
e power steering system. Turning the steering
d on the system, which causes noise. It will also
e engine.
do not turn the steering wheel to its limit for
rwise, there is a risk of damaging the power
uld fail at any time or the engine is switched off
ed), the car can still be steered. However, more
the steering wheel.
malfunctioning, please take the car to a quali-
ssible.
es a special hydraulic fluid. The container is
rtment (front left). The correct fluid level in the
power steering to function properly. The
d at the Inspection Service.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 189 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Caution Never let the brakes drag by leaving your foot on the pedal when you do
not really intend to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-
ping distances and greater wear.
Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed
and change to a lower gear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear position
if your car has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking
and prolongs the service life of the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes,
it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously.
Note If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle
has to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder
to make up for the lack of servo assistance.
If you wish to equip the car with accessories such as a front spoiler or
wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not
obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.
Power steering (servotronic*)
The power steering assists the driver when turning the
steering wheel (with the engine running).
The power steering assists the driver by reducing the force needed to turn the
steering wheel. In cars equipped with servotronic* power steering the degree
of power assistance is regulated electronically according to road speed.
The power steering will keep on working even if the servotronic* device fails.
The degree of power assistance will, however, no longer adapt to different
speeds. If the electronic regulating system is not working properly, this is
most noticeable when turning the steering wheel at low speeds (for instance
when parking) more effort
corrected by a qualified work
The power steering does not
wheel is very hard to turn.
If the steering is held at its tu
place an excessive load on th
wheel to its limit places a loa
reduce the idling speed of th
Caution When the engine is running,
more than 15 seconds. Othe
steering.
Note If the power steering sho
(for instance when being tow
effort will be required to turn
If the system is leaking or
fied workshop as soon as po
The power steering requir
located in the engine compa
reservoir is important for the
hydraulic fluid level is checke
Driving and the environment190
ing distance
raking distance are influenced by
oad conditions.
pends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate
ends to a great extent on the conditions under
and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often
rt distances or have a sporty driving style, we
thickness of your brake pads checked by an
re frequently than recommended in the Service
r example, after crossing water areas, in heavy
the car, the effect of the brakes is lessened as
n frozen (in winter): The brakes should be
to restore full braking effect.
d faults in the brake system increase the risk
run in and do not have the correct friction ever, the reduced braking capacity may be the brake pedal a little harder. This also s are fitted.
, or if you are driving on roads which have g power may set in later than normal.
s are excessively used, they will overheat. teep stopes, it is advisable to reduce speed r gear (or move the selector lever to a lower
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 190 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Driving and the environment
Running-in
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1,500 km.
Up to 1,000 kilometres
Do not drive faster than two thirds of top speed.
Do not accelerate hard.
Avoid high engine revolutions.
Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 km
Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed
or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is
greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.
For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consumption,
reduced.
Braking effect and brak
The braking effect and b
driving situations and r
The efficiency of the brakes de
of wear of the brake pads dep
which the vehicle is operated
drive in town traffic, drive sho
recommend that you have the
Authorised Service Centre mo
Schedule.
If you drive with wet brakes, fo
rainfall or even after washing
the brake discs are wet or eve
dried by pressing the pedal
WARNING
Longer braking distances an of accidents.
New brake pads must be during the first 400 km. How compensated by pressing on applies when new brake pad
If brakes are wet or frozen been gritted with salt, brakin
On steep stopes, if brake Before driving down a long s and change down into a lowe
Driving and the environment 191
Safety Fir Technical Data
to start it, use jump leads if necessary
n running or loss of power when the vehicle is
diately and have the vehicle inspected at the
In general, the exhaust warning lamp will light
symptoms occur page 73. If this happens,
haust system and escape into the environment.
so be damaged by overheating.
hes very high temperatures! Fire hazard!
talytic converter could come into contact with terials under the vehicle.
underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the verter or the heat shields on the exhaust ld catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.
because the irregularity of the fuel supply may
allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust
verheating and damage the catalytic converter.
nvironment rol system is working perfectly, there may be a
aust under some conditions. This depends on
el used. Quite often the problem can be solved
rand.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 191 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
gear if your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.
Never let the brakes rub by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.
Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.
Very heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This impairs the braking effect.
Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Observe the relevant instructions before purchasing accessories page 208, Technical modifications.
If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider- ably. Contact a qualified workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary journeys.
Exhaust gasses purification system
Catalytic converter*
To conserve the useful life of the catalytic converter
Always use unleaded petrol.
Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.
For engine oil changes, do not top the reservoir up page 218,
Topping up engine oil .
Never tow the vehicle
page 262.
If you notice misfiring, uneve
moving, reduce speed imme
nearest qualified workshop.
up when any of the described
unburnt fuel can enter the ex
The catalytic converter can al
WARNING
The catalytic converter reac
Never park where the ca dry grass or inflammable ma
Do not apply additional exhaust pipes, catalytic con system. These materials cou
Caution Never fully drain the fuel tank
cause ignition problems. This
system, which could cause o
For the sake of the e Even when the emission cont
smell of sulphur from the exh
the sulphur content of the fu
by changing to another fuel b
WARNING (continued)
Driving and the environment192
0-15%. Next, we provide you with some tips in
ation and, at the same time, save money.
ances
accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-
ten and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible,
engaged, for example, if you see a red light
erves brakes and tyres from wear; the emis-
re reduced to zero (disconnection out of
rgy
l is to change up quickly through the gears.
m in the lower gears uses an unnecessary
first to second gear as quickly as possible. We
ssible, you change to a higher gear upon
e in moderation and avoid the kick-down
the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel
ns and noise levels all increase very rapidly at
erate speeds will help to save fuel.
he engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level
ith a long red phase. The fuel saved after only
n the amount of fuel needed to restart the
ime to warm up when it is running at idling
ollutant emissions are also especially high
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 192 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Diesel engine particulate filter*
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced
by burning diesel.
The diesel engine dust filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas
system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. If the driving
conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example, multiple short
trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the indicator for
the diesel engine particulate filter indicator will light. See under Warning
Lights.
WARNING
The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under- neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.
Caution The vehicle is not designed for refuelling with mixtures of FAME fuel
(biodiesel) over 7% in accordance with DIN 51628. The diesel particle filter is
damaged when this mixture percentage is exceeded.
Economical and ecological driving
Economical and environmental driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes
and tyres depends in large part on your driving style. By adopting an econom-
ical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can easily
reduce fuel consumption by 1
order to help reduce contamin
Driving ahead of the circumst
A vehicle uses most fuel when
tion, you have to brake less of
let the vehicle roll with a gear ahead. The braking effect pres
sions and fuel consumption a
inertia).
Change gear early to save ene
An effective way of saving fue
Running the engine at high rp
amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: Change from
recommend that, whenever po
reaching 2,000 rpm.
Automatic gearbox: Accelerat
position.
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at
consumption, exhaust emissio
higher speeds. Driving at mod
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off t
crossings or at traffic lights w
30 — 40 seconds is greater tha
engine.
The engine takes a very long t
speed. Mechanical wear and p
Driving and the environment 193
Safety Fir Technical Data
xtra wind resistance caused by the roof carrier
nator, which produces electricity. With the need
on is also increased. Because of this, always
when you do not need them. Examples of equip-
ity are: the fan at high speeds, the rear window
ness
top priority in the design, choice of materials
eat.
ical recycling
signed for ease of dismantling
acilitate dismantling
rade materials
ers are labelled in accordance with ISO 1043,
can be recycled
rouped together for easy recycling
n manufacture
olatile components
conditioning
aterials laws: cadmium, asbestos, lead,
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 193 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately
after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Periodic maintenance
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you
will not waste fuel. A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting gases, the engine and
the exhaust filtration systems should reach the optimum service tempera- ture.
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine
does not warm up and fuel consumption does not regularise until having
driven some four kilometres. This is the reason why we recommend avoiding
short trips wherever possible.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the
tyre pressures are just 1 bar too low, this can put the fuel consumption up by
as much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also
increases tyre wear and impairs handling.
The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.
Do not use winter tyres all through the year: they will increase fuel consump-
tion by up to 10%.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Every kilo of extra weight will put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth
checking the luggage compartment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-
essary loads are being transported.
A roof carrier is often left in place for the sake of convenience, even when it is
no longer needed. At a speed of 100-120 km/h your car will use about 12%
more fuel as a result of the e
even when it is empty.
Save electrical energy
The engine activates the alter
for electricity, fuel consumpti
turn off electrical equipment
ment that use a lot of electric
heating or the seat heaters*.
Environmental friendli
Environmental protection is a
and production of your new S
Design measures for econom
Joints and connections de
Modular construction to f
Increased use of single-g
Plastic parts and elastom
ISO 11469 and ISO 1629
Choice of materials
Nearly all materials used
Similar types of plastics g
Recycled materials used i
Reduction of the plastic v
CFC-free refrigerant in air
Compliance with prohibited m mercury, chrome VI.
Driving and the environment194
dlights
d drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or
ped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming
apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight
available in your Authorised Service Centre.
headlights, the rotation system must previ-
this, please go to a specialist workshop.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 194 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Manufacturing methods
Use of recycled material for manufacturing plastic parts
Solvent-free cavity sealing
Solvent-free wax for protecting the vehicles in transit
Solvent-free adhesives
No CFCs used in production
Surplus materials used extensively for energy conversion and building
materials
Overall water consumption reduced
Heat recovery systems
Water-soluble paint
Driving abroad
Observations
To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:
For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is
available for the journey. See the chapter Refuelling. Automobile organisa-
tions will have information about service station networks selling unleaded
fuel.
In some countries it is possible that a vehicle model is sold under condi-
tions where some spare parts are not available or that the Authorised Service
Centres may only carry out limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the
technical preparation of your vehicle and also about necessary maintenance
and repair possibilities.
Adhesive strips for hea
If you have to drive a right-han
vice versa, the asymmetric dip
traffic.
To prevent dazzling, you must
lenses. Further information is
In vehicles with self-directing
ously be disconnected. To do
Trailer towing 195
Safety Fir Technical Data
s and draw bar weights that are given on the
ket are for certification purposes only. The
ic model, which may be lower than these figures
ven in the registration documents Section
so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as
trailer must be secured to prevent them
um permissible pressure shown on the sticker
flap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in
anufacturer’s recommendations.
nough of the road behind the trailer with the
t the case, you should have additional mirrors
hould be mounted on hinged extension
o give sufficient vision to the rear.
trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.
ditional demands on the vehicle. We recom-
ween the normal inspection intervals if the
towing a trailer.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 195 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Trailer towing
Instructions to follow
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip-
ment.
If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already have
the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements
for towing a trailer. For the after-market fitting of a trailer towing bracket see
page 197.
Connectors
Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection
between the trailer and the vehicle.
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is
available in any SEAT dealer.
Trailer weight / draw bar loading
Never exceed the authorised towing limit. If you do not load the trailer up to
the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly
steeper slopes.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to
1,000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and
therefore the vehicle’s climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced
air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The
weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for
every further 1,000 m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the
actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer.
When possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted draw bar weight on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified
limit.
The figures for trailer weight data plate of the towing brac
correct figures for your specif
for the towing bracket, are gi
Technical data.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer
possible. Loads carried in the
moving.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maxim
on the inside of the fuel tank
accordance with the trailer m
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see e
standard mirrors. If this is no
fitted. Both exterior mirrors s
brackets. Adjust the mirrors t
WARNING
Never transport people in a
Note Towing a trailer places ad
mend additional services bet
vehicle is used frequently for
Trailer towing196
trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For
to drive at the maximum permissible speed in
r or wind conditions. This applies especially
ed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest
top the snaking by increasing speed.
the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the
, firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be
cking. Select a low gear in due course before
This enables you to use the engine braking to
during prolonged ascents, driving in a low gear
s monitor the temperature indicator for the
am*
ier to stabilise the trailer in case it skids or
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 196 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your
country.
Ball coupling of towing bracket*
Depending on the model version, the spherical head on the trailer hook may
be stored in the tool box.
The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the
ball coupling of the towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing injury.
Note By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed
and it obscures the number plate.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very
unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow
for the unbalanced weight distribution.
Speed
The stability of the vehicle and
this reason, it is advisable not
an unfavourable road, weathe
when driving downhill.
You should always reduce spe
sign of snaking. Never try to s
Always brake in due course. If
brakes gently at first and then
caused by the trailer wheels lo
going down a steep downhill.
slow down the vehicle.
Reheating
At very high temperatures and
and high engine speed, alway
coolant page 53.
Electronic Stabilisation Progr
The ESP* system makes it eas
swings.
Trailer towing 197
Safety Fir Technical Data
Fig. 154 Attachment points for towing bracket
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 197 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Fitting a towing bracket*
It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.
Trailer towing198
correctly installed, there is serious danger of
se observe the instructions provided by the racket.
correctly installed, this could cause damage to
.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 198 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be
completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points for the towing bracket are on the lower part of the
vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should
never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle and
including the maximum resting weight.
Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:
65 mm (minimum)
350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
344 mm
531 mm
1,044 mm
1,040 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore,
before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre
to check whether your cooling system needs modification.
Submit to the legal requirements in your country (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-
rate warning lamp).
Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and
reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a
torque wrench, and an electrical socket must be connected to the vehicle’s
electrical system. The above-mentioned require specialized knowledge and
tools.
Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment
points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.
WARNING
Towing brackets should be fitted by specialists.
If the towing bracket is in accident.
For your own safety, plea manufacturer of the towing b
Caution If the electrical socket is in
the vehicle’s electrical system
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
WARNING (continued)
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 199
Safety Fir Technical Data
ain products may produce noxious vapours; ventilated areas.
e, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other ic and highly flammable. Risk of fire and explo-
icle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch andbrake firmly and remove the key from the
, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.
e for cleaning purposes. This could damage the
your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty
nvironment ts for your vehicle maintenance, select the ones
environment.
re products should not be disposed of with ordi-
rve the disposal information on the package.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 199 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle
General notes
Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your
vehicle.
Your vehicle maintenance
Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may
also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the
event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.
The best way to protect the car against environmental contaminants is to
wash and wax it frequently. The longer substances such as insects remains,
bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or
road salt and other aggressive materials remain on the vehicle, the more
damage they do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance in strong
sunlight) further intensify the corrosive effect.
After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have the
underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
Products for vehicle maintenance
Car care products are available in your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the
product instructions until you have used them up.
WARNING
Car care products can be toxic. For this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or
your vehicle. The use of cert they should be used in well
Never use fuel, turpentin volatile fluids. These are tox sion.
Before washing your veh the engine off, apply your h ignition.
Caution Never attempt to remove dirt
Never use a dry cloth or spong
paintwork or the windows of
of water.
For the sake of the e When purchasing produc
which are not harmful to the
The leftovers of the car ca
nary household waste. Obse
WARNING (continued)
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle200
plenty of water and rinse it off.
top to bottom with a soft sponge, a glove
ht pressure.
ve often with clean water.
ould only be used for very stubborn dirt.
anels etc. until last with a different
ughly with water.
gently with a chamois leather.
ld, dry the rubber seals and its surfaces
eezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber
avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry
effect and braking distancethe brakes by
nition switched off.
rms from cuts on sharp metal edges when inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 200 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Vehicle exterior maintenance
Automatic car wash tunnel
The car can normally be washed without problem in an auto-
matic car wash.
The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the car can normally be washed
without problems in an automatic car washing tunnel. However, the paint-
work wear depends to a large extent, on the kind of the car washing tunnel,
the brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative
products.
Before going through a car wash, be sure to take the usual precautions such
as closing the windows and sunroof. There is nothing to note apart from that.
If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof carrier or two-
way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car washing tunnel oper-
ator.
After washing, the brakes could hesitate to respond as the brake discs and
pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by braking
several times.
WARNING
Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of acci- dent.
Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Washing by hand
Vehicle washing
First soften the dirt with
Clean your vehicle from
or a brush. Use very lig
Rinse the sponge or glo
Special car shampoo sh
Clean the wheels, sill p
sponge or glove.
Rinse the vehicle thoro
Dry your vehicle surface
When temperature is co to prevent them from fr
seals.
After washing
Directly after washing,
page 190, Braking
braking several times.
WARNING
Wash your car with the ig
Protect your hands and a cleaning the underbody, the injury.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 201
Safety Fir Technical Data
distance for soft materials and painted
sure cleaner to remove ice or snow from
d jet nozzles (rotating jets) .
avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry
s by braking several times.
concentrated jet (rotating nozzle). Even at d short cleaning times, visible and invisible es. This may cause an accident.
e brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of
an 60C. This could damage the vehicle.
ehicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive
es, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This is
ainted as the paintwork. The closer the nozzle is
e wear on the material.
nce requirements
s the paintwork.
r car if water does not form small drops and run
lean.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 201 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident.
Caution Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a
dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork
or glass on your vehicle.
Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle with
a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the
doors, tailgate, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.
For the sake of the environment To protect environment, the car should be washed only in specially provided
wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the sewerage
system. In some districts, washing vehicles outside wash bays is prohibited.
Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the car with a high pressure cleaner
Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!
Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,
particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance.
Increase the spraying
bumpers.
Do not use a high pres
windows page 202.
Never use concentrate
Directly after washing,
page 190 the brake
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a large spraying distances an damage can occur to the tyr
Water, ice and salt on th accident.
Caution Do not use water hotter th
To avoid damage to the v
materials such as flexible hos
also important for bumpers p
to the surface, the greater th
Vehicle paint maintena
Regular waxing protect
You need to apply wax to you
off the paintwork when it is c
WARNING (continued)
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle202
c parts.
n plastic parts, clean them with approved
nd care products.
ner directly over the air vents of the vehicle may
e liquid is accidentally spilled.
ontain solvents will damage the material.
exterior mirrors
ith commercially available, alcohol based
clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.
ove snow from the windows and mirrors.
eather to dry the windows. The chamois
ces are not suitable to clean windows because
sits which could smear the windows.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 202 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
A good quality hard wax product is available from your Authorised Service
Centre.
Regular wax applications help to protect the paintwork from environmental
contaminants page 199. It is also effective in protecting against minor
scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the car washing tunnel, it is advis-
able to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot
be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased in
your Authorised Service Centre.
The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax
compounds to seal the paint page 201, Vehicle paint maintenance
requirements.
Caution To prevent damage to the paintwork:
Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or
on plastic parts.
Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
Solvents damage plasti
If normal washing fails to clea
solvent-free plastic cleaning a
Caution The use of liquid air freshe
damage the plastic parts if th
Cleaning products which c
Cleaning windows and
Cleaning windows
Moisten the windows w
glass cleaner.
Dry the windows with a
Removing snow
Use a small brush to rem
Removing ice
Use a de-icer spray.
Use a clean cloth or chamois l
leathers used on painted surfa
they are soiled with wax depo
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 203
Safety Fir Technical Data
nce
looked after, they will not freeze so
ove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.
product to the rubber seals.
ows, bonnet and rear lid will remain pliable and
with a suitable care product (for example sili-
lso prevent premature ageing and leaks. The
f rubber seals are well looked after, they will not
can freeze up in winter.
ou should only use spray with lubricating and
th a damp cloth.
ith a soft, dry cloth.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 203 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push
it in one direction only without swinging it.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and sili-
cone deposits off.
Wax deposits can be removed with a special cleaner available in your Author-
ised Service Centre. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper
blades to judder. If a window cleanser, specifically for removing wax, is added
to the windscreen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering. Wax
deposits are not removed.
Caution Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and
mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!
The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the
window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers on the heating elements
inside the window.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades are essential to provide clear vision.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen
wiper blades.
2. Use window cleanser to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use
a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn stains.
Rubber seals maintena
If rubber seals are well
quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to rem
2. Apply a specialist care
The strips on the doors, wind
last longer if they are treated
cone spray).
Caring for rubber seals will a
doors will be easier to open. I
freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders
To de-ice the lock cylinders y
anti-corrosive properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts wi
2. Polish chrome parts w
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle204
s
st from alloy wheels.
ent to clean the wheel rims.
ound to the wheels.
ttention to preserve their appearance. If road
ten removed, the aluminium finish will be
ent for alloy wheel rims.
ents should not be used. If the protective
tone impact, the damaged area should be
ylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances ible and invisible damage can occur to the
ident.
brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of ing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry and braking distancethe brakes by braking
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 204 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains and coatings from the
surface.
Caution To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
Never use an abrasive care product on chrome.
Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.
Steel wheel rims
Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.
Use an industrial cleanser to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on
steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry page 190, Braking effect and braking distancethe brakes by braking several times.
Cleaning alloy wheel rim
Every two weeks
Wash salt and brake du
Use an acid free deterg
Every three months
Apply a hard wax comp
Alloy wheels require regular a
salt and brake dust are not of
impaired.
Always use an acid-free deterg
Car polish or other abrasive ag
coating is damaged, e.g. by s
repaired immediately.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a c and short cleaning times, vis tyres. This may cause an acc
Water, ice and salt on the accident. Directly after wash page 190, Braking effect several times.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 205
Safety Fir Technical Data
is usually removed if the engine compartment
ing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.
k, ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and
mpartment are given anti-corrosion treatment.
ine compartment, always observe the safety
et, switch the engine off, apply the parking ove the key from the ignition.
before you clean the engine compartment.
underbody, wheel arches without protecting ay cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. lt in injury.
the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk shing, avoid sudden and sharp braking.
fan. It is temperature-controlled and could en the key is removed from the ignition!
nvironment could be removed when the engine is washed.
leaned in an oil separator. For this reason,
rried out only by a qualified workshop or a petrol
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 205 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Underbody sealant
The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical
and mechanical damage.
The protective coating can be damaged when driving. We recommend you to
ckeck the protective coating under the body and on the running gear, and
reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.
We recommend you to go to your Authorised Service Centre to carry out repair
work and additional anti-corrosion work.
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite! Fire hazard.
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-
corrosion treatment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the car is
frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,
the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and
after winter.
Your Authorised Service Centre has got the necessary equipment to provide
the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we recommend
having this work performed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection
is cleaned with grease remov
On commissioning theis wor
components in the engine co
WARNING
When working in the eng warnings page 213.
Before opening the bonn brake firmly and always rem
Allow the engine to cool
Do not clean the vehicle your hands and arms. You m Failure to comply could resu
Moisture, ice and salt on of accident. Directly after wa
Never touch the radiator start automatically, even wh
For the sake of the e Fuel, grease and oil deposits
The polluted water must be c
engine washing should be ca
station.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle206
bric trim cleaning
m on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned
r or with dry foam and a soft brush.
climate controls
ate controls, use a soft damp cloth. For more
olution may be used.
ollen cloth with water and wipe over the
be removed using a mild soap solution
ablespoons diluted in one litre of water)
k through the leather or soak into the
ft, dry cloth.
reated twice a year with a special leather-
in your Authorised Service Centre.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 206 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Vehicle interior maintenance
Plastic parts and dash panel cleaning
Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash
panel.
If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special
solvent-free plastic cleaning product.
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel and the airbag module surface with cleansers containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the airbag triggered, disintegrating plastic parts could cause substantial inju- ries.
Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Wooden trim cleaning*
Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.
If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap
solution.
Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cloth seat covers and fa
Cloth seat covers and fabric tri
with a special interior cleanse
Cleaning the radio and
To clean the radio and/or clim
resistant dirt, a neutral soap s
Leather cleaning*
Normal cleaning
Moisten a cotton or wo
leather surfaces.
Cleaning stubborn stains
More stubborn dirt can
(pure liquid soap; two t
and a cloth.
Do not let the water soa
seams.
Then wipe off with a so
Leather maintenance
The leather should be t
care product, available
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 207
Safety Fir Technical Data
lt up until it is dry.
ts, it will not retract correctly into the automatic
ning agents on the seat belts, as this can ebbing. Ensure that belts do not come into .
ition at regular intervals. If you notice that the ctor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is replaced by a specialist workshop.
a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.
ts to dry completely before rolling them up.
could become damaged.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 207 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Apply these products very sparingly.
Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
SEAT does everything possible to preserve the genuine qualities of this
natural product. Due to the natural properties of the specially selected hides
employed, the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, etc.
so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking after the
leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If
the vehicle is under solar radiation for long periods, the leather should be
protected to prevent it from fading. However, slight colour variations in high-
quality natural leather are normal.
Caution Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar
products on leather.
To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a qualified
workshop.
Seat belts cleaning
A dirty belt may not work properly.
Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.
Seat belts cleaning
Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.
Clean the dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.
Allow it to dry.
Do not roll the seat be
If large stains form on the bel
belt retractor.
WARNING
Do not use chemical clea impair the strength of the w contact with corrosive fluids
Check all seat belts cond belt webbing, fittings, retra damaged, the belt must be
Do not attempt to repair must not be removed or mod
Caution After cleaning, allow seat bel
Otherwise, the belt retractors
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications208
r the CE mark (European Union manufacturer
phone holders or drink holders, should never ithin the working range of the airbags. Other- ry if the airbag is triggered in an accident.
tions
ys be carried out according to our
the electronic components or software in the
ns. Due to the way the electronic components
s, other indirect systems may be affected by the
ir safety, lead to excessive wear of compo-
r vehicle registration documents.
es cannot be held liable for any damage
or work incorrectly performed.
d you that all work should be performed by an
ng genuine and SEAT approved parts and
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 208 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications
Accessories and parts
Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before
purchasing accessories and parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.
Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical
changes to your car, we recommend you to consult your Authorised Service
Centre.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information
about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-
turer regarding accessories and parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in
question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Authorised Service Centres have
the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and
professionally installed.
Despite a continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess
the reliability, safety and suitability of those parts SEAT has not approved. For
this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts
used, even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or
are covered by an official approval certificate.
Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the
vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-
controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the
European Union’s authorisation symbol).
If any additional electrical components are fitted so that they do not serve to
control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator
fan, etc.), then they must bea
conformity declaration).
WARNING
Accessories, for example tele be fitted on the covers of, or w wise, there is a danger of inju
Technical modifica
Modifications must alwa
specifications.
Unauthorised modifications to
vehicle may cause malfunctio
are linked together in network
faults. This can seriously impa
nents, and also invalidate you
SEAT Authorised Service Centr
caused by modifications and/
For this reason, we recommen
Authorised Service Centre usi
accessories.
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 209
Safety Fir Technical Data
arily on driving. If you are distracted while cident.
ne mountings to the surfaces covering the nge of the airbags. There is a high danger of ed.
instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 209 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other kind of work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.
Roof aerial*
The vehicle may be fitted with a foldable* and anti-theft* aerial that may be
positioned parallel to the roof.
To fold down
Unscrew the rod, position parallel to the roof and tighten once again.
To return to working position
Continue in the reverse order to the previous instruction.
Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Mobile telephones and radiotelephones
First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-
phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of
10 watts. Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibil-
ities for retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a qualified
workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
Always concentrate prim driving you could have an ac
Never attach the telepho airbag units or within the ra injury if the airbag is trigger
Note Please observe the operating
radio.
Checking and refilling levels210
e right, until the point of feeling a click.
, without unscrewing the cap, clockwise
se the flap until it clicks into place. The
h an anti-loss attachment
he vehicle on the right.
operated correctly, it will switch itself off as
er attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will
el may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.
vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the
n fuel can be found.
e and can cause serious burns and other inju-
y naked flame when filling the fuel tank of the nister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.
nts for the use of spare fuel canisters.
do not recommend carrying a spare fuel e canister could be damaged in an accident
ances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, points:
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 210 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Checking and refilling levels
Refuelling
The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi-
mately 55 litres. For four-wheel drive vehicles, the tank
capacity is approximately 60 litres.
Unscrewing the tank cap
Lift the lid.
Grip the cap and then insert the key into the lock and rotate 180
to the left.
Unscrew the cap, turning it anti-clockwise.
Closing the tank cap
Screw the tank cap to th
Turn the key in the lock
through 180.
Remove the key and clo
tank cap is secured wit
The tank flap is at the rear of t
If the automatic filler nozzle is
soon as the tank is full. Nev
fill the expansion chamber. Fu
The correct fuel grade for your
fuel tank flap. Further notes o
WARNING
Fuel is highly inflammabl ries.
Never smoke or use an vehicle, or a spare fuel ca
Follow legal requireme
For safety reasons we canister in the vehicle. Th and leak.
If, in exceptional circumst please observe the following
Fig. 155 Tank flap open
Checking and refilling levels 211
Safety Fir Technical Data
are listed on a sticker inside the fuel
ponding to the standard DIN EN 228, may be
ic converters (EN = European Standard).
by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON
r, unit for determining the knock resistance of
ith a higher octane number than the one recom-
ever, this has no advantage in terms of fuel
er.
or your vehicle is specified in your engine tech-
l Data.
may be mixed with small quantities of ethanol.
thanol fuels available at commercial establish-
85, which contain a high percentage of ethanol,
l damage the fuel system.
d fuel would permanently impair the efficiency
ll throttle can damage the engine when using
ower than the correct grade for the engine.
nvironment el would seriously impair the efficiency of the
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 211 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec- trostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to ignite. This may be fatally explosive. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.
Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible.
If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro- static charge building up.
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.
Caution Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.
Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause
misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
cause damage.
For the sake of the environment Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;
this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
Petrol
Petrol types
The correct petrol types
tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol, corres used for vehicles with catalyt
Fuel types are differentiated
= Regulation Octane Numbe
petrol). You may use petrol w
mended for your engine. How
consumption and engine pow
The appropriate type of fuel f
nical table. Section Technica
Caution Petrol that follows EN 228
However, the so-called bioe
ments with reference E50 or E
may not be used, as they wil
Even one tankful of leade
of the catalytic converter.
High engine speed and fu
petrol with an octane rating l
For the sake of the e Just one full tank of leaded fu
catalytic converter.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels212
e can also be consulted to know if the vehicle
el use.
l (biodiesel)
cle using biodiesel maybe somewhat reduced.
icle using biodiesel may be slightly higher.
cold down to approx. -10C.
C, we recommend using winter diesel fuel.
be refuelled with up to a maximum of 7%
ce with standard DIN 51628.
fuel system in vehicles which are not suitably
sel in your vehicle, please use only RME fuel
nt.
oes not meet the required standard, the fuel
peratures and a fuel biodiesel percentage of
in gas emission may occur during operation of
clogged when fuel is changed to biodiesel. For
u that, when having run 300 or 400 km after a
nge must also be done. Also note the instruc-
intenance plan.
arked for more than about two weeks, we
k with biodiesel and driving about 50 km in
injection system.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 212 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Petrol additives
Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.
The quality of the petrol influences running behaviour, performance and
service life of the engine. For this reason, you should use good quality petrol
containing additives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the
fuel system clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.
If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems occur,
the required additives must be added during refuelling.
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN 590 (EN = European standard). It
must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates
the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.
Notes on filling with fuel page 210.
Biodiesel*
The biodiesel fuel must comply with the DIN EN 14.214 (FAME) Standard.
Biodiesel is a methylester obtained from rapeseed oil.
DIN is the German abbreviation for Deutsches Institut fr Normung e.V.,
the German standards institute.
EN means European Norm.
FAME is the English abbreviation for Fatty Acid Methyl Ester.
Your Authorised Service Centr
has been prepared for biodies
Things to note about RME fue
The performance of a vehi
Fuel consumption of a veh
RME fuel is resistant to the
At temperatures below -10
Your vehicle is designed to
blended biodiesel in accordan
Caution RME fuel can damage the
adjusted.
If you decide to use biodie
which is DIN E 14,214 complia
If you use biodiesel that d
filter could become clogged.
Note In case of low exterior tem
higher than 50%, an increase
the independent heating.
The fuel filter may become
this reason, we recommend yo
fuel change, the fuel filter cha
tions in the Inspection and Ma
If the vehicle is to remain p
recommend filling the fuel tan
order to avoid damage to the
Checking and refilling levels 213
Safety Fir Technical Data
gine compartment
working in the engine compartment
the engine compartment or on the
out cautiously.
n the engine or in the engine compart-
nd remove the key from the ignition.
neutral or the selector lever to position P.
cool down.
m the vehicle.
ge 215.
n the engine compartment unless you know
obs and have the correct tools! Have the work
rkshop if you are uncertain.
ables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and
ly developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of
Service Centres concerning modifications. For
ou to have service fluids and consumables
rvice Centre. Please observe the relevant
e engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 213 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Winter driving
Diesel can thicken in winter.
Winter-grade diesel
When using summer-grade diesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at
sub-zero temperatures because the fuel thickens due to wax separation.
Therefore, winter-grade diesel fuel is available in some countries during
the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22C.
In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold
has different temperature characteristics. Check with an Authorised Service
Centre or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel
fuels available.
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter pre-heater, making it well equipped for
operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains operational to
approx. -24C, provided you use winter-grade diesel which is safe to -15C.
However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start
at temperatures of under -24C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for
a while.
Caution Do not mix fuel additives (thinners, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.
Working in the en
Safety instructions on
Any work carried out in
engine must be carried
Before starting any work o
ment:
1. Switch off the engine a
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Move the gear stick to
4. Wait for the engine to
5. Keep children away fro
6. Raise the bonnet pa
You should not do any work i
exactly how to carry out the j
carried out by a qualified wo
All service fluids and consum
batteries, are being constant
information to the Authorised
this reason, we recommend y
replaced by an Authorised Se
instructions page 208. Th
hazardous area .
Checking and refilling levels214
ormed when the engine is started or with the ditional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the ive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and n system. You should also observe the
cal wiring of the ignition system.
loose clothing and long hair do not get e parts. Danger of death. Before starting any e back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting
about pressing the accelerator if a gear is matic or manual gearbox. The vehicle could
ake is applied. Danger of death.
ut on the fuel system or on electrical compo- ollowing safety notes in addition to the above
battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when e alarm will be triggered.
flames.
nguisher on hand.
service fluids, make absolutely certain that you
servoirs. Failure to observe this point will result
ngine damage!
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 214 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
WARNING
All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire.
Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the engine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet.
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
Apply the handbrake and move the gear stick to neutral or selector lever to position P.
Keep children away from the vehicle.
Never touch hot engine parts. There is a risk of burns.
Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire hazard.
Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system, particularly at the points where the jump leads are attached page 263. The battery could explode.
Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and could start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the key removed from the ignition!
Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!
Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.
Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, in the engine compartment.
If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury.
If any work has to be perf engine running, there is an ad rotating parts, such as the dr from the high-voltage ignitio following points:
Never touch the electri
Ensure that jewellery, trapped in rotating engin work remove jewellery, ti clothes.
Always think carefully engaged in either an auto move, even if the handbr
If work has to be carried o nents, you must observe the f warnings:
Always disconnect the this is done, otherwise th
Do not smoke.
Never work near naked
Always have a fire exti
Caution When changing or topping up
fill the fluids into the correct re
in serious malfunctions and e
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 215
Safety Fir Technical Data
t ensure that the windscreen wipers are in
pull the lever under the dashboard
tion indicated (arrow). The bonnet will be
ction .
he release lever (arrow) and open the
y and secure it in fixture designed for this
f you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping nt.
Fig. 157 Arrester hook for bonnet.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 215 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
For the sake of the environment Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you
should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you
find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a qualified
workshop.
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.
Before opening the bonne
rest position.
To release the bonnet,
fig. 156 in the direc
released by a spring a
Lift the bonnet using t
bonnet.
Release the bonnet sta
in the bonnet.
WARNING
Hot coolant can scald!
Never open the bonnet i from the engine compartme
Fig. 156 Detail of foot- well area on driver’s side: lever for unlocking the bonnet.
Checking and refilling levels216
s
st conform with exact specifications.
ial, high quality, multi grade oil that can be
r except for those regions affected by extreme
s essential for the correct operation of the
, when topping up or replacement is necessary
rm to the requirements of the VW standards.
onforming to the VW standards then oil
I standards with an appropriate viscosity at
uld be used instead. The use of this type of oil
on the performance of the engine for example,
consumption and a higher emission level.
ferent oils may be mixed as long as they all
rds) set out in the following page should
service oil; the container will display together
rol and diesel engines, the oil can be used for
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 216 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet, then carefully open the bonnet.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 213.
Closing the bonnet
Raise the bonnet slightly.
Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support.
At a height of about 30 cm let it fall so it is locked.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it once more and
let it fall as before.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.
After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.
If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk of accident.
Engine oil
Engine oil specification
The engine oil used mu
Specifications
The engine comes with a spec
used in all seasons of the yea
cold.
As the use of high quality oil i
engine and its long useful life
use only those oils that confo
If it is not possible to find oil c
conforming to the ACEA or AP
atmospheric temperature sho
may have some repercussions
long starting time, increased
If a top up is required then dif
conform to the VW standards.
The specifications (VW standa
appear on the container of the
the different standards for pet
both types of engines.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 217
Safety Fir Technical Data
climate that is constantly very cold or very
mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration
not covered by the warranty.
end finding an engine oil that conforms to the
ions and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
be available for a top-up if needed.
il level
indicates the level of the oil.
Fig. 159 Engine oil dipstick.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 217 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Oil properties
Viscosity
The viscosity class of the oil is selected according to the diagram.
When the ambient temperature falls outside the limits of the scale for a short
period, an oil change is not required.
Mono-grade oil
Single grade oils are generally not suitable for all year round use, due to
ranges of viscosity21).
These oils are only useful in a
warm.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be
caused by these additives is
Note Before a long trip, we recomm
corresponding VW specificat
correct engine oil will always
Checking the engine o
The engine oil dipstick
Engine type Specification
Petrol VW 501 01/ VW 502 00/ VW 504 00
Diesel VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01
Diesel Engines with Particulate filter
(DPF)a)
a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.
VW 507 00
Fig. 158 Types of oil according to temperature
21) Viscosity: oil density
Checking and refilling levels218
a do not start the engine. This could result
catalytic converter. Contact an Authorised
all quantities of oil.
, read and observe the warnings in
rking in the engine compartment on
ller opening fig. 160.
unts, using the correct oil.
AA
Fig. 160 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 218 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Checking oil level
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the service temperature
is reached then stop.
Wait two minutes.
Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and
insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.
Then pull it out once more and check the oil level page 217,
fig. 159. Top up with engine oil if necessary.
Oil level in area
Do not add oil.
Oil level in area
Oil can be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after zone
Oil level in area
Oil must be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after in zone .
Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the car is used, oil
consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1,000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be
higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be
checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a
journey.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 213
Caution If the oil level is above the are
in damage to the engine and
Service Centre.
Topping up engine oil
Top up gradually with sm
Before opening the bonnet
Safety instructions on wo
page 213.
Unscrew cap from oil fi
Top-up oil in small amo
AA
AB
AA
AC
AA
Checking and refilling levels 219
Safety Fir Technical Data
changed at the intervals given in the
e the engine oil changed by an Authorised
hown in the Maintenance Programme .
if you have the specialist knowledge required!
et, read and observe the warnings tions on working in the engine compartment.
ol down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.
void injuries caused by splashes of oil.
rain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori- m running down your arm.
ly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of is disposed of.
with engine oil. This could result in engine
by the use of such additives would not be
ty.
nvironment roblems, the necessary special tools and
d, we recommend that you have the engine oil
orised Service Centre.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 219 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using
small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before
adding any more oil.
As soon as the oil level is in area , carefully close the cap.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment diagram page 273.
Engine oil specification page 216.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine components when topping up.
Caution If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a qualified work-
shop.
For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in
through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the
exhaust system.
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be
service schedule.
We recommend that you hav
Service Centre.
The oil change intervals are s
WARNING
Only change the oil yourself
Before opening the bonn page 213, Safety instruc
Wait for the engine to co
Wear eye protection to a
When removing the oil d zontal to help prevent oil fro
Wash your skin thorough
Engine oil is poisonous! the reach of children until it
Caution No additives should be used
damage. Any damage caused
covered by the factory warran
For the sake of the e Because of the disposal p
specialist knowledge require
and filter changed by an Auth
AB
AA
AA
Checking and refilling levels220
+ must be added in sufficient quantities to n at the coldest ambient temperatures that ly cold ambient temperatures, the coolant icle to breakdown. As the heater would also
ere is a risk of suffering exposure!
onsiderably inferior corrosion protection. The
ing system can lead to a loss of coolant,
e engine.
(purple) can be mixed with the additive G 12
(red colour) with G 11.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 220 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.
Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It has to be large
enough to hold all the engine oil
Coolant
Coolant specifications
Coolant is a mixture of water and at least 40% coolant addi-
tive.
The cooling system must be filled with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of
our coolant additive G 12+ or an additive with the specification TT-VW 774 F
(it is dyed purple). This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to
-25 C and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It
also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant.
The concentration of coolant must always be at least 40% — even if frost
protection is not required.
If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of
the antifreeze additive G 12+ can be increased. However, the percentage of
coolant additives should not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the frost
protection. It would also reduce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60%
coolant additive will give frost protection to approx. -40 C.
WARNING
The coolant additive is toxic. There is a toxic risk. Always keep the coolant additive in the original container which should be stored out of the reach of children. The same applies to coolant which you have drained off.
The coolant additive G 12 provide anti-freeze protectio can be expected. At extreme could freeze, causing the veh not work in this situation, th
Caution Other additives may give c
resulting corrosion in the cool
causing serious damage to th
The coolant additive G 12+
(red) or G 11. Never mix G12
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 221
Safety Fir Technical Data
th the MIN mark, top up with coolant.
AX mark.
sion tank
n tightly.
pansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding
page 273.
eets the required specifications page 220.
additive if coolant additive G 12+ is not avail-
ter and bring the coolant concentration back up
s possible by putting in the specified additive
nt.
ark. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced
en the engine is hot.
yed purple) may be mixed with G 12 (dyed red)
engine compartment or on the engine must be
ine compartment, always observe the safety
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 221 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Checking the coolant level and topping up
The correct coolant level is important for fault-free func-
tioning of the engine cooling system.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on
page 213.
Opening the coolant expansion tank
Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.
To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the expansion tank with a
thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap .
Checking coolant level
Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the
coolant level.
If the level is undernea
Topping up coolant
Only use new coolant.
Do not fill above the M
Closing the coolant expan
Screw the cap on agai
The position of the coolant ex
engine compartment diagram
Make sure that the coolant m
Do not use a different type of
able. In this case use only wa
to the correct level as soon a
page 220.
Always top up with new coola
Do not fill above the MAX m
out of the cooling system wh
The coolant additive G 12+ (d
and also with G 11.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the carried out cautiously.
When working in the eng warnings page 213.
Fig. 161 In the engine compartment: Coolant expansion tank cap
Checking and refilling levels222
windscreen wiper blades
he windscreen should always be
.
e headlight washing system are supplied with
her fluid container in the engine compartment.
right-hand side of the engine compartment.
ean the windscreen and headlights. We recom-
roduct to the windscreen washer fluid.
g products exist on the market with high deter-
s, these may be added all-year-round. Please
s on the packaging.
Fig. 162 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 222 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is a burn injury risk.
Caution When mixed with other additives the colour of G 12 will change to brown.
If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do
so will result in engine damage!
If a lot of coolant has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down before
putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large coolant
losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a specialised
workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Otherwise,
there is a risk of engine damage.
Washer fluid and
Topping up washer fluid
The water for cleaning t
mixed with washer fluid
The windscreen washer and th
fluid from the windscreen was
The reservoir is located on the
Plain water is not enough to cl
mend that you always add a p
Approved windscreen cleanin
gent and anti-freeze propertie
follow the dilution instruction
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 223
Safety Fir Technical Data
iper blades
blades are in perfect condition, you
roved visibility. Damaged wiper
ced immediately.
Fig. 163 Windscreen wipers in the service posi- tion
Fig. 164 Changing the front wiper blades
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 223 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 213.
Caution Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen
washer fluid.
Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per
instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes
in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.
Changing windscreen w
If the windscreen wiper
will benefit from an imp
blades should be repla
Checking and refilling levels224
good visibility through all windows!
er blades and all windows regularly.
be changed once or twice a year.
en wipers could scratch the windscreen.
h remover, paint thinner or similar products to
damage the windscreen wiper blades.
n wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This
wipers forward unless they are in the service
t could be damaged.
ved to the service position only when the
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 224 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
To change the blades it is necessary to change the rest position of
the wipers to the service position.
Service position (For changing wiper blades)
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
Turn ignition on and off and then (before approx. 8 seconds have
elapsed), move the windscreen wiper lever to the intermittent
wipe position. The windscreen wipers will move to the service
position.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.
Push the side buttons, free the blade and pull in the direction of
the arrow fig. 164.
Fitting the wiper blade
Insert a blade of identical length and design into the wiper arm.
Slide the blade until it clicks into position.
Push the wiper arms back against the windscreen.
The windscreen wiper arms return to their original position when the ignition
is turned on and the windscreen wiper lever is operated, or when driving
faster than 6 km/h.
If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are damaged,
or cleaned if they are soiled.
If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-
screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a qualified
workshop and corrected if necessary.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have
Clean the windscreen wip
The wiper blades should
Caution Damaged or dirty windscre
Never use fuel, nail varnis
clean the windows. This could
Never move the windscree
could cause damage.
Do not pull the windscreen
position. Otherwise the bonne
Note The wiper arms can be mo
bonnet is properly closed.
Checking and refilling levels 225
Safety Fir Technical Data
y from the glass page 225, fig. 165.
r in the direction of the arrow and remove
, fig. 165.
e top end of the wiper arm.
wn in the page 225, fig. 166 and slide
l it fits into place.
iper blade regularly. Change as required.
es, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned
o a qualified workshop.
e good visibility through all windows!
per blades and all windows regularly.
be changed once or twice a year.
w wiper could scratch the rear window.
h remover, paint thinner or similar products to
en wiper by hand. This could cause damage.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 225 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Changing the rear wiper blade
A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision.
Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the wiper arm awa
Slide the blade adapte
the blade page 225
Fitting the wiper blade
With one hand, hold th
Place the blade as sho
the adapter along unti
Check the condition of the w
If the windscreen wiper scrap if soiled.
If this is not sufficient, refer t
WARNING
Do not drive unless you hav
Clean the windscreen wi
The wiper blades should
Caution A damaged or dirty windo
Never use fuel, nail varnis
clean the window.
Never move the windscre
Fig. 165 Remove rear window wiper blade
Fig. 166 Mount rear window wiper blade
Checking and refilling levels226
n noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
ak in the brake system. A display on the instru-
e brake fluid level is too low page 73.
check the brake fluid level, read and observe
d
m indicates the brake fluid change
the brake fluid changed by an Authorised
lease read and follow the warnings in
g in the engine compartment on page 213 in
rtment.
In the course of time, it will absorb water from
ntent in the brake fluid is too high, the brake
o considerably reduces the boiling point of the
rakes may then cause a vapour lock which
t.
ly brake fluid compliant with the US standard
end the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid.
brake fluid impairs the braking effect.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 226 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the service
schedule.
Read off the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It
should always be between the MIN and MAX marks.
The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment diagram page 273. The brake fluid reservoir has a black and
yellow cap.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the
brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.
However, if the level goes dow
MIN mark, there may be a le
ment panel will warn you if th
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet to the warnings page 213.
Changing the brake flui
The Maintenance Progra
intervals.
We recommend that you have
Service Centre.
Before opening the bonnet, p
Safety instructions on workin
Working in the engine compa
Brake fluid absorbs moisture.
the ambient air. If the water co
system could corrode. This als
brake fluid. Heavy use of the b
could impair the braking effec
It is important that you use on
FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recomm
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous. Old
Fig. 167 In the engine compartment: Brake fluid reservoir cover
Checking and refilling levels 227
Safety Fir Technical Data
the battery
er of injury and chemical burns as well as the working on the battery and the electrical
tect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and
sive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and e batteries. This could spill acid through the m eyes immediately for several minutes with cal care immediately. Neutralize any acid hing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with allowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-
ts and smoking are prohibited. When handling ent, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic
tection
s very corrosive and caustic. Wear protective
ye protection!
, naked lights and smoking are prohibited!
osive mixture of gases is released when the
er charge.
away from acid and batteries!
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 227 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings page 213.
Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.
Complete the brake fluid change according to the Maintenance Program. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.
Caution Brake fluid could damage the paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the
paintwork immediately.
For the sake of the environment Brake fluid must be drained and disposed of in the proper manner observing
environmental regulations.
Battery
Warnings on handling
WARNING
Always be aware of the dang risk of accident or fire when system:
Wear eye protection. Pro particles containing lead.
Battery acid is very corro eye protection. Do not tilt th vents. Rinse battery acid fro clear water. Then seek medi splashes on the skin or clot plenty of water. If acid is sw ately.
Fires, sparks, naked ligh cables and electrical equipm
WARNING (continued)
Wear eye pro
Battery acid i
gloves and e
Fires, sparks
A highly expl
battery is und
Keep children
Checking and refilling levels228
ng in cold conditions for a long period, protect
ezes it will be damaged.
e level
uld be checked regularly in high-
countries and in older batteries.
en the battery cover at the front in
working in the engine compartment on
rnings on handling the battery on
y in the «magic eye» on the top of the
n the window, tap the window gently until
hown in the corresponding engine compart-
e) on the top of the battery changes colour,
l and electrolyte level of the battery.
olourless or bright yellow, the electrolyte level
the battery checked by a qualified workshop.
re used by the workshops for diagnostic
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 228 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause injury.
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.
Keep children away from acid and batteries.
Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch off the light.
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.
Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0
Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.
Never use a defective battery. This may be fatally explosive. Replace a damaged battery immediately.
Caution Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine
is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-
nents.
Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as
the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.
If the vehicle is left standi
the battery from frost. If it fre
Checking the electrolyt
The electrolyte level sho
mileage vehicles, in hot
Open the bonnet and op
Safety instructions on
page 213 in Wa
page 227.
Check the colour displa
battery.
If there are air bubbles i
they disperse.
The position of the battery is s
ment diagram page 273.
The round window (magic ey
depending on the charge leve
If the colour in the window is c of the battery is too low. Have
The colours green and black a
purposes.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 229
Safety Fir Technical Data
nvironment nces such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
iately and must not be disposed of with ordinary
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 229 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Charging and changing the vehicle battery
The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the
inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires
specialist knowledge.
If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long
periods, the battery should be checked by a qualified workshop between the
scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the
battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have the
vehicle battery checked by an Authorised Service Centre where it will be re-
charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a qualified workshop only, as
batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be
charged in a controlled environment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has
special safety features.
Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety spec-
ifications of your vehicle.
WARNING
We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which comply with the standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of 2001.
Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe the warnings in Warnings on handling the battery on page 227.
For the sake of the e Batteries contain toxic substa
must be disposed of appropr
household waste.
Wheels and tyres230
ften not readily visible. If you notice unusual
one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres
be checked immediately by an Authorised
attern
ndicates the direction of rotation on tyres with
rve the direction of rotation indicated when
ees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-
wear.
ximum grip in the first 500 km. Drive particu- f accident.
d tyres. This may cause an accident.
ation or if the vehicle pulls to one side when ediately and check the tyres for damage.
e can be seen on the sticker on the
nflation pressure from the sticker. The
tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2
on the sticker.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 230 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Wheels and tyres
Wheels
General notes
Avoiding damage
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very
slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of
rotation. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly
when you replace them.
When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a
cool, dry and preferably dark location.
Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel
rims.
New tyres
New tyres have to be run in page 190.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre
and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is o
vibrations or the car pulling to
is damaged. The tyres should
Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread p
An arrow on the tyre sidewall i
directional tread. Always obse
fitting the wheel. This guarant
planing, excessive noise and
WARNING
New tyres do not have ma larly carefully to avoid risk o
Never drive with damage
If you notice unusual vibr driving, stop the vehicle imm
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressur
inside of the tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre i
values refer to Summer
bar to the values given
Wheels and tyres 231
Safety Fir Technical Data
ng*
toring system constantly checks the
ensors of the ABS wheels. It operates by
uency spectrum of each wheel.
e genuine SEAT tyres. In addition, check and
ly.
are changed or one or more tyres are changed,
y pressing the SET switch on the central console.
n the event of a loss of pressure by means of
e instrument cluster display. The system uses
epends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure
ach 10C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre
being driven and the tyre pressure will rise
you should only adjust the tyre pressures when
tely at ambient temperature).
re monitoring system works reliably, you should
st the tyre pressures at regular intervals and
eference values) in the system.
bel is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.
re when the tyres are hot. This may damage or accident!
tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and f the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre tyre may burst. Risk of accident!
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 231 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are
cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be
reduced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure
should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a
journey.
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. The slightly raised
pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced .
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking tyre pressure value is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents — particularly at high speeds.
A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!
At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.
If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema- turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Tyre pressure monitori
The tyre pressure moni
pressure of the tyres.
The system uses the speed s
analysing the speed and freq
For optimum performance, us
adjust tyre pressures regular
Whenever the tyre pressures
the system should be Reset b
The system warns the driver i
symbols and messages in th
ESP page 185.
Note that tyre pressure also d
increases about 0.1 bar for e
heats up while the vehicle is
accordingly. For this reason,
they are cold (i.e. approxima
To ensure that the tyre pressu
check and, if necessary, adju
store the correct pressures (r
A tyre pressure information la
WARNING
Never adjust tyre pressu even burst the tyres. Risk of
An insufficiently inflated causes significant heating o bead may be released or the
Wheels and tyres232
dependent on tyre pressure, driving
Fig. 168 Tyre tread wear indicators
Fig. 169 Diagram for changing wheels
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 232 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.
Significant tyre pressure loss
The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure for a least
one tyre is insufficient.
Stop the vehicle.
Switch the engine off.
Check the tyre(s).
Change the wheel if necessary page 240.
Tyre service life
The service life of tyres is
style and fitting.
Wheels and tyres 233
Safety Fir Technical Data
accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!
ed at the latest when the tread is worn down to ilure to do so could result in an accident. Worn h speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater
eds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes heat. This can cause tread separation and tyre
lways observe the recommended tyre pres-
ear, you should have the running gear checked ntre.
oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.
res must be replaced immediately!
nvironment ase fuel consumption.
w you to continue driving even with a
ajority of cases.
nti-puncture22) tyres from the factory indi-
ure on the instrument panel.
country.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 233 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators
page 232, fig. 168, running across the tread. Depending on the make,
there will be six to eight of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on
the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the
positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by
law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indica-
tors). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export
countries .
Tyre pressure
Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.
For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month
page 230.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable
to change them around as shown page 232, fig. 169. All the tyres will then
last for about the same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-
tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results
in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive
wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced
when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of
the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel align-
ment checked by an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
There is a serious danger of
The tyres must be replac the tread wear indicators. Fa tyres do not grip well at hig risk of aquaplaning
At continuously high spe more. This causes it to over blow-out. Risk of accident. A sures.
If tyres show excessive w by an Authorised Service Ce
Keep chemicals such as
Damaged wheels and ty
For the sake of the e Under-inflated tyres will incre
Anti-puncture tyres
Anti-puncture tyres allo
punctured tyre, in the m
Vehicles equipped with a
cate the loss of tyre press
22) Depending upon version and
Wheels and tyres234
of the tyres,
to continue driving even using anti-puncture
severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a tyre
e is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown
uel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.
driving if severe vibrations occur, or if the wheel
ff smoke.
onditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is
speed of 80 km/h is subject to road and bserve legal requirements when doing so.
id manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usual.
les (for example kerbs) or potholes.
g driven in emergency conditions, the driving ired and there is a risk of accident.
not deflate on losing pressure because they
d sides. Therefore defects in the tyre can not be
ion.
used on front tyres used in emergency
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 234 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Driving with anti-puncture tyres (emergency gear)
Leave the ESP/TCS (electronic stabilisation programme)
switched on, or switch on page 185.
Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h maximum).
Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.
Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
Look out for the ESP/TCS intervening often, smoke coming from
the tyres or the smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrating or a clat-
tering noise. If any of these occur, stop the vehicle.
The anti-puncture tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:
DSST, Eufonia, RFT, ROF, RSC, SSR or ZP.
The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are
supported on the sides (emergency driving).
The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can
then drive a maximum of 80 km and if the circumstances are favourable (for
example, low load), even more.
The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should be
checked in a specialist workshop to detect possible damage and replace it if
necessary. We recommend you contact Technical Service. If more than one
tyre is being used under emergency conditions, this reduces the distance
which can be travelled.
Starting driving in emergency conditions
When the loss in tyre pressure is displayed on the instrument panel, this
implies that at least one tyre is being driven in emergency conditions .
End of emergency operation
Do not drive on if:
smoke is coming from one
there is a smell of rubber,
the vehicle vibrates,
there is a rattling noise.
When is it no longer possible tyres?
If one of the tyres has been
has been badly damaged ther
off and cause damage to the f
It is also advisable to stop
starts overheating and gives o
WARNING
When driving in emergency c considerably impaired.
The maximum permitted weather conditions. Please o
Avoid sharp turns and rap
Avoid driving over obstac
If one or more tyres is bein quality of the vehicle is impa
Note The anti-puncture tyres do
are supported on the reinforce
detected with a visual inspect
Snow chains must not be
conditions.
Wheels and tyres 235
Safety Fir Technical Data
as well as the proper facilities for disposing of
e has full information on the technical require-
nging tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
drive, all four tyres must always be fitted with
nd tread pattern, as otherwise the driveline can
ifferences in the wheel speeds. For the same
el with the same tyre dimensions as the normal
e the factory-supplied compact temporary spare
use only wheels and tyres which have been odel. Failure to do so could impair vehicle
e on tyres that are more than six years old. If should drive slowly and with extra care at all
ose with an unknown history of use.
ted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the s could cause them to overheat.
fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size he same tread pattern.
nvironment f according to the laws in the country concerned.
s not generally possible to use the wheels from
apply to wheels of the same model. The use of
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 235 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run-in.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle’s design. The
tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe
handling .
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front
tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations
marked on the sidewall, for example:
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
195 Tyre width in mm
65 Height/width ratio in %
R Tyre construction: Radial
15 Rim diameter in inches
91 Load rating code
T Speed rating
The tyres could also have the following information:
A direction of rotation symbol
Reinforced denotes heavy-duty tyres.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only
on the inner side of the wheel).
DOT… 1103… means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th
week of 2003.
We recommend that work on tyres and wheels is carried out by an Authorised
Service Centre. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary
special tools and spare parts
the old tyres.
Any Authorised Service Centr
ments when installing or cha
On vehicles with four-wheel tyres of the same type, make a
be damaged by continuous d
reason, only use a spare whe
road wheels. You may also us
wheel.
WARNING
We recommend that you approved by SEAT for your m handling. Risk of accident.
Avoid running the vehicl you have no alternative, you times.
Never use old tyres or th
If wheel trims are retrofit brakes is not restricted. Thi
All four wheels must be (rolling circumference) and t
For the sake of the e Old tyres must be disposed o
Note For technical reasons, it i
other vehicles. This can also
Wheels and tyres236
el bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
e the vehicles handling on snow and
es will considerably improve the vehicles
er tyres (width, rubber compound, tread
and snow.
o a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures
e sticker on tank flap).
all four wheels.
er tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle’s regis-
adial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the
pply to winter tyres.
eness when the tread is worn down to a depth
e 235, New tyres and wheels determines the
ter tyres:
hich can exceed the speed rating of the fitted
sticker in the driver’s field of view. These
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 236 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your
model may invalidate the vehicle’s type approval for use on public roads.
If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the
vehicle — for example with winter tyres — you should only use the spare tyre for
a short period of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel
as soon as possible.
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are
fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt
heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the
brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you may not use wheel bolts from a different car —
even if it is the same model page 208.
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become loose while driving. Risk of accident.
The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.
Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.
If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.
Caution The prescribed torque for whe
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will improv
ice.
In winter conditions winter tyr
handling. The design of summ
pattern) gives less grip on ice
Winter tyres must be inflated t
specified for summer tyres (se
Winter tyres must be fitted on
Information on permitted wint tration documents. Use only r
vehicle documentation also a
Winter tyres lose their effectiv
of 4 mm.
The speed rating code pag
following speed limits for win
Q max. 160 km/h
S max. 180 km/h
T max. 190 km/h
H max. 210 km/h
In some countries, vehicles w
tyre must have an appropriate
Wheels and tyres 237
Safety Fir Technical Data
ectly tightened in accordance with the manu- will prevent the chains coming into contact
hains to drive on roads which are free of snow.
ndling, damage the tyres and wear out very
eed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The
ntry should be followed.
sk your Approved Service Centre for information
and snow chain size.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 237 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
stickers are available from your Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-
ments of each country must be followed.
Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with
summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.
If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel
page 235, New tyres and wheels.
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to tyre damage and thus, an accident risk.
For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres in good time. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly
and reduce fuel consumption.
Snow chains
Snow chains are only permitted on the front wheels and only for
tyres195/65R15 and 205/55R16. These tyres may only be fitted with fine-
pitch link chains which do not protrude more than 15 mm page 235.
Snow chains must have fine-pitch links which do not protrude more than 9
mm, including tension device.
Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety
reasons cover caps, available in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be
fitted over the wheel bolts.
Four-wheel drive: where snow chains are compulsory on certain roads, this
normally also applies to cars with four-wheel drive. Snow chains may only be
fitted to the front wheels (also on vehicles with four-wheel drive).
WARNING
Snow chains should be corr facturer’s instructions. This with the wheel housing.
Caution You must remove the snow c
Otherwise they will impair ha
quickly.
Note In some countries, the sp
legal requirements of the cou
We recommend that you a
about appropriate wheel, tyre
If and when238
factory is only designed for changing wheels t attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles .
, level ground.
en the vehicle is on the jack. Risk of accident.
underneath the vehicle, this must be secured e, there is a risk of injury.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 238 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
If and when
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel
Vehicle Tools
The vehicle onboard tools are located under the floor panel in
the luggage compartment.
Lift the cover of the luggage compartment, by pulling it up with a
finger in the fitting.
Take the onboard tools out of the vehicle.
The tool kit includes:
Jack*
Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps*
Box spanner for wheel bolts*
Reversible screwdriver with handle (including hexagonal interior) for the
wheel bolts. The screwdriver is a combination tool.
Towing eye
Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Some of the items listed are only provided in certain models / model years,
or are optional extras.
WARNING
Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten the wheel bolts as with this it is not possible to tighten the bolts to the required torque. Risk of accident.
The jack* supplied by the on this model. On no accoun or other loads. Risk of injury
Use the jack* only on firm
Never start the engine wh
If work is to be carried out by suitable stands. Otherwis
WARNING (continued)
If and when 239
Safety Fir Technical Data
hains must not be used on the compact tempo-
on one of the front wheels when using snow
orary spare in place of one of the rear wheels.
chains to the wheel taken from the rear and use
ctured front wheel.
be checked and corrected as soon as possible. e for dimensions 125/70R16 125/70R18 other tyre dimensions please refer to the label so could result in an accident.
0 km/h. Higher speeds can cause an accident.
, hard braking and fast cornering. Risk of acci-
ompact spare tyres at the same time, risk of
rmal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on re wheel rim.
hicles not including a spare wheel) is
anel in the luggage compartment.
the Tyre Mobility System Tyre repair kit.
a container with sealing compound to repair the
generate the required tyre pressure. The kit will
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 239 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Compact temporary spare wheel*
The compact spare wheel (emergency wheel for vehicles
without the anti-puncture kit) should only be used when
strictly necessary.
The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage
compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.
How to use the compact temporary spare wheel
Should you ever have a punctured tyre, the compact temporary spare wheel
is only intended for temporary use until you can reach a workshop. The
standard-size road wheel should be replaced as soon as possible.
Please note the following restrictions when using the compact temporary
spare wheel. This spare wheel has been specially designed for your vehicle,
thus, it cannot be changed with the spare wheel from another vehicle.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the
compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Snow chains
For technical reasons, snow c
rary spare wheel.
If you should have a puncture
chains, fit the compact temp
You can then attach the snow
this wheel to replace the pun
WARNING
The tyre pressures must The emergency tyre pressur 135/90R16 is 4.2 bar; for all on the fuel cap. Failure to do
Do not drive faster than 8
Avoid heavy acceleration dent.
Never use two or more c accident.
No other type of tyre (no the compact temporary spa
Tyre repair kit
The tyre repair kit (for ve
stored under the floor p
Your vehicle is equipped with
The tyre repair kit consists of
puncture and a compressor to
Fig. 170 Luggage compartment. Access to the spare wheel
If and when240
on and place the warning triangle in position. d also warns other road users.
on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the
ng a stone or similar object under it to prevent
ents when doing so.
ribed below
o see page 241.
s.
ack in the corresponding zone.
then mount the spare wheel
firmly with the box spanner.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 240 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the penetration
of a foreign body into the tyre.
Note Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not
possible with the sealing compound.
Wheel change
Preparation work
What you must do before changing a wheel.
If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as
level as possible.
All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for
those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage
compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights This is for your own safety an
Caution If you have to change the tyre
wheel being changed by placi
the vehicle from rolling away.
Note Please observe legal requirem
Changing a wheel
Change the wheel as desc
Pull off the hub cap. Als
Slacken the wheel bolt
Raise the car with the j
Remove the wheel and
Lower the vehicle.
Tighten the wheel bolts
Replace the hub cap.
If and when 241
Safety Fir Technical Data
e removed to gain access to the wheel
ook from the tools into the designated
the bolt hole covers of the wheel cover
Fig. 171 Changing the wheel: Removing a hub cap
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 241 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
After changing a wheel
After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete.
Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.
Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compart-
ment and secure it.
Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as
possible.
Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as
possible with a torque wrench. The prescribed torque must be
120 Nm.
Note If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when
changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt torque
checked.
For your safety, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt torque has
been checked.
Wheel trims
The wheel trims must b
bolts.
Removing
Insert the extraction h ring, located in one of
fig. 171.
Pull off the hub cap.
If and when242
lts
loosened before raising the vehicle.
ar as it will go over the wheel bolt.
y the end turn it about one full turn to the
ar as it will go over the wheel bolt.
close to the end and turn the bolt to the
o unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel
Fig. 172 Changing the wheel: loosen the wheel bolts
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 242 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Wheel covers*
The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel
bolts
Removing
Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook.
Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover.
Fitting
Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put
pressure initially on the point of the cut-out for the valve. Then
press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so that it engages all
round.
Loosening the wheel bo
The wheel bolts must be
Loosening
Fit the box spanner as f
Grasp the box spanner b
left fig. 172.
Tightening
Fit the box spanner as f
Grasp the box spanner
right until it is secured.
An adapter is required t
bolts.
If and when 243
Safety Fir Technical Data
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 243 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack, loosening the wheel bolts more than one turn can result in an acci- dent.
Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing
down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle
for support and take care not to slip.
If and when244
t under the door sill closest to the wheel
73.
jacking point and turn the crank until the
ly below the vertical rib under the door
e arm of the jack fits around the rib under
vable base plate of the jack is flat on the
efective wheel is just clear of the ground.
of the door sills mark the jacking points
n made for each wheel. Do not fit the jack
jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.
ted on solid ground offering good support. Use
essary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as
ilar to prevent the jack from slipping.
at the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to ent.
ed if the jack is not applied at the correct a risk of injury since the jack can slip off engaged.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 244 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Raising the vehicle
In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised with
a jack.
Locate the jacking poin
to be changed fig. 1
Place the jack under the
arm of the jack is direct
sill.
Align the jack so that th
the door sill and the mo
ground fig. 174.
Raise the jack until the d
Recesses at the front and rear
fig. 173. A position has bee
anywhere else.
An unstable surface under the
Therefore, the jack must be fit
a large and stable base, if nec
tiles) use a rubber mat or sim
WARNING
Take all precautions so th do so could result in an accid
The vehicle can be damag jacking points. There is also suddenly if it is not properly
Fig. 173 The jacking points
Fig. 174 Fitting the jack
If and when 245
Safety Fir Technical Data
e wheel
the wheel, the following tasks must be
bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack,
ibed below:
g the hexagonal tool in the handle of the
ol) and place them on a clean surface
lts and tighten them lightly using the
e screwdriver handle.
Fig. 176 Changing the wheel: Hexagonal socket in screwdriver handle to turn the wheel bolts
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 245 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Jack position points for vehicles with skirting*
Vehicles with plastic skirting, with cover*
Remove the cap to access the anchor point for the vehicle jack
fig. 175.
Pull on the cover and remove it from its allotment in the direction
of the arrow fig. 175.
Once the cover has been released, it will remain connected to its
strap so that is not lost.
Removing and fitting th
For removal and fitting
completed.
After loosening the wheel
cange the wheel as descr
Removing a wheel
Unscrew the bolts usin
screwdriver (vehicle to
fig. 176.
Fitting a wheel
Screw in the wheel bo
hexagonal socket in th
Fig. 175 Plastic skirting with jack allotment cover
AA
If and when246
the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it
ar as it will go over the adapter.
heel bolt as appropriate.
eft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part of
oted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by
duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an
ead pattern
ad pattern must be fitted so that they
ction.
be identified by arrows on the sidewall that
on. Always note the direction of rotation indi-
This is important so that these tyres can give
ssive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.
to fit the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong
mely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum
rly important when driving on wet roads.
s of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the
ced as soon as possible so that all tyres again
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 246 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
The wheel bolts should be clean and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare
wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfaces. These
surfaces must be clean before fitting the wheel.
The hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle makes it easier to turn the
wheel bolts. The reversible screwdriver blade should be removed when the
tool is used for this purpose.
If tyres with a specific direction of rotation are fitted, note the direction of
rotation.
Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
Anti-theft wheel bolts
A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel
bolts.
Insert the adapter onto
will go fig. 177.
Fit the box spanner as f
Loosen or tighten the w
Error code
The code number of the anti-th
the adaptor.
The code number should be n
using the code number that a
Authorised Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tr
Tyres with directional tre
rotate in the correct dire
A directional tread pattern can
point in the direction of rotati
cated when fitting the wheel.
maximum grip and avoid exce
If, in an emergency, you have
direction, you must drive extre
performance. This is particula
To benefit from the advantage
defective tyre should be repla
rotate in the correct direction.
Fig. 177 Anti-theft wheel bolt
If and when 247
Safety Fir Technical Data
if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possible
aken before repairing a tyre.
r puncture, park the vehicle as far away
as possible.
irmly.
ut the selector lever to position P.
leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
behind the roadside crash barrier).
is possible using the Tyre Mobility System
nd safety notes.
from the affected wheel.
out of the luggage compartment.
s on and place the warning triangle in position. nd also warns other road users.
to repair a tyre on a slope.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 247 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Tyre repair kit (Tyre-Mobility-System)*
General information and safety notes
Your vehicle is equipped with a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.
In the event of a tyre puncture, a sealing compound and an air compressor are
located in the luggage compartment under the floor panel.
The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetra-
tion of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter.
It is not necessary to remove the foreign body from the tyre.
Instructions for the sealing compound are located on the sealing compound
container.
Notes for the proper use of the air compressor are included in an additional
instruction leaflet.
WARNING
Do not attempt to repair a puncture with the sealing compound if the tyre has been damaged by driving the car after the tyre has lost its air.
Always observe warnings and follow instructions concerning compressor and sealing compound carefully.
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h, avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.
Tyres which have been repaired with sealing compound are only suit- able for temporary use over a short period. Therefore, please drive carefully to the next available qualified workshop.
For the sake of the environment Used sealing compound containers should be disposed of at a proper facility.
Note Seek professional assistance
with the sealing compound.
Preparation work
Certain steps must be t
If you have a flat tyre o
from the flow of traffic
Apply the handbrake f
Engage first gear, or p
All passengers should
safe area (for instance
Check whether a repair
General information a
Unscrew inflation cap
Take the tyre repair kit
WARNING
Put the hazard warning light This is for your own safety a
Caution Take special care if you have
If and when248
with tyre pressure control, enter the new tyre
n on the central console.
ver be allowed to run for longer than 6
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 248 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Note Please observe legal requirements when doing so.
Tyre repair
The following sections describe the procedures for repairing
a tyre.
Using the sealing compound
The instructions on the can give detailed information on how to
use the sealing compound.
Inflating the tyre.
Remove the air compressor and hose from the container.
Screw the retaining nut onto the valve.
Plug the compressor cable into a 12 volt power point.
Turn on compressor and monitor the pressure shown on the pres-
sure gauge.
Completing the repair
Remove the compressor hose from the valve.
Fit the valve cap.
Unplug the compressor from the socket.
Return all tools to their proper storing location.
Note If the vehicle is equipped
pressures using the SET butto
The compressor should ne
minutes.
If and when 249
Safety Fir Technical Data
e steering wheel
and the component concerned.
e failed component page 251.
m inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the
e fuse out.
e (which will have a melted metal strip)
same ampere rating.
partment
and its failed electrical component.
r in the engine compartment by pressing
entre of the cover fig. 179.
e failed component page 251.
m inside the fuse cover (at left-hand end
t onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
e (which will have a melted metal strip)
same ampere rating.
ver back on to ensure no water can enter
its are protected by fuses. The fuses are located
d end of the dash panel and on the left-hand
ent.
tected by circuit breakers. These reset automat-
en the overload (caused for example by frozen
.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 249 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Fuses
Changing a fuse
Blown fuses must be replaced
Fuse cover underneath th
Switch off the ignition
Identify the fuse for th
Take the plastic clip fro
blown fuse and pull th
Replace the blown fus
with a new fuse of the
Fuse cover in engine com
Switch off the ignition
Prise off the fuse cove
the tabs towards the c
Identify the fuse for th
Take the plastic clip fro
of the dash panel), fit i
Replace the blown fus
with a new fuse of the
Carefully fit the fuse co
the fuse box.
The individual electrical circu
behind a cover at the left-han
side of the engine compartm
The electric windows are pro
ically after a few seconds wh
windows) has been corrected
Fig. 178 Left side of dash panel: Fuse box cover
Fig. 179 Fuse box cover in engine compartment
If and when250
ated in the following tables, there are others
echnical Service.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 250 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Fuses colour code
WARNING
Never repair damaged fuses and never replace them with fuses with a higher rating. Failure to comply could result in fire. This could also cause damage to other parts of the electrical system.
Note If a newly replaced fuse blows again after a short time, the electrical
system must be checked by a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to
another location in the electrical system.
Always keep some spare fuses in the vehicle. These are available from
SEAT dealers.
Apart from the fuses indic
which must be replaced by a T Colour Amperes
light brown 5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
Natural (white) 25
Green 30
orange 40
Red 50
white 80
Blue 100
grey 150
violet 200
If and when 251
Safety Fir Technical Data
ent 10
ng assistant) / Gear lever/ ESP 10
sensor/ Alarm horn 5
sensor / Light switch 10
pling automatic gearbox 20
20
creen) 10
r / Switchboard wiring 20
/ socket 20
40
ent 10
ent 10
ent 10
it (coupling) 15
Consumer Amps
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 251 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Fuses on left side of dash panel
Fuses
Number Consumer Amps
1 Vacant
2 Vacant
3 Vacant
4 Vacant
5 Vacant
6 Vacant
7 Vacant
8 Vacant
9 Airbag 5
10 RSE input (roof screen) 10
11 Vacant
11 Vacant
12 Left xenon headlight 10
13
Instrument panel (oil level)/Switchboard wiring
(BCM)/Heater / ABS, ESP/ Park Pilot/ Gate-
way/Flow meter
5
14 Gearbox/Servosteering/Brake light sensor/
Trailer/ ABS, ESP/ Haldex/ Light switch 10
15
Heated windscreen / Instrument lighting / Diag-
nosis switchboard/Engine management/Addi-
tional heating/AFS headlamps/Park Pilot
10
16 Right xenon headlight 10
17 Engine managem
18 Vacant
19 Vacant
20 Park Pilot (Parki
switchboard
21 Vacant
22 Volumetric alarm
23 Diagnosis / Rain
24 Vacant
25 Switchboard cou
26 Vacuum pump
27 RSE input (roof s
28 Rear wiper moto
29 Vacant
30 Cigarette lighter
31 Vacant
32 Vacant
33 Heater
34 Vacant
35 Vacant
36 Engine managem
37 Engine managem
38 Engine managem
39 Trailer control un
Number
If and when252
, while correct at the time of printing, is subject
should occur, please refer to the sticker on the
correct information for your model.
mpartment, left part
Consumer Amps
rs 20
30
it 5
20
15
l/Steering column 5
40
15
om Navigator 5
ent 5
ent 10
l unit 5
odule supply 15
odule supply 30
20
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 252 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain
models or are optional extras.
Please note that the above list
to alterations. If discrepancies
inside of the fuse cover for the
Fuses layout, engine co
Fuses
40 Trailer control unit (indicators, brakes and left
side) 20
41 Trailer control unit (fog light, reversing light and
right side) 20
42 BCM wiring switchboard 20
43 Trailer pre-installation 40
44 Rear window heater 25
45 Electric windows (front) 30
46 Rear electric windows 30
47 Engine (Fuel control unit, petrol relay) 15
48 Convenience controls 20
49 Heating controls 40
50 Heated seats 30
51 Sunroof 20
52 Headlight washer system 20
53 Vacant 20
54 Taxi (taximeter power supply) 5
55 Vacant 20
56 Taxi (taximeter power supply) 15
57 Vacant
58 Central locking control unit 30
Number Consumer Amps
Number
1 Windscreen wipe
2 DQ200 gearbox
3 Cable control un
4 ABS
5 AQ gearbox
6 Instrument pane
7 Ignition key
8 Radio
9 Telephone/TomT
10 Engine managem
Engine managem
11 Vacant
12 Electronic contro
13 Petrol injection m
Diesel injection m
14 Coil
If and when 253
Safety Fir Technical Data
st turn off the failed component.
Fingerprints vaporise in the heat, causing a
condensation on the mirror surface, thus
d by one of the same type. The type is inscribed
ss part or on the base.
keep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. At the
e bulbs, which are essential for road safety,
.
recting 4)
bulb changes must be made by the SEAT dealer, given
e removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made
m incorporated.
5 times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5
n bulbs, this means that, except due to unusual circum-
hange the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 253 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Bulb change
General notes
Before changing any bulb, fir
Do not touch the bulb glass.
reduction in the bulb life and
reducing efficiency.
A bulb should only be replace
on the bulb, either on the gla
It is highly recommended to
very least, the following spar
should be kept in the vehicle
Main headlights
Dipped beam — H7
Main beam — H1
Position — W5W
Indicator — PY21W
Xenon headlights23) /self-di
Dipped and full beam — D1S2
Daylight — P21W SLL
Position W5W
Indicators PY21W
15 Engine management 5
Pump relay 10
16 Right lighting 30
17 Horn 15
18 Vacant
19 Clean 30
20 Water pump 10
Pressure sensor pump for 1.8 engine 20
21a) Lambda probe 15
22 Brake pedal, speed sensor 5
23a)
Engine management 5
Engine management 10
Engine management 15
24 AKF, gearbox valve 10
25a) ABS pump 40
26 Left lighting 30
27a) Engine management 40
Engine management 50
28 Vacant
29a) Electric windows (front and back) 50
Electric windows (front) 30
30 Ignition key 50
a) Ampere rating according to motorisation
Number Consumer Amps
23) On this type of headlight, the
that complex elements must b
on the automatic control syste 24) The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.
times more than that of haloge
stances, there is no need to c
If and when254
Fig. 180 Main headlight lamps
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 254 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Fog lights
Fog lights — H3
Fixed rear light
Stop/Position — P21W25)
Indicator — P21W
Rear tailgate light unit
Fog light (driver’s side) — P21W
Reverse (passenger’s side) — P21W
Position — W5W
Side indicator
Side indicator — W5W
Registration plate light
Registration plate light — C5W
Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog
lights, the rear lights and the indicators may be temporarily misted. This has
no influence on the life expectancy of the lighting system. By switching on the
lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be
demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.
Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior
lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest
of your own safety, but also in that of all other road users.
Due to the difficulty in accessing the lamps, any replacement work should
be done by a SEAT dealer. However, the following is a description of how to
change the lamps except for the fog lights* and interior lamps.
Main headlight lamps
Indicator
Dipped headlights
Main beam headlights
Side lights
25) Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it
will not work in either position or Stop.
AA
AB
AC
AD
If and when 255
Safety Fir Technical Data
Fig. 182 Dipped head- lights
Fig. 183 Dipped head- lights
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 255 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Turn signal lamps
Raise the bonnet.
Rotate the lamp holder fig. 181 to the left and pull.
Remove the bulb by pressing on the lamp holder and rotating at
the same time to the left.
Installation is done in the reverse order.
Dipped beam lights
Raise the bonnet.
Fig. 181 Turn signal lamps
AA
If and when256
. 184 by pulling on this.
fig. 185 from the bulb.
185 inwards and to the right.
the replacement so that it sits correctly
reflector.
he reverse order.
Fig. 185 Main beam headlights
AC
A1
A2
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 256 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Remove the loops page 255, fig. 182 in the direction of
the arrow and remove the cover.
Remove the connector page 255, fig. 183 from the bulb.
Disengage the retainer spring page 255, fig. 183 pressing
inwards to the right.
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the
attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.
Main beam lights
Raise the bonnet.
Remove the cover fig
Remove the connector
Press the spring fig.
Extract the bulb and fit
into the cut-out on the
Installation is done in t
A1
A2
A3
Fig. 184 Main beam headlights
If and when 257
Safety Fir Technical Data
r fig. 187 outwards.
lling this out and inserting the replace-
the reverse order.
light
ntifog.
osition.
A1
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 257 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Side lights
Raise the bonnet.
Remove the cover fig. 186 by pulling on this.
Extract the lamp holde
Replace the bulb by pu
ment.
Installation is done in
Rear lights
On the body
Indicator, side and brake
On the tailgate
Left side: position and a
Right side: reverse and p
Fig. 186 Side lights
Fig. 187 Side lights
AD
If and when258
the left fig. 189.
nd change it for a new one.
in reverse order, taking special care when
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 258 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Indicator, side and brake lights on the bodywork
Remove the cover of the luggage compartment lateral panel
fig. 188.
Turn the lampholder to
Extract the failed bulb a
To refit follow the steps
fitting the lamp holder.
Fig. 188 Lights on vehicle body
Fig. 189 Lights on vehicle body
If and when 259
Safety Fir Technical Data
ut pressing on the securing pins and
b and replace it with another.
in reverse order, taking special care when
.
the left.
b and replace it with another.
verse order.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 259 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Position light, fog light and reverse light on the tailgate
Side lights
Open the tailgate.
Pull the cover off.
Take the lampholder o
extract it outwards.
Remove the blown bul
To refit follow the steps
fitting the lamp holder
Antifog and reverse light
Open the tailgate.
Pull the cover off.
Turn the lampholder to
Remove the blown bul
Installation is in the re
Fig. 190 Lights on the tailgate
Fig. 191 Side lights
If and when260
lights
ssing on the inside edge of this -arrow-
screwdriver fig. 193.
Fig. 193 Luggage compartment light
Fig. 194 Luggage compartment light
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 260 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Side indicators
Press the indicator to the left or to the right to remove the lamp.
Remove the lamp holder from the indicator.
Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.
Insert the lamp holder in the indicator guide until it clicks into
place.
First place the indicator in the opening in the bodywork, fixing
the tabs fig. 192, arrow .
Insert the bulb as shown by the arrow fig. 192.
Luggage compartment
Remove the bulb by pre
using the flat side of a
Fig. 192 Side indicator
A1
A2
If and when 261
Safety Fir Technical Data
aped fitting, unscrew the bolts fig. 195.
ing it in the direction of the arrow and
the reverse order.
Fig. 196 Registration light
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 261 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Press the lamp sideways and remove it from the housing
page 260, fig. 194.
Registration light
To remove the tulip-sh
Remove the bulb, mov
outwards fig. 196.
Installation is done in Fig. 195 Registration light
If and when262
ng it in the direction of the arrow and
e a sufficient wire cross section.
use of a discharged battery, the battery can be
other vehicle to start the engine.
the standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer’s
s section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol
for diesel engines.
h each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
are connected.
st be properly connected to the vehicle elec-
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 262 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Sunroof light
Carefully remove the lamp, using the flat side of the screwdriver,
as shown in the figure fig. 198.
Remove the bulb, movi
outwards fig. 198.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must hav
If the engine fails to start beca
connected to the battery of an
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with
documentation). The wire cros
engines and at least 35 mm2
Note The vehicles must not touc
soon as the positive terminals
The discharged battery mu
trical system.
Fig. 197 Removing sunroof light
Fig. 198 Removing sunroof light
If and when 263
Safety Fir Technical Data
of the black jump lead to a solid metal
olted on to the engine block, or onto the
he vehicle with the flat battery. Do not
ar the battery .
uch a way that they cannot come into
g parts in the engine compartment.
vehicle with the boosting battery and let
car with the flat battery and wait one or
ngine is running.
jump leads, switch off the headlights (if
wer and rear window heater in the vehicle
is helps minimise voltage peaks which are
ads are disconnected.
nning, disconnect the leads in reverse
en above.
o they have good metal-to-metal contact with
itch off the starter after about 10 seconds and
inute.
AX
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 263 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
How to jump start: description
fig. 199 shows the flat battery and the charged battery.
Jump lead terminal connections
Switch off the ignition on both vehicles .
1. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive fig. 199
terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery .
2. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive
terminal in the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal
on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance.
4. Connect the other end
component which is b
engine block itself of t
connect it to a point ne
5. Position the leads in s
contact with any movin
Starting
6. Start the engine of the
it run at idling speed.
7. Start the engine of the
two minutes until the e
Removing the jump leads
8. Before you remove the
they are switched on).
9. Turn on the heater blo
with the flat battery. Th
generated when the le
10. When the engine is ru
order to the details giv
Connect the battery clamps s
the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, sw
try again after about half a m
Fig. 199 How to connect the jump leads
AA AB
A+
A+
A—
If and when264
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 264 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
WARNING
Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 213, Working in the engine compartment.
The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.
Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.
The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.
Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
If and when 265
Safety Fir Technical Data
ing points if you use a tow-rope:
towing vehicle
til the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate
rs cautiously. If you are driving an auto-
te gently.
ke servo and power steering are not
you are towing. Brake earlier than you
ith a more gentle pressure on the brake.
towed vehicle
pe remains taut at all times when towing.
vehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a
tow-bar.
elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.
pe made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic
w-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a
ence, especially when using a tow-rope. Both
h the technique required for towing. Inexperi-
mpt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 265 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Towing and tow-starting
Tow-starting
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting
is preferable page 262.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.
Keep the clutch pressed down.
Switch the ignition on.
Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear
lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing
vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
Caution When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
General notes
Please observe the follow
Notes for the driver of the
Drive slowly at first un
gradually.
Begin and change gea
matic vehicle, accelera
Remember that the bra
working in the vehicle
would normally, but w
Notes for the driver of the
Ensure that the tow-ro
Tow-rope or tow-bar
It is easier and safer to tow a
tow-rope if you do not have a
A tow-rope should be slightly
It is advisable to use a tow-ro
material.
Attach the tow-rope or the to
towing bracket.
Driving style
Towing requires some experi
drivers should be familiar wit
enced drivers should not atte
If and when266
d when the vehicle has no electrical power. The
ith the front wheels raised. Towing should be
on.
ays be kept in the vehicle..
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 266 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the
tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-
loading and damaging the anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the
steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,
horn, windscreen wipers and washers.
As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply
considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.
As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you
will need more strength to steer than you normally would.
The vehicle must not be towed faster than 50 km/h.
The vehicle must not be towed faster than 50 km/h.
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
Put the selector lever into position N.
Do not drive faster than 50 km/h when towing a vehicle.
Do not tow further than 50 km.
If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels raised.
Note Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.
Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe
any regulations to the contrary.
For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be
tow-started.
If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,
you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels must be
raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified person.
The steering wheel is locke
vehicle must then be towed w
carried out by a qualified pers
The towing eye should alw
If and when 267
Safety Fir Technical Data
er down and leave the cover hanging on
e screw hole, insert a screwdriver into the
ntly.
s shown by the arrow anti-clockwise to the
nt fig. 200 or rear fig. 201 threaded
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 267 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Towing rings
Fitting the towing eye
Take the towing ring from the onboard tool set.
Pull the lower front cov
the vehicle.
Remove the cover of th
lower slot and lever ge
Screw the towing eye a
limit position in the fro
hole.
Fig. 200 The front right section of the vehicle: Fitting the front towing eye
Fig. 201 Fitting the towing eye to the rear of the vehicle
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 268 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
General notes on the technical data 269
Safety Fir tips Technical Data
iations used in this paragraph of the Technical Data
evia- n
Meaning
Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
p Brake horse power, formerly used to denote engine power
pm Revolutions per minute — engine speed.
Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km.
m Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km travelled.
2 Carbon dioxide
N Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.
N Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance
of petrol.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 269 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical
Technical Data
General notes on the technical data
Outstanding information
Important considerations
All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence
over this data.
All data provided in this manual are valid for the standard model in Spain. The
vehicle data card included in the inspection and maintenance schedule in the
vehicles registration documents show which engine is installed in the
vehicle.
The figures may be different depending on if additional equipment is fitted,
for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.
Abbrev
Abbr tio
kW
bh
at r
Nm
l/100
g/k
CO
C
RO
General notes on the technical data270
he inside of the spare wheel recess in the
rovided on the vehicle data sticker: fig. 202.
in the Maintenance Program.
er
ber (chassis number)
ne power output
letters
ior trim code
s
ided in the Maintenance Program.
km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) urban.
km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) road.
km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) combination.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 270 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Vehicle identification data
The most important data are given on the type plate and the
vehicle data sticker.
Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compartment.
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside
the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-
hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located
on the right hand side of the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on t
luggage compartment.
The following information is p
These data are also provided
Production control numb
Vehicle identification num
Model code number
Model designation / engi
Engine and gearbox code
Paintwork number / inter
Optional equipment code
Consumption values
CO2 emissions values.
Data from 2 to 9 are also prov
Consumption figures and CO2
Consumption (litres/100
Consumption (litres/100
Consumption (litres/100
Fig. 202 Vehicle data sticker boot
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
General notes on the technical data 271
Safety Fir Technical Data
vary from quoted test values, depending on
nd traffic conditions, the weather and the
ic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity
he figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the
onal equipment fittings or for the addition of
e vehicle will increase .
tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicle’s handling and lead to an acci- eed and driving style to suit road conditions
xle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight ad or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the e vehicle may change, leading to accidents, ehicle.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 271 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Data on fuel consumption
Fuel consumption
The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle
data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.
The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions of the vehicle can be found on the
vehicle data sticker.
The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the vehicle
weight category, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox
combination and the equipment fitted.
The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the
EC test requirements 1999/100/EC. These test requirements specify a real-
istic test method based on normal everyday driving.
The following test conditions are applied:
Note Actual consumption may
personal driving style, road a
vehicle condition.
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the bas
and without optional extras. T
weight of the driver.
For special versions and opti
accessories, the weight of th
WARNING
Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Always adjust your sp and requirements.
Never exceed the gross a rating. If the allowed axle lo driving characteristics of th injuries and damage to the v
Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving
is then simulated.
Extra urban
cycle
In the extra urban cycle simulation the vehicle frequently
accelerates and brakes in all gears, as in normal everyday
driving. The road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h.
Total con-
sumption
The average total consumption is calculated with a weighting
of around 37% for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra
urban cycle.
CO2 emis-
sions
The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to
calculate carbon dioxide emissions. The gas composition is
then analysed to evaluate the CO2 content and other emis-
sions.
General notes on the technical data272
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 272 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weights
The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive
trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are
valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain
circumstances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other coun-
tries. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these
data .
Drawbar load
The maximum permitted weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint
of the towing bracket must not exceed 75 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow
approaching the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the
road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,
empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with an axle
base of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a legal
stipulation for a drawbar load.
WARNING
For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h limit. This is also valid in countries where higher speeds are permitted.
Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the draw bar loading. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Technical Data 273
Safety Fir Technical Data
tions and restrictions on the technical data are
.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 273 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Technical Data
Checking fluid levels
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the
vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids,
otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.
Coolant expansion tank
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil dipstick
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)
The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the components
mentioned above. These operations are described in the page 213.
Overview
Further explanations, instruc
contained as of page 269
Fig. 203 Diagram for the location of the various elements
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Technical Data274
ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 274 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 63 (85)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 132/ 3800
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1390
Compression 10,5 0,3
Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R
a) With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 169
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 15,1
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1950
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1405
Front gross axle weight in kg 934
Rear gross axle weight in kg 1033
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical Data 275
Safety Fir Technical Data
ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 275 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Trailer without brakes 700
With brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 2.8 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 92 (125)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 1500-4000
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1390
Compression 10
Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R
a) With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 194
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,0
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,5
Technical Data276
RON or Premium unleaded 95 RONa)
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 276 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 bhp)
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2023
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1478
Front gross axle weight in kg 1004
Rear gross axle weight in kg 1036
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 730
With brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1300
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 75 (102)/ 5600
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 148/ 3800
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1595
Compression 10,3 0,5
Fuel Super Plus unleaded 98
a) With a slight power loss
Technical Data 277
Safety Fir Technical Data
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 277 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 181
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 13,0
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1979
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1434
Front gross axle weight in kg 971
Rear gross axle weight in kg 1025
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 710
With brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 4.1 litres
Technical Data278
ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 278 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Petrol engine 1.8 litre 118 kW (160 hp). Manual
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 118 (160)/4500-6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/ 1500-4500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1798
Compression 9,6-0,5
Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R
a) With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 210
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,0
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,6
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2050
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1505
Front gross axle weight in kg 1068
Rear gross axle weight in kg 1043
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical Data 279
Safety Fir Technical Data
ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 279 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.8 litre 118 kW (160 hp). Automatic
General engine data
Performance figures
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 4.6 litres
Power output in kW (HP) rpm 118 (160)/ 4500-6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/ 1500-4500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1798
Compression 9,6-0,5
Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R
a) With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 210
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,0
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,6
Technical Data280
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 280 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 77 kW (105 bhp).
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2070
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1525
Front gross axle weight in kg 1068
Rear gross axle weight in kg 1043
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 4.6 litres
Power output in kW (HP) rpm 77 (105) 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1900
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1896
Compression 18,5
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Technical Data 281
Safety Fir Technical Data
Automatic
183
8,2
12,7
Automatic
2094
1549
1080
1031
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 281 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Manual
Maximum speed in km/h 183
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12,6
Manual
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2064
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1519
Front gross axle weight in kg 1050
Rear gross axle weight in kg 1031
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Technical Data282
Automatic
201
6,7
10,0
Automatic
2124
1579
1112
1029
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 282 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Diesel engine 2.0l 103 kW (140 bhp).
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Power output in kW (HP) rpm 103 (140)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 — 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968
Compression 18,5 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Manual
Maximum speed in km/h 201
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,0
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,0
Manual
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2089
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1544
Front gross axle weight in kg 1082
Rear gross axle weight in kg 1024
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical Data 283
Safety Fir Technical Data
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 283 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 125 (170)/ 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350/ 1750-2500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968
Compression 16,5
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 211
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,7
Technical Data284
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 284 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2089
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1544
Front gross axle weight in kg 1082
Rear gross axle weight in kg 1024
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Engine oil capacity with oil filter change. 4,8 litres
Technical Data 285
Safety Fir Technical Data
m
Rear
1,506 mm
1,514 mm
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 285 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Dimensions and capacities
Dimensions
Length, width 4,467 mm/ 1,768 m
Height at kerb weight 1,575 mm
Front and rear projection 913 mm/ 976 mm
Wheelbase 2,578 mm
Turning circle 10.7 m
Track widtha)
a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
Front
1,527 mm
1,535mm
Capacities
Fuel tank 55 l. Reserve 7 l.
Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 3 l/ 5.5 l
Tyre pressure
Summer-grade tyres:
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 286 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Index 287
tery
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
tension device
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ke assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
ke fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
ke pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
ke servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 190
ke system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
kes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
king distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
b changes
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
b defect
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
zer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116, 165
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 287 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Index
A ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
AFS (curve lights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Air conditioner*
2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Air conditioning system
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Air recirculation mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Alarm system
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Alternator
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Ambient temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 69
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Anti-puncture tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*
Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . 125
Deactivating anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . 125
Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox . 170
Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Automatic mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Automatic wiper/wash function for the rear window
124
Auxiliary audio connection: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . 146
B Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Bat
Belt
Belt
Bio
Bio
Bon
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bul
Bul
Buz
Index288
k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
seat covers cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
es hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
rol lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
rol lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
rols
lectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
ight switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
enience closing
liding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
enience opening
indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220, 221
oolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
ant level
arning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
ant Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
ant temperature
isplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
afety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
e control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
e control*
urning off the cruise control system . . . . 182
in airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
escription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
unction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
afety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 288 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
C Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Automatic speed dependent locking and un-
locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Locking system for involuntary unlocking . . 93
Selective unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Central locking button
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Centre arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Changing gear
See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Changing the lamps
Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Changing the main headlight lamps
dipped beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
turn signal lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Changing the rear light lamps
Position light, fog light and rear light on the
tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Changing the rear lights
Indicator, side and brake lights on the
bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 223
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 228
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Child seats
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Cigarette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Cleaning alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . . . 199
Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Climatronic
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Cloc
Cloth
Cloth
Cock
Cont
Cont
Cont
E
L
Conv
S
W
Conv
W
Cool
C
Cool
Cool
w
Cool
Cool
D
S
Cruis
W
Cruis
T
Curta
D
F
S
Index 289
tronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
tronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 166
tronic stabilisation program . . . . . . . . . . . 185
tronic stabilisation programme . . . . . . . . . . 81
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
tronic stabilisation programme (ESP)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
rgency braking function . . . . . . . . . . 115, 183
rgency manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
rgency opening
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
ssion control system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
ine
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
ine compartment
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 213
ine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
ine fault
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
ine management
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
ine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
ine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 289 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
D Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Daytime lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Diesel engine
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Differential lock fault (EDL)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Disabling front passenger airbag
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Disabling the airbag
Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 43
Display (without warning or information texts) . 58
Displays in the Multi-function display
Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Disposal
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Doors
Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Drinks holders at the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Drive wheels traction control system . . . . . . . . 184
Driveshaft differential
XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Economical/ Environtmental . . . . . . . . . . . 192
With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Driving with an automatic gearbox / DSG automatic
gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Dynamic curve lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 113
E Ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
EDS
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Electric steering system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Electrical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Elec
Elec
Elec
Elec
Elec
Eme
eme
Eme
Emi
Eng
Eng
Eng
Eng
Eng
Eng
Eng
Index290
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
ral overview of the engine compartment 273
e compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 175
rd warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
restraints
djusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 130
djustment of the head restraint angle . . . 130
emoving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
restraints, correct adjustment . . . . . . . . . 13
n-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14
light flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
lights
riving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
og lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
asher system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ed front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
ed window
C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 290 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Engine oil pressure
monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Environmental tip
Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 185
Example of menu use
Program a speed limit warning . . . . . . . . . . 65
To activate and deactivate the speed limit
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Example of the use of the menus
Open the Configuration menu with the MFD
lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Open the Configuration menu with the steering
wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Examples of menu use
Open the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Open the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
To close the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Exhaust gasses purification system . . . . . . . . 191
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
F Fabric trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
folding table* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Folding the seat backrests down . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Foot brake
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Four wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Front interior light type 1
Switching light off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Switching light on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Front interior light type 2
Switching light off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Switching light on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 43
Front reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Front seat adjustment
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Frontal airbags
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fuel
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Fuel level
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fuel Tank
Opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Fuel tank
See Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fuel: saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Fuse
G G 12
Gear
Gene
Glov
Glow
W
H Hand
W
Haza
head
A
a
R
head
I
Head
Head
Head
D
F
W
Heat
Heat
2
Index 291
IA-IN* connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
age display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
ors
Exterior mirrors, electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Make-up mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ile telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
ti-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
ti-purpose* mobile stowage compartment 142
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
ber of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
ervations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
ane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
-touch opening and closing
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
ning and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 291 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
I Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Indicators
indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Information texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Instrument panel menu
Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Example of menu use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Lights and visibility menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Instrument panel menus
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Vehicle status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Intermittent wipe, windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
J Jack position points
Skirting with cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
K Key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
L Leather cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Load compartment in the boot
See Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 148
See also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 17
Luggage compartment cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Luggage compartment retaining net . . . . . . . . 139
M Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 116
Main beam headlights
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Maintenance
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Manual mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
MED
MFD
Mile
Mirr
Mob
Mul
Mul
N Num
O Obs
Oct
Oil
Oil
Oil
One
Ope
Index292
irs
irbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
acement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
ounter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
rse gear
anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
back function
liding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
stowage compartment* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
er seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
ing in
ngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ty equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ty instructions
oolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
ty notes
irbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
elt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
urtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
isabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . 44
rontal airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
ide airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 292 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Overview
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
P Paintwork
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Parts replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Petrol engines, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 20
Plastic key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 199
R Radio frequency remote control
Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Radio navigation Steering wheel controls
audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Radio wave remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Rain sensor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rear drink holder*
Armrest* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Rear fog light
Indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Rear interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Rear reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Rear window heating
Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Recommended gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Remote control key
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Repa
a
Repl
Rev c
Reve
M
Roll-
S
W
Roof
Roof
Roof
Rubb
Runn
E
S Safe
Safe
Safe
Safe
C
Safe
A
B
C
D
f
s
Index 293
wage area
Centre arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Other stowage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
wage compartment
Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
wage in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . 138
visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
roof blind
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
tch
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
tches
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Electrical exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
tching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
k
fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 293 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Safety system- safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 131, 133
Seat belt position
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Seat belts protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Selective opening* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Self directional headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
servotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Sitting position
Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate
filter
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Spare wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Starting on an uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Starting Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 167
After the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . 167
Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Steering wheel audio controls
audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 163
Sto
Sto
Sto
Sun
Sun
Sun
Sun
Swi
Swi
Swi
T Tail
Tan
TCS
Index294
metric sensor*
ctivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
eactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
ing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
ing lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
ing reports
ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ing texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
ing triangle and first-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . 147
her fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
hing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
hing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 201
r
arning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
r in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 222
r indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
el bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
orque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
el change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
el trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
els . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 29
should head restraints be correctly adjusted?
13
to wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 29
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 294 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
TCS (Traction control system)
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 21
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Traction control system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Trailer
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Trailer turn signals
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Trips, checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 116
Turning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Tyre Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 239
Tyre monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239, 247
Tyre-Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . . . . . 247
Tyres and wheels
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Tyres service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 230
U Underbody sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Unlocking and locking
Personalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Using the Tiptronic gear system . . . . . . . . . . . 173
V Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Vehicle Maintenance
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Vehicle paintwork
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 199
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Vehicle tools
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Vehicle wallet storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Volu
A
D
W Warn
Warn
Warn
R
Y
Warn
Warn
Was
Was
Was
Wate
w
Wate
Wea
Whe
T
Whe
Whe
Whe
Why
Why
Why
Why
Index 295
AlteaXL_EN.book Seite 295 Montag, 2. Februar 2009 12:26 12
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Windscreen washer fluid
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Windscreen wiper blades
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Changing the rear blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Winter driving
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Wiper/wash automatic function . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 213
SE AT
A LT
EA X
L O
W N
ER S
M A
N U
A L
In gl
s 5P
80 12
00 3B
H (
11 .0
(
G T9
)
5P 80
12 00
3B H
A LT
EA X
L In
gl s
(1 1.
08 )
Portada ALTEA XL.qxd 23/12/08 09:53 Pgina 3
Посмотреть инструкция для Seat Altea XL (2014) бесплатно. Руководство относится к категории автомобили, 13 человек(а) дали ему среднюю оценку 8.4. Руководство доступно на следующих языках: английский. У вас есть вопрос о Seat Altea XL (2014) или вам нужна помощь? Задайте свой вопрос здесь
Не можете найти ответ на свой вопрос в руководстве? Вы можете найти ответ на свой вопрос ниже, в разделе часто задаваемых вопросов о Seat Altea XL (2014).
Как перевести мили в километры?
1 миля равна 1,609344 километрам, а 1 километр — 0,62137119 милям.
Где я могу узнать идентификационный номер транспортного средства Seat?
Место размещения идентификационного номера транспортного средства зависит от марки и типа транспортного средства. Номер может быть выбит на раме транспортного средства или указан на номерном знаке. Чтобы узнать место расположения идентификационного номера транспортного средства лучше всего ознакомиться с руководством по эксплуатации Seat Altea XL (2014).
Что такое идентификационный номер транспортного средства (VIN)?
Идентификационный номер транспортного средства — уникальный для каждого транспортного средства идентификационный номер. Аббревиатура VIN расшифровывается как «Vehicle Identification Number» (Идентификационный номер транспортного средства).
Когда транспортному средству Seat требуется техническое обслуживание?
Регулярное техническое обслуживание необходимо всем транспортным средствам. С информацией о том, как часто необходимо проходить техническое обслуживание и чему именно стоит уделять особое внимание можно ознакомиться в инструкции по техническому обслуживанию. Как правило, транспортное средство требует технического обслуживания каждые 2 года или 30 000 километров пробега.
Когда следует заменять тормозную жидкость на Seat?
Тормозную жидкость рекомендуется менять каждые два года.
В чем разница между топливом E10 и E5?
В топливе E10 содержится до десяти процентов этанола, в то время как в E5 содержится менее пяти процентов. Соответственно, топливо E10 менее вредит окружающей среде.
Одна или несколько дверей не открываются изнутри. Что мне делать?
Скорее всего, замок оснащен защитой от детей и поэтому не может быть открыт изнутри. Процедура открытия замка с защитой от детей зависит от марки и типа замка.
Автомобильный радиоприемник не включается, что делать?
Если автомобильный радиоприемник не включен, на него не будет подаваться питание. Убедитесь, что красный провод подключен к контактному источнику питания, а желтый провод — к источнику питания постоянной мощности.
Инструкция Seat Altea XL (2014) доступно в русский?
К сожалению, у нас нет руководства для Seat Altea XL (2014), доступного в русский. Это руководство доступно в английский.
Не нашли свой вопрос? Задайте свой вопрос здесь
client@manualforauto.ru
- Магазин Manualforauto
- Как заказать
- Доставка
- Гарантия
- Возврат товара
Все файлы и ссылки на файлы, выложенные на сайте, были найдены в сети интернет как свободно распростроняемые и предоставлены лишь для ознакомления с ними, последующим удалением с вашего компьютера и покупкой (при необходимости) у авторов продукции. Если вы являетесь правообладателем какого либо контента и не желаете его свободного распространения,
сообщите нам и нарушение будет устранено.
#Автолитература
Manufacturer: SEAT, Model Year: 2008,
Model line: Altea XL,
Model: Seat Altea XL 2008
Pages: 317, PDF Size: 9.56 MB
Trending: headlights, fuse box, engine, checking oil, wiper fluid, engine oil capacity, fuse
Page 1 of 317
Page 2 of 317
Page 3 of 317
Page 4 of 317
Page 5 of 317
Page 6 of 317
Page 7 of 317
Page 8 of 317
Page 9 of 317
Page 10 of 317
- Load next 10 pages
Trending: Radio, wiper fluid, engine oil capacity, engine coolant, tow, alarm, oil change
View, print and download for free: Seat Altea XL 2008 Owner’s Manual, 317 Pages, PDF Size: 9.56 MB. Search in Seat Altea XL 2008 Owner’s Manual online. CarManualsOnline.info is the largest online database of car user manuals. Seat Altea XL 2008 Owner’s Manual PDF Download.
All product names, logos, and brands are property of their respective owners.
Privacy Policy | About Us & Contact